Administrator Guide

ManualsBrandsDell ManualsserversDell Force10 MXL Blade

Dell Networking Command Line Reference Guide for

the MXL 10/40GbE Switch I/O Module

9.7(0.0)

Summary of content (1264 pages)

PAGE 1
Dell Networking Command Line Reference Guide for the MXL 10/40GbE Switch I/O Module 9.7(0.
PAGE 2
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Copyright © 2015 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. This product is protected by U.S. and international copyright and intellectual property laws.
PAGE 3
Contents 1 About this Guide............................................................................................................ 44 Objectives........................................................................................................................................................................ 44 Audience..........................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 4
banner login......................................................................................................................................................................73 banner motd..................................................................................................................................................................... 74 clear alarms...........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 5
show system...................................................................................................................................................................103 show tech-support......................................................................................................................................................... 104 telnet.........................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 6
ip access-list standard.....................................................................................................................................................132 permit (for Standard IP ACLs)........................................................................................................................................ 132 seq...................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 7
match metric...................................................................................................................................................................175 match route-type............................................................................................................................................................ 175 match tag...................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 8
show cam-acl-vlan......................................................................................................................................................... 240 cam-acl-vlan................................................................................................................................................................... 241 show cam-usage...............................................................................................................................................
PAGE 9
bgp non-deterministic-med............................................................................................................................................ 267 bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop.......................................................................................................................................... 268 bgp regex-eval-optz-disable...........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 10
neighbor update-source................................................................................................................................................. 293 neighbor weight............................................................................................................................................................. 293 network............................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 11
show ipv6 mbgproutes...................................................................................................................................................330 10 Content Addressable Memory (CAM).........................................................................331 CAM Profile Commands..................................................................................................................................................331 cam-acl (Configuration)...................................
PAGE 12
dcb enable pfc-queues...................................................................................................................................................363 dcb {ets | pfc} enable.....................................................................................................................................................364 dcb-policy buffer-threshold (Interface Configuration)....................................................................................................
PAGE 13
show ip dhcp configuration............................................................................................................................................ 392 show ip dhcp conflict..................................................................................................................................................... 393 show ip dhcp server...................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 14
show link-bundle distribution...........................................................................................................................................413 16 FC FLEXIO FPORT.....................................................................................................414 feature fc........................................................................................................................................................................ 414 fc zone..........................
PAGE 15
mode...............................................................................................................................................................................441 protocol frrp................................................................................................................................................................... 442 show frrp...........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 16
interface ManagementEthernet..................................................................................................................................... 469 interface null.................................................................................................................................................................. 469 interface range......................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 17
23 IPv4 Routing.............................................................................................................. 512 arp.................................................................................................................................................................................. 512 arp learn-enable.............................................................................................................................................................. 513 arp retries......
PAGE 18
show tcp statistics......................................................................................................................................................... 545 24 Internet Protocol Security (IPSec)............................................................................ 547 crypto ipsec transform-set.............................................................................................................................................547 crypto ipsec policy..........................
PAGE 19
trust ipv6-diffserv.......................................................................................................................................................... 576 27 IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP)................................................................578 IPv6 BGP Commands.....................................................................................................................................................578 address family.......................................
PAGE 20
neighbor activate............................................................................................................................................................ 601 neighbor advertisement-interval..................................................................................................................................... 601 neighbor allowas-in..................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 21
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group............................................................................................................................. 628 show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary................................................................................................................................ 628 show ip bgp next-hop....................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 22
advertise dcbx-app-tlv................................................................................................................................................... 654 iscsi aging time...............................................................................................................................................................654 iscsi cos......................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 23
isis hello-multiplier...........................................................................................................................................................677 isis hello padding.............................................................................................................................................................677 isis ipv6 metric.........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 24
clear mac-address-table ................................................................................................................................................706 mac-address-table aging-time........................................................................................................................................ 707 mac-address-table static................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 25
advertise med video-conferencing................................................................................................................................. 734 advertise med voice-signaling.........................................................................................................................................734 advertise med voice.......................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 26
spanning-tree mstp........................................................................................................................................................ 759 tc-flush-standard........................................................................................................................................................... 760 36 Multicast................................................................................................................... 762 IPv4 Multicast Commands....
PAGE 27
ip ospf dead-interval.......................................................................................................................................................785 ip ospf hello-interval....................................................................................................................................................... 785 ip ospf message-digest-key....................................................................................................................................
PAGE 28
debug ipv6 ospf bfd....................................................................................................................................................... 822 debug ipv6 ospf............................................................................................................................................................. 823 default-information originate...................................................................................................................................
PAGE 29
ip pim query-interval....................................................................................................................................................... 851 ip pim register-filter........................................................................................................................................................ 852 ip pim rp-address...........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 30
ip local-proxy-arp............................................................................................................................................................879 private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan............................................................................................................................. 879 private-vlan mode........................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 31
match mac access-group...............................................................................................................................................908 match mac dot1p........................................................................................................................................................... 908 match mac vlan..........................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 32
ip split-horizon................................................................................................................................................................937 maximum-paths..............................................................................................................................................................937 neighbor.....................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 33
AAA Accounting Commands.......................................................................................................................................... 964 aaa accounting...............................................................................................................................................................964 aaa accounting suppress................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 34
debug ip ssh....................................................................................................................................................................991 ip scp topdir....................................................................................................................................................................991 ip ssh authentication-retries..........................................................................................................................
PAGE 35
show sflow.................................................................................................................................................................... 1016 show sflow stack-unit....................................................................................................................................................1017 50 Service Provider Bridging.........................................................................................1018 debug protocol-tunnel..............
PAGE 36
logging on.....................................................................................................................................................................1044 logging source-interface............................................................................................................................................... 1045 logging synchronous............................................................................................................................................
PAGE 37
55 System Time and Date............................................................................................. 1072 clock set....................................................................................................................................................................... 1072 clock summer-time date............................................................................................................................................... 1073 clock summer-time recurring..........
PAGE 38
no interface management ethernet ip address..............................................................................................................1094 reload........................................................................................................................................................................... 1095 show boot blc..............................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 39
primary-priority...............................................................................................................................................................1117 show ip mroute...............................................................................................................................................................1117 show vlt backup-link......................................................................................................................................
PAGE 40
Interworking of DCB Map With DCB Buffer Threshold Settings.............................................................................. 1148 Fibre Channel over Ethernet for FC Flex IO Modules.....................................................................................................1149 NPIV Proxy Gateway for FC Flex IO Modules................................................................................................................1149 description (for FCoE maps).............................
PAGE 41
show dcb.................................................................................................................................................................1179 show interface dcbx detail....................................................................................................................................... 1179 show interface ets...................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 42
IGMP Snooping Commands.....................................................................................................................................1217 Layer 2.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1221 MAC Addressing Commands..................................................................................................................................
PAGE 43
reload-type................................................................................................................................................................... 1244 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD)..................................................................................................................................... 1245 clear ufd-disable..................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 44
1 About this Guide This book provides information about the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI). This book also includes information about the protocols and features found in the Dell OS and on the Dell Networking systems supported by the Dell OS.
PAGE 45
x|y Keywords and parameters separated by a bar require you to choose one option. x||y Keywords and parameters separated by a double bar allows you to choose any or all of the options. Information Icons This book uses the following information symbols: NOTE: The Note icon signals important operational information. CAUTION: The Caution icon signals information about situations that could result in equipment damage or loss of data.
PAGE 46
2 CLI Basics This chapter describes the command line interface (CLI) structure and command modes. The Dell operating software commands are in a text-based interface that allows you to use the launch commands, change command modes, and configure interfaces and protocols. Accessing the Command Line When the system boots successfully, you are positioned on the command line in EXEC mode and not prompted to log in. You can access the commands through a serial console port or a Telnet session.
PAGE 47
In this case, the user is “admin” on vty2. Navigating the CLI The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) displays a command line interface (CLI) prompt comprised of the host name and CLI mode. • Host name is the initial part of the prompt and is “Dell” by default. You can change the host name with the hostname command. • CLI mode is the second part of the prompt and reflects the current CLI mode.
PAGE 48
Example The following is an example of typing ip ? at the prompt: Dell(conf)#ip ? igmp Internet Group Management Protocol route Establish static routes telnet Specify telnet options When entering commands, you can take advantage of the following timesaving features: • The commands are not case-sensitive. • You can enter partial (truncated) command keywords. For example, you can enter int gig int interface for the interface gigabitethernet interface command.
PAGE 49
Using the Keyword no Command To disable, delete or return to default values, use the no form of the commands. For most commands, if you type the keyword no in front of the command, you disable that command or delete it from the running configuration. In this guide, the no form of the command is described in the Syntax portion of the command description.
PAGE 50
Command Modes To navigate and launch various CLI modes, use specific commands. Navigation to these modes is described in the following sections. EXEC Mode When you initially log in to the switch, by default, you are logged in to EXEC mode. This mode allows you to view settings and enter EXEC Privilege mode, which is used to configure the device. When you are in EXEC mode, the > prompt is displayed following the host name prompt, which is “Dell” by default.
PAGE 51
Prompt Interface Type Dell(conf-ifnu-0)# Null Interface then zero Dell(conf-ifpo-0)# Port-channel interface number Dell(conf-ifvl-0)# VLAN Interface then VLAN number (range 1–4094) Dell(conf-ifma-0/0)# Management Ethernet interface then slot/port information Dell(conf-ifrange)# Designated interface range (used for bulk configuration).
PAGE 52
1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the protocol spanning-tree mstp command. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. Per-VLAN SPANNING TREE (PVST+) Plus Mode To enable and configure the Per-VLAN Spanning Tree (PVST+) protocol, use PVST+ mode. For more information, refer to Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+). NOTE: The protocol name is PVST+, but the plus sign is dropped at the CLI prompt. To enter PVST+ mode: 1.
PAGE 53
2. Use the route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] command. The prompt changes to include (config-route-map). You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. ROUTER OSPF Mode To configure OSPF, use ROUTER OSPF mode. For more information, refer to Open Shortest Path First (OSPF). To enter ROUTER OSPF mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the router ospf {process-id} command. The prompt changes to include (conf-router_ospf-id).
PAGE 54
3 File Management This chapter contains command line interface (CLI) commands needed to manage the configuration files as well as other file management commands. The commands in this chapter are supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). boot system Tell the system where to access the Dell Networking OS image used to boot the system.
PAGE 55
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced the support for bmp-boot on the MXL switch. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.17.0 Introduced on the MXL switch. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. To display these changes in the show bootvar command output, save the running configuration to the startup configuration (using the copy command) and reload system. The keyword bmp-boot is used only when the device boots up from BMP.
PAGE 56
Command Modes Command History Usage Information To copy the startup configuration Enter the keywords startup-config. To copy a file on the external FLASH Enter the keyword slot0:// then the filename. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The Dell Networking OS supports a maximum of 100 files at the root directory level, on both the internal and external Flash. The usbflash commands are supported.
PAGE 57
Password to login remote host: Destination file name [test.cfg]: test1.cfg Related Commands cd – changes the working directory. copy running-config startup-config Copy running configuration to the startup configuration. Syntax copy running-config startup-config {duplicate} Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 58
flash: 2143281152 bytes total (1389801472 bytes free) Dell# Related Commands cd — Changes the working directory. format flash Erase all existing files and reformat the filesystem in the internal flash memory. After the filesystem is formatted, files cannot be restored. Syntax format {flash: | usbflash:} Defaults flash memory Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 59
Destination file name [sample_file]: Defaults None. Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 9.3(0.1) Introduced on the S6000, Z9000, S4810, and S4820T. Example copy http://admin:admin123@10.16.206.77/sample_file flash://sample_file Related Commands copy ftp:flash Copy files from FTP server to switch logging coredump Enable coredump. Syntax logging coredump stack-unit all Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 60
password Enter a password to access the target server. Defaults Crash kernel files are uploaded to flash by default. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.4.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Because flash space may be limited, using this command ensures your entire crash kernel files are uploaded successfully and completely. Only a single coredump server can be configured.
PAGE 61
show boot system Displays information about boot images currently configured on the system. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Example show boot system stack-unit {0-5 | all} 0–5 Enter this information to display the boot image information of only the entered stack-unit. all Enter the keyword all to display the boot image information of all the stack-units in the stack. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 62
boot system gateway 10.11.209.
PAGE 63
Related Commands Field Description Prefixes Displays the name of the storage location. format flash — Erases all the existing files and reformats the filesystem in the internal flash memory. show file — Displays the contents of a text file in the local filesystem. show startup-config — Displays the current SFM status. show os-version Display the release and software image version information of the image file specified.
PAGE 64
CPLD IMAGE INFORMATION : ------------------------------------------------------Card CPLD Name Version Stack-unit 5 IOM SYSTEM CPLD 5 Dell# show running-config Display the current configuration and display changes from the default values.
PAGE 65
Command Modes Command History Example pim for the current PIM configuration policy-mapinput for the current input policy map configuration policy-mapoutput for the current output policy map configuration prefix-list for the current prefix-list configuration privilege for the current privilege configuration radius for the current RADIUS configuration resolve for the current DNS configuration rip for the current RIP configuration route-map for the current route map configuration snmp for
PAGE 66
! hostname FTOS ! ... Example Dell#show running-config status running-config bytes 4306, checksum 0x4D55EE70 startup-config bytes 4344, checksum 0x6472C5E Dell# Usage Information The status option allows you to display the size and checksum of the running configuration and the startup configuration. show startup-config Display the startup configuration. Syntax show startup-config Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 67
Example Dell#show version Dell Force10 Real Time Operating System Software Dell Force10 Operating System Version: 1.0 Dell Force10 Application Software Version: E8-3-16-29 Copyright (c) 1999-2012 by Dell Inc. All Rights Reserved.
PAGE 68
upgrade boot Upgrade the bootflash image or bootselector image. Syntax upgrade boot {all | bootflash-image | bootselector-image} stack-unit {0-5 | all} {booted | flash: |ftp: | tftp: | usbflash:} (A: | B:} Parameters all Enter the keyword all to change both the bootflash and bootselecter images. bootflash-image Enter the keywords bootflash-image to change the bootflash image. bootselector-image Enter the keywords bootselector-image to change the bootselector image.
PAGE 69
upgrade system Upgrade the bootflash image or system image. Syntax Parameters upgrade system {flash: | ftp: | scp: | tftp: | usbflash: | stack-unit {0-5 | all} {A: | B:} 0–5 Enter the keyword 0–5 to upgrade only the mentioned stack-unit. all Enter the keyword all to upgrade all the member units of the stack. ftp After entering the keyword ftp you can either follow it with the location of the source file in this form://userid:password@hostip/filepath, or press Enter to launch a prompt sequence.
PAGE 70
verify Validate the software image on the flash drive after the image has been transferred to the system, but before the image has been installed. Syntax verify { md5 | sha256 }[ flash:// ] img-file [hash-value] Parameters md5 Enter the md5 keyword to use the MD5 message-digest algorithm. sha256 Enter the sha256 keyword to use the SHA256 Secure Hash Algorithm flash:// (Optional). Enter the flash:// keyword. The default is to use the flash drive. You can just enter the image file name.
PAGE 71
4 Control and Monitoring This chapter describes control and monitoring for the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. asset-tag Assign and store a unique asset-tag to the stack member. Syntax asset-tag stack-unit unit id Asset-tag ID To remove the asset tag, use no stack-unit unit-id Asset-tag ID command. Parameters stack-unit unit-id Enter the keywordsstack-unit then the unit-id to assign a tag to the specific member. The range is from 0 to 5.
PAGE 72
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You must save the configuration and reload the system to implement ASF. When you enter the command, the system sends a message stating that the new mode is enabled when the system reloads. banner exec Configure a message that is displayed when your enter EXEC mode.
PAGE 73
banner login Set a banner to display when logging on to the system. Syntax Parameters banner login {keyboard-interactive | no keyboard-interactive} [c line c] keyboardinteractive Enter the keyword keyboard-interactive to require a carriage return (CR) to get the message banner prompt. c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner. The delineator is a percent character (%). line Enter a text string for your text banner message ending the message with your delineator.
PAGE 74
banner motd Set a message of the day (MOTD) banner. Syntax banner motd c line c Parameters c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner. The delineator is a percent character (%). line Enter a text string for your message of the day banner message ending the message with your delineator. The delineator is a percent character (%). Defaults No banner is configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 75
clear line Reset a terminal line. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History clear line {line-number | console 0 | vty number} line-number Enter a number for one of the 12 terminal lines on the system. The range is from 0 to 11. console 0 Enter the keywords console 0 to reset the console port. vty number Enter the keyword vty then a number to clear a terminal line. The range is from 0 to 9. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 76
The following message is an indication that collection of CPU traffic is automatically turned on. To view the traffic statistics, use the show cpu-traffic-stats command. If the CPU receives excessive traffic, traffic is rate controlled. NOTE: You must enable this command before the show cpu-traffic-stats command displays traffic statistics. Dell Networking OS recommends disabling debugging (no debug cputraffic-stats) after troubleshooting is complete.
PAGE 77
Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example • CONFIGURATION • INTERFACE Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 78
enable optic-info-update interval Enable polling intervals of optical information updates for simple network management protocol (SNMP). Syntax enable optical-info-update interval seconds To disable optical power information updates, use the no enable optical-info-update interval command. Parameters interval seconds Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the keyword interval then the polling interval in seconds.
PAGE 79
Command History Related Commands • ROUTER OSPF • ROUTER RIP Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. exit — returns to the lower command mode. exec-banner Enable the display of a text string when the user enters EXEC mode. Syntax exec-banner Defaults Enabled on all lines (if configured, the banner appears). Command Modes LINE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 80
Example Dell con0 is now available Press RETURN to get started. Dell> exit Return to the lower command mode. Syntax exit Command Modes Command History Related Commands • EXEC Privilege • CONFIGURATION • LINE • INTERFACE • PROTOCOL GVRP • SPANNING TREE • MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE • MAC ACCESS LIST • ACCESS-LIST • PREFIX-LIST • ROUTER OSPF • ROUTER RIP Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. end — returns to EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 81
200 Port set okay 150 Opening ASCII mode data connection size date time name -------- ------ ------ -------512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 tgtimg 512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 diagnostic 512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 other 512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 tgt 226 Transfer complete 329 bytes received in 0.018 seconds (17.95 Kbytes/s) ftp> Related Commands ftp-server topdir — sets the directory to be used for incoming FTP connections. ftp-server username — sets a username and password for incoming FTP connections.
PAGE 82
Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 • 0 (zero) for an unecrypted (clear text) password • 7 (seven) for a hidden text password Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. hostname Set the host name of the system. Syntax hostname name Parameters name Defaults Dell Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long. Version 9.3(0.0) Modified the default hostname as Dell.
PAGE 83
Usage Information The password is listed in the configuration file; you can view the password by entering the show running-config ftp command in EXEC mode. Use the ip ftp password command when you use the ftp: parameter in the copy command. Related Commands copy — copy files. ftp-server username — sets the user name for the FTP sessions. ip ftp source-interface Specify an interface’s IP address as the source IP address for FTP connections.
PAGE 84
Usage Information Configure a password with the ip ftp password command. Related Commands ip ftp password — sets the password for FTP connections. ip telnet server enable Enable the Telnet server on the switch. Syntax ip telnet server enable To disable the Telnet server, use the no ip telnet server enable command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 85
ip tftp source-interface Assign an interface’s IP address in outgoing packets for TFTP traffic. Syntax Parameters ip tftp source-interface interface interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback then a number from zero (0) to 16383. • For a Port Channel, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. The range is 1 to 128.
PAGE 86
motd-banner Enable a message of the day (MOTD) banner to appear when you log in to the system. Syntax motd-banner Defaults Enabled on all lines. Command Modes LINE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ping Test connectivity between the system and another device by sending echo requests and waiting for replies.
PAGE 87
• N: Do not set the “don't fragment” bit. • Y: Do set “don't fragment” bit Default is No. validate-reply (IPv4 only) Enter Y or N for reply validation. • N: Do not validate reply data. • Y: Do validate reply data. Default is No. Defaults Command Modes Command History pattern pattern (IPv4 only) Enter the IPv4 data pattern. Range: 0-FFFF. Default: 0xABCD. sweep-min-size Enter the minimum size of datagram in sweep range. The range is from 52 to 15359 bytes.
PAGE 88
Example (IPv6) Dell#ping 100::1 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 100::1, timeout is 2 seconds: !!!!! Success rate is 100.0 percent (5/5), round-trip min/avg/max = 0/0/0 (ms) Dell# reload Reboot the Dell Networking OS. Syntax reload Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If there is a change in the configuration, the Dell Networking OS prompts you to save the new configuration.
PAGE 89
service timestamps To debug and log messages, add time stamps. This command adds either the uptime or the current time and date. Syntax Parameters service timestamps [debug | log] [datetime [localtime] [msec] [showtimezone] | uptime] debug (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword debug to add timestamps to debug messages. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to add timestamps to log messages with severity from 0 to 6.
PAGE 90
-- Major Alarms -Alarm Type Duration ---------------------------------------No major alarms Dell# show command-history Display a buffered log of all commands all users enter along with a time stamp. Syntax show command-history Defaults none Command Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information One trace log message is generated for each command. No password information is saved to this file.
PAGE 91
[5/4 9:20:11]: CMD-(TEL0):[exit]by admin from vty0 (10.11.68.14) Dell# Related Commands clear command history — clears the command history log. show command-tree Display the entire CLI command tree, and optionally, display the utilization count for each command and its options. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History show command-tree [count | no] count Display the command tree with a usage counter for each command.
PAGE 92
conflict A.B.C.D server statistics snooping binding option option option option option option usage: usage: usage: usage: usage: usage: clear ip fib command usage:4 clear ip route Dell# command usage:1 0 0 0 0 0 0 show cpu-traffic-stats View the CPU traffic statistics. Syntax show cpu-traffic-stats [port number | all] Parameters port number (OPTIONAL) Enter the port number to display traffic statistics on that port only. The range is from 1 to 1568.
PAGE 93
Command Modes Command History Example EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show debug Generic IP: (Access List: test) IP packet debugging is on for (Access List: test) TenGigabitEthernet 0/16 ICMP packet debugging is on for TenGigabitEthernet 0/16 OSPF:1 OSPF packet debugging is on DHCP: DHCP debugging is on Dell# show environment View system component status (for example, temperature or voltage).
PAGE 94
Example (stack-unit) Dell#show environment stack-unit 0 -- Unit Environment Status -Unit Status Temp Voltage -----------------------------------0* online 49C ok * Management Unit Example (thermalsensor) Dell#show environment thermal-sensor -- Thermal Sensor Readings (deg C) -Unit Sensor0 Sensor1 Sensor2 Sensor3 Sensor4 Sensor5 Sensor6 Sensor7 Sensor8 Sensor9 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 50 52 53 53 54 48 57 5753 56 * Management Unit Dell# show inventor
PAGE 95
0 33 0 37 0 41 0 42 0 43 0 44 0 45 0 46 0 47 0 48 0 49 0 50 0 51 0 52 0 53 0 54 0 55 0 56 Dell# Related Commands QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP 40GBASE-CR4-1M APF11490011J2Q 40GBASE-SR4 MLJ004V 40GBASE-SR4 MLJ003P 40GBASE-SR4 MLJ003P 40GBASE-SR4 MLJ003P 40GBASE-SR4 MLJ003P 40GBASE-SR4 MLJ004Y 40GBASE-SR4 MLJ004Y 40GBASE-SR4 MLJ004Y 40GBASE-SR4 MLJ004Y Media not present or accessible Media not present or accessible Media not present or accessible Media not present or accessible QSFP 40GB
PAGE 96
show processes cpu Display CPU usage information based on processes running. Syntax show processes cpu [management-unit 1-99 [details] | stack-unit 0–5 | summary | ipc | memory [stack-unit 0–5]] Parameters management-unit 1-99 [details] (OPTIONAL) Display processes running in the control processor. The 1-99 variable sets the number of tasks to display in order of the highest CPU usage in the past five (5) seconds. Add the keyword details to display all running processes (except sysdlp).
PAGE 97
frrp Dell# Example (stack-unit) Dell#show process cpu stack-unit 0 CPU utilization for five seconds: 4%/0%; one minute: 3%; five minutes: 2% PID Runtime(ms) Invoked uSecs 5Sec 1Min 5Min TTY Process 0x763a7000 96806080 9680608 10000 3.00% 3.25% 2.93% 0 KP 0x760d5000 26384050 2638405 10000 1.00% 0.50% 0.32% 0 frrpagt 0x762da000 491370 49137 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 F10StkMgr 0x762f9000 665580 66558 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 lcMgr 0x7631d000 37580 3758 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.
PAGE 98
f10appioserv vrrp f10appioserv frrp f10appioserv xstp f10appioserv pim f10appioserv igmp f10appioserv mrtm f10appioserv l2mgr f10appioserv l2pm f10appioserv arpm Dell# 225280 335872 225280 180224 225280 2740224 225280 1007616 225280 401408 225280 5496832 225280 1036288 225280 172032 225280 192512 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 208896 8048640 208896 7512064 208896 9801728 208896 7757824 208896 7639040 208896 11124736 208896 16134144 208896 7483392 208896 7057408
PAGE 99
show processes ipc flow-control Display the single window protocol queue (SWPQ) statistics. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information show processes ipc flow-control [cp] cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to view the control processor’s SWPQ statistics. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 100
ACL0 RTM0 ACL0 DIFFSERV0 ACL0 IGMP0 ACL0 PIM0 ARPMGR0 MRTM0 LACP0 IFMGR0 RTM0 OTM0 RTM0 OTM0 Dell# Len Mark Out 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ies Sent Rcvd Retra Retra 0 0 0 10 10 0 0 0 10 10 0 0 0 10 10 0 0 0 10 10 0 0 0 100 100 0 0 0 25 25 0 0 0 60 60 0 0 0 60 60 show processes memory Display memory usage information based on the running processes.
PAGE 101
show processes memory output Description Frees Total dynamic memory freed Max Maximum dynamic memory allocated Current Current dynamic memory in use Field The output for the show process memory command displays the memory usage statistics running on CP part (sysd) of the system. The sysd is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module’s CP. The output of the show memory command and this command differ based on which the Dell OS processes are counted.
PAGE 102
show software ifm Display interface management (IFM) data. Syntax show software ifm {clients [summary] | ifagt number | ifcb interface | stack-unit unit-ID | trace-flags} Parameters Defaults Command History 102 Enter the keyword clients to display IFM client information. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display brief information about IFM clients. ifagt number Enter the keyword ifagt then the number of an interface agent to display software pipe and IPC statistics.
PAGE 103
LLDP 0 0x007f2433 0x0408c000 0x007f2433 0x0408c000 60 --More-- show system Display the current status of all stack members or a specific member. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Example (brief) show system [brief | stack-unit unit-id] brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view an abbreviated list of system information. stack-unit unit-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit then the stack member ID for information on that stack member. The range is 0 to 5.
PAGE 104
Voltage : ok Switch Power : GOOD Product Name : Force10 MXL 10/40GbE Mfg By : DELL Mfg Date : 2012-01-05 Serial Number : DELL123456 Part Number : 0NVH81X01 Piece Part ID : N/A PPID Revision : N/A Service Tag : N/A Expr Svc Code : N/A Chassis Svce Tag: RTWB200 Fabric Id : C2 Asset tag : test PSOC FW Rev : 0xb ICT Test Date : 0-0-0 ICT Test Info : 0x0 Max Power Req : 31488 Fabric Type : 0x3 Fabric Maj Ver : 0x1 Fabric Min Ver : 0x0 SW Manageability: 0x4 HW Manageability: 0x1 Max Boot Time : 6 minutes Link Tun
PAGE 105
save Command Modes Command History Usage Information Enter the keyword save to save the command output. flash: Save to local flash drive (flash://filename [max 20 chars] ). EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Without the page or stack-unit option, the command output is continuous. Use Ctrl-z to interrupt the command output. The save option works with other filtering commands. This allows you to save specific information of a show command.
PAGE 106
Directory of flash: Directory of flash: 1 drwx 4096 2 drwx 2048 3 drwx 4096 4 drwx 4096 5 d--4096 6 -rwx 10303 7 -rwx 7366 8 -rwx 4 9 -rwx 12829 10 drwx 4096 11 -rwx 7689 Jan May Jan Jan Jan Mar Apr Feb Feb Mar Feb 01 16 24 24 24 15 20 19 18 08 21 1980 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 01:00:00 10:49:01 19:38:32 19:38:32 19:38:34 18:37:20 10:57:02 07:05:02 02:24:14 22:58:54 04:45:40 +01:00 +01:00 +01:00 +01:00 +01:00 +01:00 +01:00 +01:00 +01:00 +01:00 +01:00 . ..
PAGE 107
Rcvd: 4618 total, 0 checksum errors, 0 no port Sent: 5023 total ARP statistics: Rcvd: 43988 requests, 24518 replies, 10 wrong interface Sent: 42 requests, 6 replies (0 proxy) Related Commands show version — Displays the Dell Networking OS version. show system — Displays the current switch status. show environment — Displays the system component status. show processes memory — Displays memory usage based on running processes. telnet Connect through Telnet to a server.
PAGE 108
terminal xml Enable XML mode in Telnet and SSH client sessions. Syntax terminal xml To exit XML mode, use the terminal no xml command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes Command History Usage Information • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command enables the XML input mode where you can either cut and paste XML requests or enter the XML requests line-by-line.
PAGE 109
----------------------------------------------Tracing the route to www.force10networks.com (10.11.84.18), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets ----------------------------------------------TTL Hostname Probe1 Probe2 Probe3 1 10.11.199.190 001.000 ms 001.000 ms 002.000 ms 2 gwegress-sjc-02.force10networks.com (10.11.30.126) 005.000 ms 001.000 ms 001.000 ms 3 fw-sjc-01.force10networks.com (10.11.127.254) 000.000 ms 000.000 ms 000.000 ms 4 www.force10networks.com (10.11.84.18) 000.000 ms 000.000 ms 000.
PAGE 110
write Copy the current configuration to either the startup-configuration file or the terminal. Syntax write {memory | terminal} Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information 110 memory Enter the keyword memory to copy the current running configuration to the startup configuration file. This command is similar to the copy runningconfig startup-config command. terminal Enter the keyword terminal to copy the current running configuration to the terminal.
PAGE 111
5 802.1X An authentication server must authenticate a client connected to an 802.1X switch port. Until the authentication, only extensible authentication protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic is allowed through the port to which a client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic passes through the port. The Dell Networking operating software supports remote authentication dial-in service (RADIUS) and active directory environments using 802.1X Port Authentication.
PAGE 112
Defaults Disabled Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dot1x auth-fail-vlan Configure an authentication failure VLAN for users and devices that fail 802.1X authentication. Syntax dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id [max-attempts number] To delete the authentication failure VLAN, use the no dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id [maxattempts number] command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN Identifier. The range is from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 113
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dot1x auth-type mab-only To authenticate a device with MAC authentication bypass (MAB), only use the host MAC address. Syntax dot1x auth-type mab-only Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The prerequisites for enabling MAB-only authentication on a port are: • Enable 802.
PAGE 114
dot1x authentication (Interface) Enable dot1x on an interface. Enable dot1x both globally and at the interface level. Syntax dot1x authentication To disable dot1x on an interface, use the no dot1x authentication command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dot1x authentication (Configuration) — Enable dot1x globally.
PAGE 115
dot1x host-mode Enable single-host or multi-host authentication. Syntax Parameters dot1x host-mode {single-host | multi-host | multi-auth} single-host Enable single-host authentication. multi-host Enable multi-host authentication. multi-auth Enable multi-supplicant authentication. Defaults single-host Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 116
Parameters number Defaults 2 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the number of times an EAP request is transmitted before a session timeout. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dot1x max-supplicants Restrict the number of supplicants that can be authenticated and permitted to access the network through the port. This configuration is only takes effect in Multi-Auth mode.
PAGE 117
dot1x quiet-period Set the number of seconds that the authenticator remains quiet after a failed authentication with a client. Syntax dot1x quiet-period seconds To disable quiet time, use the no dot1x quiet-time command. Parameters seconds Defaults 60 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the number of seconds. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 60. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 118
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dot1x server-timeout Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the server time-out. Syntax dot1x server-timeout seconds To return to the default, use the no dot1x server-timeout command. Parameters seconds Defaults 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Enter a time-out value in seconds. The range is from 1 to 300, where 300 is implementation dependant.
PAGE 119
Command Modes Command History INTERFACE Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dot1x tx-period Configure the intervals at which EAPOL PDUs the Authenticator PAE transmits. Syntax dot1x tx-period seconds To return to the default, use the no dot1x tx-period command. Parameters seconds Defaults 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the interval time, in seconds, that EAPOL PDUs are transmitted. The range is from 1 to 65535.
PAGE 120
Usage Information To display CoS mapping information only for the specified supplicant, enter a supplicant’s MAC address using the mac-address option. You can display the CoS mapping information applied to traffic from authenticated supplicants on 802.1Xenabled ports that are in Single-Hot, Multi-Host, and Multi-Supplicant authentication modes. Example Dell#show dot1x cos-mapping interface tengigabitethernet 0/32 802.
PAGE 121
Defaults Command Modes Command History none • EXEC • EXEC privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If you enable 802.1X multi-supplicant authentication on a port, additional 802.1X configuration details (Port Authentication status, Untagged VLAN ID, Authentication PAE state, and Backend state) are displayed for each supplicant, as shown in the following example. Example Dell#show dot1x interface fortyGigE 0/48 802.
PAGE 122
Auth PAE State: Backend State: Dell# Authenticated Idle Dell#show dot1x interface tengigabitethernet 0/32 mac-address 00:00:00:00:00:10 Supplicant Mac: 0 0 0 0 0 10 Lookup for Mac: 802.
PAGE 123
Backend State: Dell# Example (Interface) Idle Dell#show dot1x interface g 0/21 802.
PAGE 124
6 Access Control Lists (ACL) Access control lists (ACLs) are supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS).
PAGE 125
remark Enter a description for an ACL entry. Syntax Parameters remark [remark-number] [description] remark-number Enter the remark number. The range is from 0 to 4294967290. NOTE: You can use the same sequence number for the remark and an ACL rule. description Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information Enter a description of up to 80 characters. Not configured.
PAGE 126
Defaults StartingSeqNum Enter the starting sequence number to resequence. The range is from 0 to 4294967290. Step-to-Increment Enter the step to increment the sequence number. The range is from 1 to 4294967290. none Command Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 127
show config Display the current ACL configuration. Syntax Command Modes show config • CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-STANDARD • CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-EXTENDED • CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD • CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell(config-std-nacl)#show conf ! ip access-list standard test remark 5 Permit traffic from XYZ Inc. seq 5 permit 1.1.1.
PAGE 128
clear counters ip access-group Erase all counters maintained for access lists. Syntax clear counters ip access-group [access-list-name] Parameters Command Modes Command History access-list-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a configured access-list, up to 140 characters. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip access-group Apply an egress IP ACL to an interface.
PAGE 129
show ip access-lists Display all of the IP ACLs configured in the system, whether or not they are applied to an interface, and the count of matches/ mismatches against each ACL entry displayed. Syntax Parameters show ip access-lists [access-list-name] [interface interface] [in] access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC ACL, up to 140 characters.
PAGE 130
Command Modes Command History Usage Information • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip accounting access-lists Description “Extended IP...” Displays the name of the IP ACL. “seq 5...” Displays the filter. If the keywords count or byte were configured in the filter, the number of packets or bytes the filter processes is displayed at the end of the line. “order 4” Displays the QoS order of priority for the ACL entry.
PAGE 131
Defaults count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. dscp Enter this keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
PAGE 132
forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands ip access-list standard — configures a standard ACL. permit — configures a permit filter. ip access-list standard Create a standard IP access list (IP ACL) to filter based on IP address. Syntax ip access-list standard access-list-name Parameters access-list-name Enter a string up to 140 characters long as the ACL name.
PAGE 133
Parameters Defaults source Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the packet was sent. mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address or hostname.
PAGE 134
MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode.
PAGE 135
the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-STANDARD Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.
PAGE 136
Extended IP ACL Commands When an ACL is created without any rule and then applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects an implicit permit. The following commands configure extended IP ACLs, which in addition to the IP address, also examine the packet’s protocol type. The MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform supports both Ingress and Egress IP ACLs. NOTE: Also refer to theCommands Common to all ACL Types and Common IP ACL Commands sections.
PAGE 137
Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The time interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly.
PAGE 138
deny icmp To drop all or specific internet control message protocol (ICMP) messages, configure a filter. Syntax deny icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [dscp] [count [byte]] [order] [fragments][threshold-inmsgs] [count]] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command, if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 139
When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
PAGE 140
• operator port port urg: urgent field (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand: • eq = equal to • neq = not equal to • gt = greater than • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535.
PAGE 141
Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, refer to the Quality of Service chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. In the MXL switch, you can configure either count (packets) or count (bytes). However, for an ACL with multiple rules, you can configure some ACLs with count (packets) and others as count (bytes) at any given time. Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM.
PAGE 142
deny udp To drop user datagram protocol (UDP) packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter. Syntax deny udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [dscp] [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] [order] [fragments] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters 142 • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 143
Defaults By default 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which the ACL logs are generated is five minutes. Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-EXTENDED Version 9.3(0.0) Added the support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only.
PAGE 144
ip access-list extended Name (or select) an extended IP access list (IP ACL) based on IP addresses or protocols. Syntax ip access-list extended access-list-name To delete an access list, use the no ip access-list extended access-list-name command. Parameters access-list-name Enter a string up to 140 characters long as the access list name. Defaults All access lists contain an implicit deny any; that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped.
PAGE 145
Defaults dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.
PAGE 146
permit tcp — assigns a permit filter for TCP packets. permit udp — assigns a permit filter for UDP packets. permit icmp Configure a filter to allow all or specific ICMP messages. Syntax permit icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [dscp] [message-type] [count [byte]] [order] [fragments] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters 146 • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 147
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-STANDARD Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 9.3(0.
PAGE 148
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address.
PAGE 149
the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The threshold range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
PAGE 150
Example An ACL rule with a TCP port range of 4000–8000 uses eight entries in the CAM.
PAGE 151
• eq = equal to • neq = not equal to • gt = greater than • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port parameter) port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand. The range is 0 to 65535. destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
PAGE 152
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
PAGE 153
ip-protocol-number Enter a number from 0 to 255 to filter based on the protocol identified in the IP protocol header. icmp Enter the keyword icmp to configure an ICMP access list filter. ip Enter the keyword ip to configure a generic IP access list. The keyword ip specifies that the access list permits all IP protocols. tcp Enter the keyword tcp to configure a TCP access list filter. udp Enter the keyword udp to configure a UDP access list filter.
PAGE 154
the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which the ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
PAGE 155
Related Commands deny — Configures a filter to drop packets. permit — Configures a filter to forward packets. Common MAC Access List Commands The following commands are available within both MAC ACL modes (Standard and Extended) and do not have mode-specific options. These commands allow you to clear, display, and assign MAC ACL configurations. The MAC ACL can be applied on Physical, Port-channel and VLAN interfaces.
PAGE 156
Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You can assign one ACL (standard or extended) to an interface. In case of applying a MAC ACL to traffic entering or exiting a VLAN interface. Enter the VLAN interface mode and apply the mac acl in the following manner. mac access-group access-list-name {in | out} Related Commands 1.
PAGE 157
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show mac accounting access-list Display MAC access list configurations and counters (if configured). Syntax Parameters show mac accounting access-list access-list-name interface interface in | out access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC ACL, up to 140 characters.
PAGE 158
NOTE: For more information, also refer to the Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common MAC Access List Commands sections. deny To drop packets with a the MAC address specified, configure a filter. Syntax deny {any | mac-source-address [mac-source-address-mask]} [count [byte]] [log [interval minutes] [threshold—in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 159
Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
PAGE 160
permit To forward packets from a specific source MAC address, configure a filter. Syntax permit {any | mac-source-address [mac-source-address-mask]} [count [byte]] | log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs[count] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. • Use the no permit {any | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} command.
PAGE 161
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, Pv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
PAGE 162
the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes.. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
PAGE 163
The MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform supports both Ingress and Egress MAC ACLs. deny To drop packets that match the filter criteria, configure a filter. Syntax deny {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} {any | host mac-address | mac-destination-address mac-destination-addressmask} [ethertype-operator] [count [byte]] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 164
Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. permit — configures a MAC address filter to pass packets. seq — configures a MAC address filter with a specified sequence number. mac access-list extended Name a new or existing extended MAC access control list (extended MAC ACL). Syntax mac access-list extended access-list-name [cpu-qos] Parameters access-list-name Enter a text string as the MAC access list name, up to 140 characters.
PAGE 165
permit To pass packets matching the criteria specified, configure a filter. Syntax permit {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address mac-source-addressmask} {any | host mac-address | mac-destination-address mac-destinationaddress-mask} [ethertype operator] [count [byte]] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 166
seq — configure a MAC ACL filter with a specified sequence number. seq Configure a filter with a specific sequence number. Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {any | host mac-address | mac-sourceaddress mac-source-address-mask} {any | host mac-address | mac-destinationaddress mac-destination-address-mask} [ethertype operator] [count [byte]] Parameters sequence-number Enter a number as the filter sequence number. The range is from zero (0) to 65535.
PAGE 167
Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. deny — configures a filter to drop packets. permit — configures a filter to forward packets. IP Prefix List Commands When you create an access-list without any rule and then apply it to an interface, the ACL behavior reflects implicit permit. To configure or enable IP prefix lists, use these commands.
PAGE 168
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Sequence numbers for this filter are automatically assigned starting at sequence number 5. If you do not use the ge or le options, only packets with an exact match to the prefix are filtered. Related Commands permit — configures a filter to pass packets. seq — configures a drop or permit filter with a specified sequence number. ip prefix-list Enter the PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a prefix list.
PAGE 169
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Sequence numbers for this filter are automatically assigned starting at sequence number 5. If you do not use the ge or le options, only packets with an exact match to the prefix are filtered. Related Commands deny — configures a filter to drop packets. seq — configures a drop or permit filter with a specified sequence number.
PAGE 170
show config Display the current PREFIX-LIST configurations. Syntax show config Command Modes PREFIX-LIST Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell(conf-nprefixl)#show config ! ip prefix-list snickers Dell(conf-nprefixl)# show ip prefix-list detail Display details of the configured prefix lists. Syntax show ip prefix-list detail [prefix-name] Parameters Command Modes Command History Example prefix-name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.
PAGE 171
Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show ip prefix-list summary Ip Prefix-list with the last deletion/insertion: PL_OSPF_to_RIP ip prefix-list PL_OSPF_to_RIP: count: 3, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 25 Route Map Commands When you create an access-list without any rule and then applied to an interface, the ACL behavior reflects implicit permit. To configure route maps and their redistribution criteria, use the following commands.
PAGE 172
If the route-map entry contains sets with the continue clause, set actions are performed first then the continue clause jumps to the specified route map entry. Related Commands • If a set action occurs in the first route map entry and then the same set action occurs with a different value in a subsequent route map entry, the last set of actions overrides the previous set of actions with the same set command.
PAGE 173
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. match ip address — redistributes routes that match an IP address. match ip next-hop — redistributes routes that match the next-hop IP address. match ip route-source — redistributes routes that match routes advertised by other routers. match metric — redistributes routes that match a specific metric.
PAGE 174
Parameters access-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP access list, up to 140 characters. prefix-list prefix-listname Enter the keywords prefix-list and then enter the name of configured prefix list, up 10 140 characters. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. match interface — redistributes routes that match the next-hop interface.
PAGE 175
match metric To match on a specified value, configure a filter. Syntax Parameters match metric metric-value metric-value Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a value to match. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. match interface — redistributes routes that match the next-hop interface. match ip address — redistributes routes that match an IP address.
PAGE 176
match metric — redistributes routes that match a specific metric. match tag — redistributes routes that match a specific tag. match tag To redistribute only routes that match a specified tag value, configure a filter. Syntax match tag tag-value Parameters tag-value Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a value as the tag on which to match. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 177
If you do not define a keyword (permit or deny) for the route map, the permit action is the default. Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Use caution when you delete route maps because if you do not specify a sequence number, all route maps with the same map-name are deleted when you use the no route-map map-name command.
PAGE 178
Command Modes Command History Related Commands ROUTE-MAP Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. set automatic-tag — computes the tag value of the route. set metric-type — specifies the route type assigned to redistributed routes. set tag — specifies the tag assigned to redistributed routes. set metric-type To assign a new route type for routes redistributed to OSPF, configure a filter.
PAGE 179
Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. set automatic-tag — computes the tag value of the route. set metric — specifies the metric value assigned to redistributed routes. set metric-type — specifies the route type assigned to redistributed routes. show config Display the current route map configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Example Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 180
deny (for Standard IP ACLs) To drop packets with a certain IP address, configure a filter. Syntax deny {source | any | host {ip-address}}[count [byte]] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters Defaults • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. • Use the no deny {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} command.
PAGE 181
Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
PAGE 182
Defaults order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower order numbers have a higher priority) If you did not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). monitor OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
PAGE 183
forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands deny tcp — assigns a filter to deny TCP packets. deny udp — assigns a filter to deny UDP packets. ip access-list extended — creates an extended ACL. seq Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an extended IP access list while creating the filter.
PAGE 184
Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. The following applies: • The seq sequence-number command is applicable only in an ACL group.
PAGE 185
deny tcp Configure a filter that drops transmission control protocol (TCP) packets meeting the filter criteria. Syntax deny tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [bit] [operator port [port]] {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [dscp] [bit] [operator port [port]] [count [byte] [order] [fragments] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 186
Defaults mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
PAGE 187
traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists.
PAGE 188
Defaults host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. dscp Enter this keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand: • eq = equal to • neq = not equal to • gt = greater than • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command) port port Enter the application layer port number.
PAGE 189
Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (for example, gt, lt or range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on bit mask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
PAGE 190
• Parameters Use the no deny arp {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id {ip-address | any | opcode code-number} command. destination-macaddress macaddress-mask Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must match. The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask; therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly.
PAGE 191
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. Version 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs. Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. Version 7.4.1.
PAGE 192
deny icmp To drop all or specific internet control message protocol (ICMP) messages, configure a filter. Syntax deny icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [dscp] [count [byte]] [order] [fragments][threshold-inmsgs] [count]] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command, if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 193
When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
PAGE 194
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan and then enter the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated with a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094 and 1 to 2094 for ExaScale ( you can use IDs 1 to 4094). To filter all VLAN traffic, specify VLAN 1. source-macaddress macaddress-mask Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must match.
PAGE 195
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
PAGE 196
Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
PAGE 197
Defaults mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous (discontiguous). any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host and then enter the IP address to specify a host IP address only. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
PAGE 198
MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode.
PAGE 199
Defaults log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100.
PAGE 200
permit arp Configure a filter that forwards ARP packets meeting this criteria. This command is supported only on 12-port GE line cards with SFP optics; refer to your line card documentation for specifications.
PAGE 201
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated.
PAGE 202
traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists.
PAGE 203
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255).
PAGE 204
The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. For more information, refer to Port Monitoring. You cannot include IP, TCP, or UDP filters in an ACL configured with ARP filters. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
PAGE 205
message-type (OPTIONAL) Enter an ICMP message type, either with the type (and code, if necessary) numbers or with the name of the message type. The range is 0 to 255 for ICMP type and 0 to 255 for ICMP code. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
PAGE 206
permit udp To pass UDP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter. Syntax permit udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [dscp] [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] [order] [fragments] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters 206 • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 207
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-EXTENDED Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only.
PAGE 208
1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024 Total Ports: 1024 Related Commands ip access-list extended — creates an extended ACL. permit — assigns a permit filter for IP packets. permit tcp — assigns a permit filter for TCP packets. permit (for Extended IP ACLs) To pass IP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter.
PAGE 209
monitor Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Version 9.
PAGE 210
• Parameters Use the no permit {any | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} command. any Enter the keyword any to forward all packets received with a MAC address. mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. mac-sourceaddress-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. If no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in other words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match).
PAGE 211
malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands deny — configures a MAC ACL filter to drop packets. seq —configure a MAC ACL filter with a specified sequence number.
PAGE 212
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 9.3(0.
PAGE 213
Parameters source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address.
PAGE 214
threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The threshold range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
PAGE 215
Example An ACL rule with a TCP port range of 4000–8000 uses eight entries in the CAM.
PAGE 216
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated with a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094 and 1 to 2094 for ExaScale (you can use IDs 1 to 4094). To filter all VLAN traffic specify VLAN 1. ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) as the target IP address of the ARP. opcode codenumber Enter the keyword opcode and then enter the number of the ARP opcode. The range is 1 to 16.
PAGE 217
The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. The following applies: • The seq sequence-number command is applicable only in an ACL group. • The order option works across ACL groups that have been applied on an interface via the QoS policy framework. • The order option takes precedence over seq sequence-number. • If sequence-number is not configured, the rules with the same order value are ordered according to their configuration order.
PAGE 218
Parameters sequence-number Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290. deny Enter the keyword deny to drop all traffic meeting the filter criteria.. permit Enter the keyword permit to forward all traffic meeting the filter criteria. destination-macaddress macaddress-mask Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must match.
PAGE 219
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform.
PAGE 220
forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). NOTE: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead. seq Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an extended IP access list while creating the filter.
PAGE 221
Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. The following applies: • The seq sequence-number command is applicable only in an ACL group. • The order option works across ACL groups that have been applied on an interface via the QoS policy framework.
PAGE 222
Parameters sequence-number Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290. The range is from 1 to 65534. deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this condition. permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting this criteria. ipv6-protocolnumber Enter a number from 0 to 255 to filter based on the protocol identified in the IP protocol header. icmp Enter the keyword icmp to configure an ICMP access list filter.
PAGE 223
lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
PAGE 224
both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port.
PAGE 225
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands.
PAGE 226
permit tcp Configure a filter to pass TCP packets that match the filter criteria. Syntax permit tcp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} [operator port [port]] {destination address | any | host ipv6-address} [bit] [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count][monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 227
• urg: urgent field count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
PAGE 228
permit icmp To allow all or specific internet control message protocol (ICMP) messages, configure a filter. Syntax permit icmp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address | any | host ipv6-address} [message-type] [count [byte]] | [log] [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]][monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 229
Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Added the support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
PAGE 230
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. log OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
PAGE 231
port Defaults • eq = equal to • neq = not equal to • gt = greater than • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535.
PAGE 232
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
PAGE 233
• port range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535. The following list includes some common TCP port numbers: Defaults • 23 = Telnet • 20 and 21= FTP • 25 = SMTP • 169 = SNMP destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
PAGE 234
MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering theflow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode.
PAGE 235
Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The time interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly.
PAGE 236
• Parameters Use the no deny {ipv6-protocol-number | icmp | ipv6 | tcp | udp} command count OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dscp to match to the IP DSCP values. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS order of priority for the ACL entry.
PAGE 237
standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG).
PAGE 238
7 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) This chapter describes the access control list (ACL) VLAN group and content addressable memory (CAM) enhancements. member vlan Add VLAN members to an ACL VLAN group. Syntax member vlan {VLAN-range} Parameters VLAN-range Enter the member VLANs using comma-separated VLAN IDs, a range of VLAN IDs, a single VLAN ID, or a combination.
PAGE 239
Parameters group-name Enter the name of the ACL VLAN group where you want the egress IP ACLs applied, up to 140 characters. out Enter the keyword out to apply the ACL to outgoing traffic. implicit-permit Enter the keyword implicit-permit to change the default action of the ACL from implicit-deny to implicit-permit (that is, if the traffic does not match the filters in the ACL, the traffic is permitted instead of dropped).
PAGE 240
Acl Test test Ingress V6 Acl - Vlan Members 1-100 The following sample output is displayed when using the show acl-vlan-group group-name option. NOTE: The access list name is truncated. Dell#show acl-vlan-group TestGroupSeventeenTwenty Group Name Egress IP Acl Ingress IP Acl Ingress IPV6 Acl Vlan Members Test test 1-100 Dell# The following sample output shows the line-by-line style display when using the show acl-vlan-group detail option.
PAGE 241
Example Field Description Current Settings(in block sizes) Information about the number of FP blocks that are currently in use or allocated. VlanOpenFlow Number of FP blocks for VLAN open flow operations. VlanIscsi Number of FP blocks for VLAN internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) counters. VlanHp Number of FP blocks for VLAN high performance processes. VlanFcoe Number of FP blocks for VLAN Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) operations.
PAGE 242
Usage Information The VLAN ContentAware Processor (VCAP) application is a pre-ingress CAP that modifies the VLAN settings before packets are forwarded. To support the ACL CAM optimization functionality, the CAM carving feature is enhanced. A total of four VACP groups are present, of which two are for fixed groups and the other two are for dynamic groups. Out of the total of two dynamic groups, you can allocate zero, one, or two flow processor (FP) blocks to iSCSI Counters, OpenFlow and ACL Optimization.
PAGE 243
Example: Dell#show cam-usage Stackunit|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM ========|========|=================|=============|=============| ============== 0 | 0 | IN-L3 ACL | 512 | 1 | 511 | | IN-V6 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | IN-L2 ACL | 512 | 0 | 512 | | IN-NLB ACL | 256 | 0 | 256 | | IPMAC ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | OUT-L3 ACL | 158 | 6 | 152 | | OUT-V6 ACL | 158 | 1 | 157 1 | 0 | IN-L3 ACL | 512 | 1 | 511 | | IN-V6 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | IN-L2 ACL | 512 | 0 | 512 | | IN-NLB ACL | 256 | 0 | 256
PAGE 244
acl-vlan-group Create an ACL VLAN group. Syntax acl-vlan-group {group name} To remove an ACL VLAN group, use the no acl-vlan-group {group name} command. Parameters group-name Specify the name of the ACL VLAN group. The name can contain a maximum 140 characters. Default No default behavior or values Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform.
PAGE 245
Command History Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Usage Information The output for this command displays in a line-by-line format. This allows the ACL-VLAN-Group names (or the Access List Group Names) to display in their entirety. Examples The following sample output shows the line-by-line style display when using the show acl-vlan-group detail option.
PAGE 246
8 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) Bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) is a detection protocol that provides fast forwarding path failure detection. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) implementation is based on the standards specified in the IETF Draft draft-ietf-bfdbase-03 and supports BFD on all Layer 3 physical interfaces including virtual local area network (VLAN) interfaces and portchannels.
PAGE 247
ROUTER ISIS INTERFACE (BFD for VRRP only) Command History Usage Information Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. All neighbors inherit the timer values configured with the bfd neighbor command except in the following cases: • Timer values configured with the isis bfd all-neighbors commands in INTERFACE mode override timer values configured with the bfd neighbor command.
PAGE 248
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. bfd enable (Interface) Enable BFD on an interface. Syntax bfd enable Defaults BFD is enabled on all interfaces when you enable BFD from CONFIGURATION mode. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. bfd interval Specify non-default BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval.
PAGE 249
Example Dell(conf-if-gi-0/3)#bfd interval 250 min_rx 300 multiplier 4 role passive Dell(conf-if-gi-0/3)# bfd neighbor Establish a BFD session with a neighbor. Syntax Parameters bfd neighbor ip-address ip-address Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 250
Parameters interval milliseconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords interval to specify non-default BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval. The range is from 50 to 1000. The default is 100. min_rx milliseconds Enter the keywords min_rx to specify the minimum rate at which the local system receives control packets from the remote system. The range is from 50 to 1000. The default is 100.
PAGE 251
role [active | passive] Enter the role that the local system assumes: • Active — The active system initiates the BFD session. Both systems can be active for the same session. • Passive — The passive system does not initiate a session. It only responds to a request for session initialization from the active system. The default is Active. Defaults See Parameters Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 252
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command provides the flexibility to fine-tune the timer values based on individual interface needs when ISIS BFD is configured in CONFIGURATION mode. Any timer values specified with this command overrides timers set using the bfd all-neighbors command. Using the no form of this command does not disable BFD if BFD is configured in CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 253
neighbor bfd disable Explicitly disable a BFD session with a BGP neighbor or a BGP peer group. Syntax Parameters neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd disable ip-address Enter the IP address of the BGP neighbor that you want to explicitly disable for BFD sessions in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group that you want to explicitly disable for BFD sessions. Defaults none Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 254
detail Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view detailed information about BFD neighbors. none Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down B - BGP C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 10.1.3.2 Example (Detail) RemoteAddr 10.1.3.
PAGE 255
vrrp bfd neighbor Establish a BFD for VRRP session with a neighbor. Syntax Parameters vrrp bfd neighbor ip-address neighbor ip-address Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the IP address of the BFD neighbor. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 256
9 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) For detailed information about configuring BGP, refer to the BGP chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 257
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. aggregate-address To minimize the number of entries in the routing table, summarize a range of prefixes. Syntax Parameters aggregate-address ip-address mask [advertise-map map-name] [as-set] [attribute-map map-name] [summary-only] [suppress-map map-name] ip-address mask Enter the IP address and mask of the route to be the aggregate address. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.
PAGE 258
The summary-only parameter suppresses all advertisements. If you want to suppress advertisements to only specific neighbors, use the neighbor distribute-list command. In the show ip bgp command, aggregates contain an ‘a’ in the first column and routes suppressed by the aggregate contain an ‘s’ in the first column. bgp add-path Allow the advertisement of multiple paths for the same address prefix without the new paths replacing any previous ones.
PAGE 259
If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path. bgp asnotation Allows you to implement a method for AS number representation in the command line interface (CLI). Syntax bgp asnotation [asplain | asdot+ | asdot] To disable a dot or dot+ representation and return to ASPLAIN, enter the no bgp asnotation command. Defaults asplain Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 260
bgp bestpath as-path ignore Ignore the AS PATH in BGP best path calculations. Syntax bgp bestpath as-path ignore To return to the default, enter the no bgp bestpath as-path ignore command. Defaults Disabled (that is, the software considers the AS_PATH when choosing a route as best). Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path.
PAGE 261
Usage Information The software compares the MEDs only if the path contains no external autonomous system numbers. If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path. bgp bestpath med missing-as-best During path selection, indicate preference to paths with missing MED (MULTI_EXIT_DISC) over paths with an advertised MED attribute. Syntax bgp bestpath med missing-as-best To return to the default selection, use the no bgp bestpath med missing-as-best command.
PAGE 262
Command Modes Command History ROUTER BGP Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Route reflection to clients is not necessary if all client routers are fully meshed. Related Commands bgp cluster-id — assigns an ID to a BGP cluster with two or more route reflectors. neighbor route-reflector-client — configures a route reflector and clients. bgp cluster-id Assign a cluster ID to a BGP cluster with more than one route reflector.
PAGE 263
To delete a BGP confederation identifier, use the no bgp confederation identifier as-number command. Parameters as-number Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the AS number. The range is from 0 to 65535 (2 byte), from 1 to 4294967295 (4 byte), or from 0.1 to 65535.65535 (dotted format). Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To accept 4-byte formats before entering a 4-byte AS number, configure your system.
PAGE 264
After specifying autonomous systems numbers for the BGP confederation, recycle the peers to update their configuration. Related Commands bgp confederation identifier — configures a confederation ID. bgp four-octet-as-support — enables 4-byte support for the BGP process. bgp dampening Enable BGP route dampening and configure the dampening parameters.
PAGE 265
Usage Information If you enter the bgp dampening command, the default values for half-life, reuse, suppress, and max-suppress-time are applied. The parameters are position-dependent; therefore, if you configure one parameter, configure the parameters in the order they appear in the CLI. Related Commands show ip bgp dampened-paths — views the BGP paths. bgp default local-preference Change the default local preference value for routes exchanged between internal BGP peers.
PAGE 266
If you disable the enforce-first-as command, it can be viewed using the show ip protocols command. Related Commands show ip bgp neighbors — views the information the BGP neighbors exchange. show ip protocols — views information on routing protocols. bgp fast-external-failover Enable the fast external failover feature, which immediately resets the BGP session if a link to a directly connected external peer fails.
PAGE 267
bgp graceful-restart To support graceful restart as a receiver only, enable graceful restart on a BGP neighbor, a BGP node, or designate a local router. Syntax bgp graceful-restart [restart-time seconds] [stale-path-time seconds] [role receiver-only] To return to the default, use the no bgp graceful-restart command. Parameters restart-time seconds Enter the keyword restart-time then the maximum number of seconds to restart and bring-up all the peers. The range is from 1 to 3600 seconds.
PAGE 268
When you change the path selection from Deterministic to Non-Deterministic, the path selection for the existing paths remains Deterministic until you enter the clear ip bgp command to clear existing paths. bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop Enable next-hop resolution through other routes learned by BGP. Syntax bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop To disable next-hop resolution, use the no bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 269
reusing regular expression evaluation results. This caching and reuse may be at the expensive of RP1 processor memory. Examples Dell(conf-router_bgp)#no bgp regex-eval-optz-disable Dell(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip protocols Routing Protocol is "ospf 22222" Router ID is 2.2.2.2 Area Routing for Networks 51 10.10.10.0/00 Routing Protocol is "bgp 1" Cluster Id is set to 10.10.10.0 Router Id is set to 10.10.10.
PAGE 270
Command Modes Command History ROUTER BGP Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you enable soft-reconfiguration for a neighbor and you execute the clear ip bgp soft in command, the update database stored in the router is replayed and updates are re-evaluated. With this command, the replay and update process is triggered only if route-refresh request is not negotiated with the peer.
PAGE 271
Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. capture bgp-pdu neighbor — enables capture of an IPv4 BGP neighbor packet. show capture bgp-pdu neighbor — displays BGP packet capture information for an IPv6 address. clear ip bgp Reset BGP sessions. The soft parameter (BGP Soft Reconfiguration) clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection.
PAGE 272
Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format and the prefix mask in slash format (/x) to clear dampening information only that BGP neighbor. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. After you enter this command, the software deletes the history routes and returns the suppressed routes to the Active state.
PAGE 273
show ip bgp flap-statistics — views the BGP flap statistics. undebug all — disables all debugging operations. clear ip bgp peer-group Reset a peer-group’s BGP sessions. Syntax clear ip bgp peer-group peer-group-name Parameters Command Modes peer-group-name Enter the peer group name to reset the BGP sessions within that peer group. EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 274
debug ip bgp keepalives — views information about BGP keepalives. debug ip bgp notifications — views information about BGP notifications. debug ip bgp updates — views information about BGP updates. show debugging — views enabled debugging operations. debug ip bgp dampening View information on routes being dampened. Syntax debug ip bgp dampening [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp dampening command.
PAGE 275
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To remove all configured debug commands for BGP, enter the no debug ip bgp command. debug ip bgp keepalives Display information about BGP keepalive messages. Syntax debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] keepalives [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-groupname] keepalives [in | out] command.
PAGE 276
Command Modes Command History Usage Information EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To remove all configured debug commands for BGP, enter the no debug ip bgp command. debug ip bgp soft-reconfiguration Enable soft-reconfiguration debug. Syntax debug ip bgp {ip-address | peer-group-name} soft-reconfiguration To disable, use the no debug ip bgp {ip-address | peer-group-name} softreconfiguration command.
PAGE 277
peer-group-name Command Modes Command History Usage Information (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers within the peer group. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To remove all configured debug commands for BGP, enter the no debug ip bgp command. default-metric Allows you to change the metric of redistributed routes to locally originated routes. Use this command with the redistribute command.
PAGE 278
Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. router bgp — enters ROUTER mode on the switch. max-paths Configure the maximum number of parallel routes (multipath support) BGP supports. Syntax max-paths {ebgp | ibgp} number To return to the default values, enter the no maximum-paths command. Parameters ebgp Enter the keyword ebgp to enable multipath support for External BGP routes.
PAGE 279
Usage Information By default, when you create a neighbor/peer group configuration in the Router BGP context, this enables IPv4/Unicast AFI/SAFI. When you use activate in the new context, the neighbor/peer group enables for AFI/SAFI. neighbor add-path This command allows the specified neighbor/peer group to send/receive multiple path advertisements.
PAGE 280
Defaults Command Modes Command History • seconds = 5 seconds (internal peers) • seconds = 30 seconds (external peers) ROUTER BGP Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor advertisement-start To send BGP routing updates, set the minimum interval before starting. Syntax neighbor {ip-address} advertisement-start seconds To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address} advertisement-start command.
PAGE 281
Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. bgp four-octet-as-support — enables 4-byte support for the BGP process. neighbor default-originate Inject the default route to a BGP peer or neighbor. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} default-originate [route-map mapname] To remove a default route, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} defaultoriginate command.
PAGE 282
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor distribute-list Distribute BGP information via an established prefix list. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} To delete a neighbor distribution list, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
PAGE 283
ttl Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of hops as the Time to Live (ttl) value. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 255. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To prevent loops, the neighbor ebgp-multihop command does not install the default routes of the multihop peer. Networks not directly connected are not considered valid for best-path selection.
PAGE 284
restart-time seconds Enter the keyword restart-time then the maximum number of seconds to restart and bring-up all the peers. The range is from 1 to 3600 seconds. The default is 120 seconds. stale-path-time seconds Enter the keyword stale-path-time then the maximum number of seconds to wait before restarting a peer’s stale paths. The default is 360 seconds. role receiver-only Enter the keyword role receiver-only to designate the local router to support graceful restart as a receiver only.
PAGE 285
neighbor maximum-prefix Control the number of network prefixes received. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum [threshold] [warning-only] To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group.
PAGE 286
password Enter a text string up to 80 characters long. The first character of the password must be a letter. You cannot use spaces in the password. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Configure the same password on both BGP peers or a connection does not occur.
PAGE 287
Usage Information You can assign up to 256 peers to one peer group. When you add a peer to a peer group, it inherits all the peer group’s configured parameters.
PAGE 288
neighbor peer-group passive Enable passive peering on a BGP peer group, that is, the peer group does not send an OPEN message, but responds to one. Syntax neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive [limit sessions] To delete a passive peer-group, use the no neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive command. Parameters peer-group-name Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the peer group.
PAGE 289
Usage Information To accept 4-byte formats before entering a 4 byte AS Number, configure your system. If the number parameter is the same as the AS number used in the router bgp command, the remote AS entry in the neighbor is considered an internal BGP peer entry. This command creates a peer and the newly created peer is disabled (Shutdown). Related Commands router bgp — enters ROUTER BGP mode and configures routes in an AS. bgp four-octet-as-support — enables 4-byte support for the BGP process.
PAGE 290
To remove the route map, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} routemap map-name {in | out} command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group. map-name Enter the name of an established route map. If the Route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). in Enter the keyword in to filter inbound routes. out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound routes.
PAGE 291
Usage Information A route reflector reflects routes to the neighbors assigned to the cluster. Neighbors in the cluster do not need not to be fully meshed. By default, when you use no route reflector, the internal BGP (IBGP) speakers in the network must be fully meshed. The first time you enter this command, the router configures as a route reflector and the specified BGP neighbors configure as clients in the route-reflector cluster.
PAGE 292
neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound Enable soft-reconfiguration for BGP. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} soft-reconfiguration inbound To disable, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} softreconfiguration inbound command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers within the peer group.
PAGE 293
• Command Modes Command History Usage Information holdtime = 180 seconds ROUTER BGP Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Timer values configured with the neighbor timers command override the timer values configured with any other command.
PAGE 294
To remove a weight value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} weight command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the peer router in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable all routers within the peer group. weight Enter a number as the weight. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 0. Defaults 0 Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 295
Command Modes Command History ROUTER BGP Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The system software resolves the network address the network command configures with the routes in the main routing table to ensure that the networks are reachable using non-BGP routes and non-default routes. Related Commands redistribute — redistributes routes into BGP. network backdoor Specify this IGP route as the preferred route.
PAGE 296
route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map then the name of an established route map. Only the following ROUTE-MAP mode commands are supported: • match ip address • set metric • set tag If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. With the Dell Networking OS version 8.3.1.
PAGE 297
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. With the Dell Networking OS version 8.3.1.0 and later, you can use the redistribute command to advertise the IGP cost as the MED on redistributed routes. When you set the route-map with metric-type internal and apply outbound to an EBGP peer/peer-group, the advertised routes corresponding to those peer/peer-groups have the IGP cost set as MED.
PAGE 298
Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell(conf-router_bgp)#show capture bgp-pdu neighbor 20.20.20.2 Incoming packet capture enabled for BGP neighbor 20.20.20.
PAGE 299
show ip bgp View the current BGP IPv4 routing table for the system. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] [network [network-mask] [longer-prefixes]] ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes. network (OPTIONAL) Enter the network address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP network to view information only on that network.
PAGE 300
*> *> 4.24.118.16/30 *> 4.24.145.0/30 *> 4.24.187.12/30 *> 4.24.202.0/30 *> 4.25.88.0/30 *> 5.0.0.0/9 *> 5.0.0.0/10 *> 5.0.0.0/11 --More-Related Commands 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 701 209 209 209 209 209 ? ? ? 6461 16422 i i i i i 3561 3908 i show ip bgp community — views the BGP communities.
PAGE 301
Network * I 10.10.10.1/32 * I *>I * I * I * I * I 10.19.75.5/32 * I *>I * I * I * I * I 10.30.1.0/24 * I *>I * I * I * I Next Hop 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.
PAGE 302
All routes with the NO_EXPORT (0xFFFFFF01) community attribute must not be advertised outside a BGP confederation boundary. Command Modes Command History Usage Information • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp summary command. The text line above the route table states the number of COMMUNITY attributes found.
PAGE 303
show ip bgp community-list View routes that a specific community list affects. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] community-list community-list-name [exact-match] ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes. community-listname Enter the name of a configured IP community list (maximum 140 characters). exact-match Enter the keyword for an exact match of the communities.
PAGE 304
Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip bgp damp command shown in the following example. Field Description Network Displays the network ID to which the route is dampened. From Displays the IP address of the neighbor advertising the dampened route. Reuse Displays the hour:minutes:seconds until the dampened route is available.
PAGE 305
NdOrgNHP 0 : NdModPathP 0x419efcc0 : NdModASPAP 0x41a4c000 : NdModCommP 0x41a4c800 NdModOptP 0x41a4d000 : NdModNHP : NdComSortBufP 0x41a19110 : NdComSortHdP 0x41a19d04 : NdUpdAFMsk 0 : AFRstSet 0x41a1a298 : NHopDfrdHdP 0x41a1a3e0 : NumNhDfrd 0 : CfgHdrAFMsk 1 AFChkNetTmrP 0x41ee705c : AFRtDamp 0 : AlwysCmpMed 0 : LocrHld 10 : LocrRem 10 : softReconfig 0x41a1a58c DefMet 0 : AutoSumm 1 : NhopsP 0x41a0d100 : Starts 0 : Stops 0 : Opens 0 Closes 0 : Fails 0 : Fatals 0 : ConnExps 0 : HldExps 0 : KeepExps 0 RxOpen
PAGE 306
show ip bgp extcommunity-list View information on all routes with Extended Community attributes. Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] extcommunity-list [list name] Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes. list name Enter the extended community list name you wish to view. The range is 140 characters. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 307
Field Example Description • c = external confederation route entry • n = network route entry • r = redistributed route entry Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router. If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing table. Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned. LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route. Weight Displays the route’s weight.
PAGE 308
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the network mask (in slash prefix (/x) format) of the BGP network address. filter-list as-pathname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword filter-list then the name of a configured AS-PATH ACL. The range is 140 characters. regexp regularexpression Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following characters to match. The range is 256 characters. • . = (period) any single character (including a white space).
PAGE 309
show ip bgp inconsistent-as View routes with inconsistent originating autonomous system (AS) numbers; that is, prefixes that are announced from the same neighbor AS but with a different AS-Path. Syntax Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] inconsistent-as • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip bgp inconsistent-as command shown in the following example.
PAGE 310
show ip bgp neighbors Allows you to view the information BGP neighbors exchange. Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] neighbors [ip-address [advertised-routes | dampened-routes | detail | flap-statistics | routes | {received-routes [network [network-mask]]} | {denied-routes [network [network-mask]]}] Parameters ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes.
PAGE 311
Example (S4810 S4820T) The Lines Beginning with: Description BGP version Displays the BGP version (always version 4) and the remote router ID. BGP state Displays the neighbor’s BGP state and the amount of time in hours:minutes:seconds it has been in that state.
PAGE 312
ADD_PATH (69) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Example Dell#show ip bgp neighbors BGP neighbor is 100.10.10.2, remote AS 200, external link BGP version 4, remote router ID 192.168.2.
PAGE 313
redistributed n - network, D - denied, S - stale Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network D 70.70.21.0/24 D 70.70.22.0/24 D 70.70.23.0/24 D 70.70.24.0/24 *> 70.70.25.0/24 *> 70.70.26.0/24 *> 70.70.27.0/24 *> 70.70.28.0/24 *> 70.70.29.0/24 Dell# Example (deniedroutes) Metric LocPrf 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Weight Path 0 100 200 ? 0 100 200 ? 0 100 200 ? 0 100 200 ? 0 100 200 ? 0 100 200 ? 0 100 200 ? 0 100 200 ? 0 100 200 ? Dell#show ip bgp neighbors 100.10.10.
PAGE 314
Example Field Description Flaps Displays the number of times the next hop has flapped. Time Elapsed Displays the time elapsed since the next hop was learned. If the route is down, this field displays time elapsed since the route went down. Dell>show ip bgp next-hop Next-hop Via 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33, 63.114.8.34 63.114.8.34, 63.114.8.35 63.114.8.35, 63.114.8.60 63.114.8.
PAGE 315
Example Field Description Address Displays the internal address where the path attribute is stored. Hash Displays the hash bucket where the path attribute is stored. Refcount Displays the number of BGP routes using this path attribute. Metric Displays the MED attribute for this path attribute. Path Displays the AS path for the route, with the origin code for the route listed last. Numbers listed between braces {} are AS_SET information.
PAGE 316
Example Dell#show ip bgp paths as-path Total 13 AS-Paths Address Hash Refcount AS-Path 0x1ea3c1ec 251 1 42 0x1ea3c25c 251 1 22 0x1ea3c1b4 507 1 13 0x1ea3c304 507 1 33 0x1ea3c10c 763 1 {92 93} 0x1ea3c144 763 1 {102 103} 0x1ea3c17c 763 1 12 0x1ea3c2cc 763 1 32 0x1ea3c09c 764 1 {72 73} 0x1ea3c0d4 764 1 {82 83} 0x1ea3c224 1019 1 43 0x1ea3c294 1019 1 23 0x1ea3c02c 1021 4 Dell# show ip bgp paths community View all unique COMMUNITY numbers in the BGP database.
PAGE 317
0x1ce6be44 80 2 209:209 209:999 209:40832 0x1c6e2374 80 2 209:777 209:41528 0x1f58ad6c 82 46 209:209 209:41528 0x1c6e2064 83 2 209:777 209:40832 0x1f588ecc 85 570 209:209 209:40832 0x1f57cc0c 98 2 209:209 209:21226 286:3031 13646:1044 13646:1124 13646:1154 13646:1164 13646:1184 13646:1194 13646:1204 13646:1214 13646:1224 13646:1234 13646:1244 13646:1254 13646:1264 13646:3000 0x1d65b2ac 117 6 209:209 209:999 209:31272 0x1f5854ac 119 18 209:209 209:21226 286:108 286:111 286:777 286:3033 517:5104 show ip bgp
PAGE 318
Example (S4810 S4820T) Line beginning with: Description Number of peers Displays the number of peers currently configured for this peer group. Peer-group members: Lists the IP addresses of the peers in the peer group. If the address is outbound optimized, an * is displayed next to the IP address.
PAGE 319
show ip bgp regexp Display the subset of the BGP routing table matching the regular expressions specified. Syntax Parameters show ip bgp regexp regular-expression [character] regular-expression [character] Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following characters to match: • . = (period) any single character (including a white space). • * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (zero or more sequences). • + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (one or more sequences).
PAGE 320
11853 11853 6496 *>I 4.17.226.0/23 11853 11853 6496 *>I 4.17.251.0/24 11853 11853 6496 *>I 4.17.252.0/23 11853 11853 6496 *>I 4.19.2.0/23 *>I 4.19.16.0/23 *>I 4.21.80.0/22 *>I 4.21.82.0/24 *>I 4.21.252.0/23 i *>I 4.23.180.0/24 *>I 4.36.200.0/21 *>I 4.67.64.0/22 *>I 4.78.32.0/21 *>I 6.1.0.0/16 *>I 6.2.0.0/22 *>I 6.3.0.0/18 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 11853 11853 11853 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 11853 11853 11853 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 11853 11853 11853 1.1.1.2 1.1.1.2 1.1.1.2 1.1.1.2 1.1.1.
PAGE 321
Field Description Dampening enabled Displayed only when you enable dampening. Displays the number of paths designated as history, dampened, or penalized. Neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address. AS Displays the AS number of the neighbor. MsgRcvd Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor received. MsgSent Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor sent. TblVer Displays the version of the BGP table that was sent to that neighbor.
PAGE 322
120.10.10.2 300 Dell# 40 47 34 0 0 00:37:10 0 show running-config bgp To display the current BGP configuration, use this feature. Syntax show running-config bgp Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. timers bgp Adjust the BGP Keep Alive and Hold Time timers. Syntax timers bgp keepalive holdtime To return to the default, use the no timers bgp command.
PAGE 323
debug ip bgp dampening View information on routes being dampened. Syntax debug ip bgp ipv4 multicast dampening To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp ipv4 multicast dampening command. Parameters Command Modes dampening Enter the keyword dampening to clear route flap dampening information. EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. distance bgp Define an administrative distance for routes.
PAGE 324
show ip bgp dampened-paths View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active). Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] dampened-paths Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip bgp damp command shown in the following example. Field Description Network Displays the network ID to which the route is dampened.
PAGE 325
Parameters as4 ASN4:NN Enter the keyword as4 then the 4-octet AS specific extended community number in the format ASN4:NN (4-byte AS number:2-byte community value). ASN:NNNN Enter the 2-octet AS specific extended community number in the format ASN:NNNN (2-byte AS number:4-byte community value). IPADDR:NN Enter the IP address specific extended community in the format IPADDR:NN (4byte IPv4 Unicast Address:2-byte community value).
PAGE 326
Command History Usage Information Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If the set community rt and soo are in the same route-map entry, the behavior defines as: • If the rt option comes before soo, with or without the additive option, soo overrides the communities rt sets. • If the rt option comes after soo, without the additive option, rt overrides the communities soo sets.
PAGE 327
Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes. list name Enter the extended community list name you wish to view. The range is 140 characters. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp summary command.
PAGE 328
Related Commands clear ip bgp — activates inbound policies without resetting the BGP TCP session. clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft Clear and reapply policies for IPv6 unicast routes without resetting the TCP connection; that is, perform BGP soft reconfiguration. Syntax clear ip bgp {* | as-number | ipv4-neighbor-addr | ipv6-neighbor-addr | peer-group name} ipv6 unicast soft [in | out] Parameters * Clear and reapply an asterisk ( * ) for all BGP sessions.
PAGE 329
ipv6 unicast Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Debug soft reconfiguration for IPv6 unicast routes. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command turns on BGP soft-reconfiguration inbound debugging for IPv6 unicast routes. If no neighbor is specified, debug is turned on for all neighbors. ipv6 prefix-list Configure an IPv6 prefix list.
PAGE 330
IPv6 MBGP Commands Multiprotocol BGP (MBGP) is an enhanced BGP that enables multicast routing policy throughout the Internet and connecting multicast topologies between BGP and autonomous systems (AS). MBGP is implemented as per IETF RFC 1858. show ipv6 mbgproutes Display the selected IPv6 MBGP route or a summary of all MBGP routes in the table.
PAGE 331
10 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) Content addressable memory (CAM) commands are supported on the Dell Networking MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. WARNING: If you are using these features for the first time, contact Dell Networking Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for guidance. CAM Profile Commands The CAM profiling feature allows you to partition the CAM to best suit your application. For example: • Configure more Layer 2 forwarding information base (FIB) entries when the system is deployed as a switch.
PAGE 332
• IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 0 • L3 QoS (ipv4qos): 1 • L2 QoS (l2qos): 1 • L2PT (L2PT): 0 • MAC ACL (IpMacAcl): 0 • VmanDualQos: 0 • EcfmAcl: 0 • nlbclusteracl: 0 • FcoeAcl: 4 • iscsiOptAcl: 2 l2acl number Enter the keyword l2acl and then the number of l2acl blocks. The range is from 1 to 8. ipv4acl number Enter the keyword ipv4acl and then the number of FP blocks for IPv4. The range is from 0 to 8. ipv6acl number Enter the keyword ipv6acl and then the number of FP blocks for IPv6.
PAGE 333
NOTE: Use this attribute to specify the number of VRF ACL groups. The total number of VRF ACL groups should not exceed 13. You can assign only one VRF ACL group with an odd numbered value. l2acl number ipv4acl number ipv6acl number, ipv4qos number l2qos number, l2pt number ipmacacl number ecfmacl number [vman-qos | vman--qos-dual number | vmanqos-dual-fp number] ipv4pbr number Command Modes Command History Usage Information Allocate space to each CAM region.
PAGE 334
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. When you enable this command, if a Policy Map containing classification rules (ACL and/or dscp/ ipprecedence rules) is applied to more than one physical interface on the same port pipe, only a single copy of the policy is written (only one FP entry is used). NOTE: An ACL itself may still require more that a single FP entry, regardless of the number of interfaces.
PAGE 335
VmanDualQos : EcfmAcl : FcoeAcl : iscsiOptAcl : ipv4pbr : vrfv4Acl : Openflow : fedgovacl : nlbclusteracl: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- stack-unit 1 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 show cam-acl-egress Display the details of the FP groups allocated for the egress ACL.
PAGE 336
11 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) The CoPP commands are supported on the Dell Networking MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. control-plane-cpuqos To manage control-plane traffic, enter control-plane mode and configure the switch. Syntax control-plane-cpuqos Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 337
service-policy rate-limit-protocols Apply a policy for the system to rate limit control protocols on a per-protocol basis. Syntax Parameters service-policy rate-limit-protocols policy-name policy-name Enter the service-policy name, using a string up to 32 characters. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONTROL-PLANE-CPUQOS Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 338
Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 Q10 Q11 300 400 400 400 600 300 300 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 show ip protocol-queue-mapping Display the queue mapping for each configured protocol. Syntax show ip protocol-queue-mapping Defaults Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 339
ICMPV6 RA ICMPV6 NS ICMPV6 RS ICMPV6 VRRPV6 OSPFV3 Dell# any any any any any any any any any any any any _ _ _ _ _ _ Q6 Q5 Q5 Q6 Q10 Q9 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ show mac protocol-queue-mapping Display the queue mapping for the MAC protocols. Syntax show mac protocol-queue-mapping Defaults Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 340
12 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of IEEE Ethernet enhancements that provide data centers with a single, robust, converged network to support multiple traffic types, including local area network (LAN), server, and storage traffic. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) commands for data center bridging features include 802.1Qbb priority-based flow control (PFC), 802.1Qaz enhanced transmission selection (ETS), and the data center bridging exchange (DCBX) protocol.
PAGE 341
Parameters {ets-conf | ets-reco | pfc} Enter the PFC and ETS TLVs advertised, where: • ets-conf: enables the advertisement of ETS configuration TLVs. • ets-reco: enables the advertisement of ETS recommend TLVs. • pfc: enables the advertisement of PFC TLVs. Defaults All PFC and ETS TLVs are advertised. Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 342
(100% minus assigned bandwidth amount) is equally distributed to unassigned nonstrict priority queues in the priority group. The sum of the allocated bandwidth to all queues in a priority group must be 100% of the bandwidth on the link. ETS-assigned bandwidth allocation applies only to data queues, not to control queues. The configuration of bandwidth allocation and strict-queue scheduling is not supported at the same time for a priority group.
PAGE 343
stack-unit all Enter the stack unit identification. Indicates the specific the stack unit or units. Entering all shows the status for all stacks. stack-port all Enter the port number of a port in a switch stack. Default None Command Modes CONFIGURATION mode Command History Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL platform. Usage Information You can configure up to a maximum of four lossless (PFC) queues.
PAGE 344
dcbx port-role Configure the DCBX port role the interface uses to exchange DCB information. Syntax dcbx port-role {config-source | auto-downstream | auto-upstream | manual} To remove DCBX port role, use the no dcbx port-role {config-source | auto-downstream | auto-upstream | manual} command. Parameters config-source | auto-downstream | auto-upstream | manual Enter the DCBX port role, where: • config-source: configures the port to serve as the configuration source on the switch.
PAGE 345
• ieee-v2: configures the port to use IEEE 802.1az (Draft 2.5). Defaults Auto Command Modes INTERFACE PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. DCBX requires that you enable LLDP to advertise DCBX TLVs to peers. Configure DCBX operation at the INTERFACE level on a switch or globally on the switch.
PAGE 346
description Enter a text description of the DCB policy (PFC input or ETS output). Syntax description text To remove the text description, use the no description command. Parameters Defaults text Enter the description of the output policy. The maximum is 32 characters. none Command Modes Command History Related Commands • DCB INPUT POLICY • DCB OUTPUT POLICY Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 347
iscsi priority-bits Configure the iSCSI priority advertised for the iSCSI protocol in application priority TLVs. Syntax iscsi priority-bits priority-bitmap To remove the configured iSCSI priority, use the no iscsi priority-bits command. Parameters priority-bitmap Defaults 0x10 Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Usage Information Enter the priority-bitmap range. The range is from 1 to FF. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
PAGE 348
Command Modes Command History Usage Information DCB-BUFFER-THRESHOLD mode Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL platform. For each priority, you can specify the shared buffer threshold limit, the ingress buffer size, buffer limit for pausing the acceptance of packets, and the buffer offset limit for resuming the acceptance of received packets. When PFC detects congestion on a queue for a specified priority, it sends a pause frame for the 802.1p priority traffic to the transmitting device.
PAGE 349
pfc no-drop queues Configure the port queues that still function as no-drop queues for lossless traffic. Syntax pfc no-drop queues queue-range To remove the no-drop port queues, use the no pfc no-drop queues command. Parameters queue-range Enter the queue range. Separate the queue values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example, pfc no-drop queues 1,3 or pfc no-drop queues 2-3. The range is from 0 to 3. Defaults No lossless queues are configured.
PAGE 350
Defaults none Command Modes PRIORITY-GROUP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. By default: • All 802.1p priorities are grouped in priority group 0. • 100% of the port bandwidth is assigned to priority group 0. The complete bandwidth is equally assigned to each priority class so that each class has 12 to 13%.
PAGE 351
scheduler Configure the method used to schedule priority traffic in port queues. Syntax scheduler value To remove the configured priority schedule, use the no scheduler command. Parameters value Enter schedule priority value. The valid values are: • strict: strict-priority traffic is serviced before any other queued traffic. • werr: weighted elastic round robin (werr) provides low-latency scheduling for priority traffic on port queues.
PAGE 352
Usage Information Specify a stack-unit number on the Master switch in a stack. Example Dell(conf)#do show dcb stack-unit 0 port-set 0 DCB Status :Enabled PFC Queue Count :2 Total Buffer[lossy + lossless] (in KB):7982 PFC Total Buffer (in KB) :5872 PFC Shared Buffer (in KB) :832 PFC Available Buffer (in KB) :4860 Dell (conf)# show interface dcbx detail Displays the DCBX configuration on an interface.
PAGE 353
Field Description Local DCBX TLVs Transmitted Transmission status (enabled or disabled) of advertised DCB TLVs (see TLV code at the top of the show command output). Local DCBX Status: DCBX Operational Version DCBX version advertised in Control TLVs. Local DCBX Status: DCBX Max Version Supported Highest DCBX version supported in Control TLVs. Local DCBX Status: Sequence Number Sequence number transmitted in Control TLVs.
PAGE 354
Example Field Description Application Priority TLV Statistics: Input Appln Priority TLV pkts Number of Application TLVs received. Application Priority TLV Statistics: Output Appln Priority TLV pkts Number of Application TLVs transmitted. Application Priority TLV Statistics: Error Appln Priority TLV Pkts Number of Application TLV error packets received Total DCBX Frames transmitted Number of DCBX frames sent from the local port.
PAGE 355
DCBX Operational Version is 0 DCBX Max Version Supported is 255 Sequence Number: 2 Acknowledgment Number: 2 Total DCBX Frames transmitted 27 Total DCBX Frames received 6 Total DCBX Frame errors 0 Total DCBX Frames unrecognized 0 show interface ets Displays the ETS configuration applied to egress traffic on an interface, including priority groups with priorities and bandwidth allocation.
PAGE 356
Field Description Local Parameters ETS configuration on local port, including admin mode (enabled when a valid TLV is received from a peer), priority groups, assigned dot1p priorities, and bandwidth allocation. Operational status (local port) Port state for current operational ETS configuration: • Init: Local ETS configuration parameters were exchanged with the peer. • Recommend: Remote ETS configuration parameters were received from the peer.
PAGE 357
TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 0% ETS 2 0% ETS 3 0% ETS 4 0% ETS 5 0% ETS 6 0% ETS 7 0% ETS Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 13% ETS 1 13% ETS 2 13% ETS 3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled Example (Detail) Dell(conf)# show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/0 ets detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 8 Admin mode is on Admin
PAGE 358
1 13% ETS 2 13% ETS 3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Output Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts 0 Input Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Output Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Error Traffic Class TLV Pkts show interface pfc Displays the PFC configuration applied to ingress traffic on an interface, including priorities and link delay.
PAGE 359
Field Description Operational status (local port) Port state for current operational PFC configuration: • Init: Local PFC configuration parameters were exchanged with the peer. • Recommend: Remote PFC configuration parameters were received from the peer. • Internally propagated: PFC configuration parameters were received from the configuration source. PFC DCBX Oper status Operational status for the exchange of the PFC configuration on the local port: match (up) or mismatch (down).
PAGE 360
Admin is enabled Remote is enabled, Priority list is 4 Remote Willing Status is enabled Local is enabled Oper status is Recommended PFC DCBX Oper status is Up State Machine Type is Feature TLV Tx Status is enabled PFC Link Delay 45556 pause quantams Application Priority TLV Parameters : -------------------------------------FCOE TLV Tx Status is disabled ISCSI TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Local ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x10 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x8
PAGE 361
Priority Rx XOFF Frames Rx Total Frames Tx Total Frames -------------------------------------------------------0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 show qos priority-groups Displays the ETS priority groups configured on the switch, including the 802.1p priority classes and ID of each group. Syntax show qos priority-groups Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
PAGE 362
Version 8.3.16.1 Example Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 363
Default None. Command Modes CONFIGURATION mode Command History Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL platform. Configure the maximum shared buffer available for PFC traffic. You can choose to increase or decrease the shared buffer that is currently allocated in the system by default. You must configure the shared buffer size to be less than the total PFC buffer size.
PAGE 364
Parameters Command Modes Command History value Enter the number of PFC queues. The range is from 1 to 4. The number of ports supported based on lossless queues configured will depend on the buffer. CONFIGURATION mode Version 9.3(0.0) Supported on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Usage Information You can configure up to a maximum of four lossless (PFC) queues.
PAGE 365
dcb-policy buffer-threshold (Interface Configuration) Assign the DCB policy to the DCB buffer threshold profile on interfaces. This setting takes precedence over the global bufferthreshold setting. Syntax Parameters dcb-policy buffer-threshold profile-name buffer-threshold Configure the profile name for the DCB buffer threshold profile-name Enter the name of the profile, which can be a string of up to 32 characters in length. Default None Command Modes INTERFACE mode Command History Version 9.3(0.
PAGE 366
allocated for each priority and the pause or resume thresholds for the buffer. This method of configuration enables you to effectively manage and administer the behavior of lossless queues. Example Dell(conf)# dcb-policy buffer-threshold stack-unit all stack-ports all test priority-pgid Assign 802.1p priority traffic to a priority group in a DCB map.
PAGE 367
qos-policy-buffer Create a QoS policy buffer and enter the configuration mode to configure the no-drop queues, ingress buffer size, buffer limit for pausing, and buffer offset limit for resuming.
PAGE 368
For each QoS policy buffer, you can specify the shared buffer threshold limit, the ingress buffer size, buffer limit for pausing the acceptance of packets, and the buffer offset limit for resuming the acceptance of received packets. When PFC detects congestion on a queue for a specified priority, it sends a pause frame for the 802.1p priority traffic to the transmitting device. You can use set up both the administrative and peer-related PFC priorities.
PAGE 369
Example Field Description TSA Transmission scheduling algorithm used by the priority group: Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS). BW Percentage of bandwidth allocated to the priority group. PFC PFC setting for the priority group: On (enabled) or Off. Priorities 802.1p priorities configured in the priority group.
PAGE 370
13 Debugging and Diagnostics The basic debugging and diagnostic commands are supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). This chapter contains the following sections: • Offline Diagnostic Commands • Buffer Tuning Commands • Hardware Commands Offline Diagnostic Commands The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. While tests are running, the Dell operating system results are saved as a text file (TestReport-SU-X.txt) in the flash directory.
PAGE 371
wherever possible. There are no tests on 10G links. At this level, stack ports are shut down automatically. level2 Enter the keyword level2 to run Level 2 diagnostics. Level 2 diagnostics are a full set of diagnostic tests with no support for automatic partitioning. Level 2 diagnostics are used primarily for on-board loopback tests and more extensive component diagnostics. Various components on the board are put into Loopback mode and test packets are transmitted through those components.
PAGE 372
Parameters number Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the stack-unit number. The range is from 0 to 5. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The system reboots when the off-line diagnostics complete. This reboot is an automatic process. A warning message appears when the offline stack-unit command is implemented. Warning - Diagnostic execution will cause stack-unit to reboot after completion of diags.
PAGE 373
dynamic Enter the keyword dynamic to configure the amount of dynamic buffer space per Field Processor. packets-pointers Enter the keywords packets-pointers to configure the number of packet pointers per queue. queue0 number Enter the keyword queue0 and the number to allocate an amount of buffer space or packet pointers to Queue 0. queue1 number queue2 number queue3 number Defaults none Command Modes BUFFER PROFILE Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 374
fp-uplink Enter the keyword fp-uplink to apply a buffer profile to all Field Processors in a a port-pipe. port-set port-pipe Enter the keywords port-set then the port-pipe number. The range is 0 to 1. buffer-policy bufferprofile Enter the keywords buffer-policy then the name of a buffer profile you created. Defaults none Command Modes BUFFER PROFILE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.10 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 375
Version 8.3.16.1 Usage Information Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The buffer-profile global command fails if you have already applied a custom buffer-profile on an interface. Similarly, when you configure buffer-profile global, you cannot not apply buffer-profile on any interface. If the default buffer-profile is active, the Dell OS displays an error message instructing you to remove the default configuration using the no buffer-profile global command.
PAGE 376
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#show Linecard 0 4 Dell# Related Commands buffer-profile (Configuration) — Creates a buffer profile that can be applied to an interface. buffer-profile summary fp-uplink Port-set Buffer-profile 0 test1 0 test2 show buffer-profile interface Display the buffer profile that is applied to an interface.
PAGE 377
Hardware Commands These commands display information from a hardware sub-component or ASIC. clear hardware stack-unit Clear statistics from selected hardware components. Syntax Parameters clear hardware stack-unit 0–5 {counters | unit 0–1 counters | cpu dataplane statistics | cpu party-bus statistics | stack-port 0–52} stack-unit 0–5 Enter the keywords stack-unit then 0 to 5 to select a particular stack member and then enter one of the following command options to clear a specific collection of data.
PAGE 378
port-set 0–0 counters Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the keywords port-set along with a port-pipe number, then the keyword counters to clear the system-flow counters on the selected port-pipe. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show hardware stack-unit — displays the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of the designated stack member.
PAGE 379
show hardware stack-unit Display the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of the designated stack member.
PAGE 380
status on why a port is not coming up to register level: counters, details, port-stats [detail], or register. Defaults none Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show hardware stack-unit 0 phy-firmware-version PortNumber Status Programmed Version SW Version ===================================================== 41 Present 01.06 01.06 42 Present 01.06 01.06 43 Present 01.06 01.06 44 Present 01.06 01.
PAGE 381
txDatapathErr txPkt(COS0) txPkt(COS1) txPkt(COS2) txPkt(COS3) txPkt(COS4) txPkt(COS5) txPkt(COS6) txPkt(COS7) txPkt(UNIT0) Dell# :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 Example Dell#show hardware stack-unit 0 cpu party-bus statistics Input Statistics: 8189 packets, 8076608 bytes 0 dropped, 0 errors Output Statistics: 366 packets, 133100 bytes 0 errors Dell# Example (drops) Dell#show hard stack-unit 0 drops UNIT No: 0 Total Total Total Total Total Dell# Example (drop summary) Example (drop counters) Ingress Dr
PAGE 382
PKT Drops of ANY Conditions : 0 Hg MacUnderflow : 0 TX Err PKT Counter : 0 25 Dell# Example (portstatistics) Dell#show hardware stack-unit 0 unit 0 port-stats ena/ speed/ link auto STP lrn port link duplex scan neg? state pause discrd ops xe0 !ena 1G FD SW Yes Forward Tag F xe1 !ena 1G FD SW Yes Forward Tag F xe2 up 1G FD SW Yes Forward None FA xe3 !ena 1G FD SW Yes Forward Tag F xe4 down 10G FD SW Yes Block None FA xe5 !ena 1G FD SW Yes Forward Tag F xe6 !ena 1G FD SW Yes Forward Tag F xe7 !ena 1G FD SW Y
PAGE 383
0x03339000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.
PAGE 384
Example (specific port) Dell(conf)#show hardware stack-unit 0 buffer unit 0 port 1 buffer-info ----- Buffer Stats for Unit 0 Port 1 ----Maximum Shared Limit for the Port: 30720 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Port: 120 Used Packet Buffer for the Port: 0 Example (queue buffer) Dell(conf)#show hardware stack-unit 0 buffer unit 0 port 1 queue 2 bufferinfo ----- Buffer Stats for Unit 0 Port 1 Queue 2 ----Maximum Shared Limit: 30720 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: 8 Used Packet Buffer: 0
PAGE 385
2044 2043 2042 2041 2040 2039 2036 2000 1999 1998 1997 1995 1917 1916 1915 1792 1791 25 Dell# Example (noncounters) GVRP traffic Redirects 0 ARP Reply Redirects 0 802.
PAGE 386
action={act=Drop, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=CosQCpuNew, param0=7(0x07), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=CopyToCpu, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=UpdateCounter, param0=1(0x01), param1=0(0x00)}, meter=NULL, counter={idx=2, mode=0x01, entries=1} ################# FP Entry for redirecting GVRP traffic to RSM ########### EID 2044: gid=1, slice=15, slice_idx=0x03, prio=0x7fc, flags=0x82, Installed tcam: color_indep=0, higig=0, higig_mask=0, KEY=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 0180c200
PAGE 387
14 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on the configuration policies the network administrators determine. An MXL switch can operate as a DHCP server or DHCP client. As a DHCP client, the switch requests an IP address from a DHCP server.
PAGE 388
debug ip dhcp server Display the Dell Networking OS debugging messages for DHCP. Syntax debug ip dhcp server [events | packets] Parameters events Enter the keyword events to display the DHCP state changes. packet Enter the keyword packet to display packet transmission/reception. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug ipv6 dhcp To enable debug logs for DHCPv6 relay agent transactions.
PAGE 389
disable Disable the DHCP server. Syntax disable DHCP Server is disabled by default. To enable the system to be a DHCP server, use the no disable command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes DHCP Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dns-server Assign a DNS server to clients based on address pool. Syntax Parameters dns-server address [address2...address8] address Defaults none Command Modes DHCP Command History Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 390
excluded-address Prevent the server from leasing an address or range of addresses in the pool. Syntax excluded-address [address | low-address high-address] Parameters address Enter a single address to be excluded from the pool. low-address Enter the lowest address in a range of addresses to be excluded from the pool. high-address Enter the highest address in a range of addresses to be excluded from the pool. Defaults none Command Modes DHCP Command History Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 391
lease Specify a lease time for the addresses in a pool. Syntax Parameters lease {days [hours] [minutes] | infinite} days Enter the number of days of the lease. The range is from 0 to 31. hours Enter the number of hours of the lease. The range is from 0 to 23. minutes Enter the number of minutes of the lease. The range is from 0 to 59. infinite Specify that the lease never expires. Defaults 24 hours Command Modes DHCP Command History Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 392
Defaults Hybrid Command Modes DHCP Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. network Specify the range of addresses in an address pool. Syntax network network /prefix-length Parameters network/ prefixlength Defaults none Command Modes DHCP Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Specify a range of addresses. Prefix-length range is from 17 to 31. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 393
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip dhcp conflict Display the address conflict log. Syntax Parameters show ip dhcp conflict address address Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Display a particular conflict log entry. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip dhcp server Display the DHCP server statistics.
PAGE 394
Usage Information The ip address dhcp command enables an Ethernet interface to acquire a DHCP server-assigned dynamic IP address. This setting persists after a switch reboot. If you enter the shutdown command on the interface, DHCP transactions are stopped and the dynamically-acquired IP address is saved. To display the dynamic IP address and DHCP as the mode of IP address assignment, use the show interface type slot/port command.
PAGE 395
debug ip dhcp clients events Enable the display of log messages for the following events on DHCP client interfaces: IP address acquisition, IP address release, Renewal of IP address and lease time, and Release of an IP address. Syntax Parameters debug ip dhcp client events [interface type slot/port] interface type slot/ port Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Display log messages for DHCP events on the specified interface.
PAGE 396
Parameters interface type slot/ port Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 • For a 10-GigabitEthernet Ethernet interface, enter TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port numbers; for example, tengigabitethernet 1/3. • For a 40-GigabitEthernet Ethernet interface, enter FortyGigabitEthernet then the slot/port numbers; for example, fortygigabitethernet 0/2. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 397
show ip dhcp client statistics Display DHCP client statistics, including the number of DHCP messages sent and received on an interface. Syntax Parameters show ip dhcp client statistics {all | interface type slot/port} all Display DHCP client statistics on all DHCP client-enabled interfaces on the switch. interface type slot/ port Display DHCP client statistics on the specified interface. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 398
Commands to Configure Secure DHCP DHCP, as defined by RFC 2131, provides no authentication or security mechanisms. Secure DHCP is a suite of features that protects networks that use dynamic address allocation from spoofing and attacks. arp inspection Enable dynamic arp inspection (DAI) on a VLAN. Syntax arp inspection Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 399
clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding Clear all the DHCPv6 snooping binding database entries. Syntax clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.7(0.0) Example Introduced on the MXL.
PAGE 400
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL. ip dhcp snooping database Delay writing the binding table for a specified time.
PAGE 401
ip dhcp snooping binding Create a static entry in the DHCP binding table. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Related Commands [no] ip dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ip ip-address interface type slot/port lease number mac address Enter the keyword mac then the MAC address of the host to which the server is leasing the IP address. vlan-id vlan-id Enter the keywords vlan-id then the VLAN to which the host belongs. The range is from 2 to 4094.
PAGE 402
Defaults ipv6 ipv6-address Enter the keyword ipv6 then the IPv6 address that is leased to the client. interface type Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface to which the host is connected: • For an 10/100 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fastethernet. • For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet. • For a Ten-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tengigabitethernet. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE.
PAGE 403
Command Modes Command History • EXEC Privilege This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL. ip dhcp snooping trust Configure an interface as trusted. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping trust Defaults Untrusted Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 404
Parameters ipmac Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enable IP+MAC Source Address Validation. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Allocate at least one FP block to ipmacacl before you can enable IP+MAC Source Address Validation. 1. Use the cam-acl l2acl command from CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Save the running-config to the startup-config. 3. Reload the system. ip dhcp snooping vlan Enable DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs.
PAGE 405
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command-Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL. ip dhcp relay Enable Option 82. Syntax Parameters ip dhcp relay information-option [remote-id | trust-downstream] remote-id Configure the system to enable the remote-id string in option-82.
PAGE 406
show ipv6 DHCP snooping Display the DHCPv6 snooping database. Syntax show ipv6 dhcp snooping Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.7(0.0) Example Introduced on the MXL.
PAGE 407
Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL.
PAGE 408
15 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) Equal cost multi-path (ECMP) is supported on the Dell Networking MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ecmp-group Provides a mechanism to monitor traffic distribution on an ECMP link bundle. A system log is generated when the standard deviation of traffic distribution on a member link exceeds a defined threshold. Syntax ecmp-group {ecmp-group-id interface interface | link-bundle-monitor} To remove the selected interface, use the ecmp-group no interface command.
PAGE 409
To return to the default hash algorithm, use the no hash-algorithm command. To return to the default ECMP hash algorithm, use the no hash-algorithm ecmp algorithmvalue command. To remove the hash algorithm on a particular line card, use the no hash-algorithm linecard number command. Parameters algorithm-number Enter the algorithm number. The range is from 0 to 47.
PAGE 410
The hash value calculated with the hash-algorithm command is unique to the entire chassis. The hash algorithm command with the line card option changes the hash for a particular line card by applying the mask specified in the IPSA and IPDA fields. The line card option is applicable with the lag-hash-align microcode only (refer to CAM Profile Commands).
PAGE 411
• Command Modes Command History Usage Information dest-ip enabled CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The hash value calculated with the hash-algorithm command is unique to the entire chassis. The default ECMP hash configuration is crc-lower. This command takes the lower 32 bits of the hash key to compute the egress port and is the “fall-back” configuration if you have not configured anything else.
PAGE 412
ip ecmp-group Enable and specify the maximum number of ecmp that the L3 CAM hold for a route, By default, when maximum paths are not configured, the CAM can hold a maximum of 16 ecmp per route. Syntax ip ecmp-group {maximum-paths | {number} {path-fallback} To negate a command, use the no ip ecmp-group maximum-paths command. Parameters maximum-paths Specify the maximum number of ECMP for a route. The range is 2 to 64. path-fallback Use the keywords path-fallback to enable this feature.
PAGE 413
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show config Display the ECMP configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION-ECMP-GROUP Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 414
16 FC FLEXIO FPORT The MXL blade switch is a Trident+ based switch which is plugged into the Dell M1000 Blade server chassis. The blade module contains two slots for pluggable flexible module. The goal is to provide support for direct connectivity to FC equipments through Fibre channel ports by FC Flex IO optional module. The FC Flex IO utilizes Broadcom Montreal (BCM84757) FC/FCOE mapper to provide FCOE to FC functionality. feature fc Enable feature fc with FPort functionality.
PAGE 415
Version Description 9.1(1.0) Introduced on the S5000. Example without member Dell(conf)# fc zone z1 Dell(conf-fc-zone-z1)# Example with member Dell(conf)#fc zone test Dell(conf-fc-zone-test)#member ? WORD WWN(00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00), portID(000000), or Alias name(word) Dell(conf-fc-zone-test)#member Related Commands show fc zone — displays the configured zone. show fcoe-map — displays the fabric parameters. fc alias Create a zone alias name.
PAGE 416
fc zoneset Create a zoneset. Syntax fc zoneset zoneset_name [member] To delete a zoneset, use the no fc zoneset zoneset_name [member] command. Parameters Command Modes Command History zoneset_namemem ber Enter the zoneset name. Enter the WWPN, FC-ID, or Alias name. CONFIGURATION Version 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.1(1.0) Introduced on the S5000.
PAGE 417
forwarder (FCF) ports on an FCoE network. When applied to FC and Ethernet ports on an NPIV proxy gateway, an FCoE map allows the switch to operate as an FCoE-FC bridge between an FC SAN and an FCoE network. It provides necessary parameters to FCoE-enabled servers and switches to log in to a SAN fabric. On an MXL NPIV proxy gateway, an FCoE map is applied on fabric-facing FC ports and server-facing Ethernet ports. Use the fcoe-map command to apply an FCoE map on an Ethernet port.
PAGE 418
To remove an FCoE map from an FC interface, enter the no fabric map-name command in Interface configuration mode. Related Commands fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric. show fcoe-map— displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps. active-zoneset Activate the zoneset. Syntax active-zoneset zoneset_name To change to the default zone behavior, use the no active-zoneset zoneset_name command.
PAGE 419
Command History Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.1(1.0) Introduced on the S5000. Dell#show fc ns switch Total number of devices = 1 Switch Name 10:00:5c:f9:dd:ef:0a:00 Domain Id 1 Switch Port 53 Port Id 01:35:00 Port Name 10:00:8c:7c:ff:17:f8:01 Node Name 20:00:8c:7c:ff:17:f8:01 Class of Service 8 IP Address Symbolic Port Name Brocade-1860 | 3.0.3.
PAGE 420
Class of Service IP Address Symbolic Port Name Symbolic Node Name Port Type Registered with NameServer Registered for SCN Dell# Dell#show fc ns Total number of Intf# Domain 9 2 00:00:00:88 11 2 00:00:00:77 Dell# 8 Brocade-1860 | 3.0.3.0 | DV-SP-SERVER2 | (NULL) Node port Yes Yes fabric brief devices = 2 FC-ID 02:09:00 Enode-WWPN Enode-WWNN 32:11:0e:fc:00:00:00:88 22:11:0e:fc: 02:0b:00 31:11:0e:fc:00:00:00:77 21:11:0e:fc: show fc switch Display the switch configuration for Fibre Channel capability.
PAGE 421
show fc zoneset Display the configured and active zoneset. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Example show fc zoneset [ zoneset_name | active ] zoneset_name Enter the zoneset name to display the zoneset name active Enter the keyword active to display the active zonesets. merged Enter the keyword merged to display the merge active zones. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.1(1.0) Introduced on the S5000.
PAGE 422
show fc zone Display the configured zone. Syntax show fc zone [zonename ] Parameters Command Modes zonename • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Enter the zone name to display the details. Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.1(1.0) Introduced on the S5000.
PAGE 423
Related Commands fc alias — creates a zone alias name. show fcoe-map Display the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps. Syntax show fcoe-map Parameters None Command Modes Command History Usage Information • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version Description 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.1.1.0 Introduced on the S5000.
PAGE 424
17 FIPS Cryptography To configure federal information processing standards (FIPS) cryptography, use the following commands on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. fips mode enable Enable the FIPS cryptography mode on the platform. Syntax [no] fips mode enable To disable the FIPS cryptography mode, use the no fips mode enable command. Default Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 425
FIPS Mode Dell# : Enabled show ip ssh Display information about established SSH sessions Syntax show ip ssh Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show ip ssh SSH server SSH server version Password Authentication Hostbased Authentication RSA Authentication Vty Encryption 1 3des-cbc 2 3des-cbc : enabled. : v1 and v2. : enabled. : disabled. : disabled. HMAC Remote IP hmac-md5 10.1.20.
PAGE 426
-c encryption cipher Enter the following encryption cipher to use. (For v2 clients only.) Without the FIPS mode enabled: • 3des-cbc: Force ssh to use 3des-cbc encryption cipher. With the FIPS mode enabled: • aes128–cbc: Force ssh to use the aes128–cbc encryption cipher. • aes256–cbc: Force ssh to use the aes256–cbc encryption cipher. -l username (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword —l then the user name used in this SSH session. The default is the user name of the user associated with the terminal.
PAGE 427
hmac-sha1-96 Force ssh to use hmac-sha1-96 HMAC algorithm hmac-md5 Force ssh to use hmac-md5 HMAC algorithm hmac-md5-96 Force ssh to use hmac-md5-96 HMAC algorithm With FIPS mode enabled: Dell#ssh 10.11.8.12 ? -c Encryption cipher to use (for v2 client -l User name option -m HMAC algorithm to use (for v2 clients only) -p SSH server port option (default 22) Dell#ssh 10.11.8.
PAGE 428
18 FIP Snooping In a converged Ethernet network, an MXL Switch can operate as an intermediate Ethernet bridge to snoop on Fibre Channel over Ethernet initialization protocol (FIP) packets during the login process on Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) forwarders (FCFs). Acting as a transit FIP snooping bridge, the switch uses dynamically-created ACLs to permit only authorized FCoE traffic to be transmitted between an FCoE end-device and an FCF.
PAGE 429
port-channelnumber Command Modes Command History Enter the port channel number of the FIP packet statistics to be cleared. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear fip-snooping statistics Clears the statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all VLANs, a specified VLAN, or a specified port interface.
PAGE 430
fip-snooping enable Enable FIP snooping on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. Syntax fip-snooping enable To disable the FIP snooping feature on all or a specified VLAN, use the no fip-snooping enable command. Defaults FIP snooping is disabled on all VLANs. Command Modes Command History Usage Information • CONFIGURATION • VLAN INTERFACE Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 431
fip-snooping port-mode fcf Configure the port for bridge-to-FCF links. Syntax fip-snooping port-mode fcf To disable the bridge-to-FCF link on a port, use the no fip-snooping port-mode fcf command. Command Modes Command History Usage Information INTERFACE Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 432
• Command History Usage Information Example EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module The following describes the show fip-snooping enode command shown in the following example. Field Description ENode MAC MAC address of the ENode. ENode Interface Slot/ port number of the interface connected to the ENode. FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF. VLAN VLAN ID number the session uses. FC-ID Fibre Channel session ID the FCF assigns.
PAGE 433
Example Field Description FC-ID Fibre Channel session ID the FCF assigns. Dell# show fip-snooping fcf FCF MAC FCF Interface VLAN FC-MAP FKA_ADV_PERIOD No.
PAGE 434
0e:fc:00:01:00:02 00:00:00:00 0e:fc:00:01:00:03 00:00:00:00 0e:fc:00:01:00:04 00:00:00:00 0e:fc:00:01:00:05 00:00:00:00 01:00:02 41:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:00 21:00:0e:fc: 01:00:03 41:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:01 21:00:0e:fc: 01:00:04 41:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:02 21:00:0e:fc: 01:00:05 41:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:03 21:00:0e:fc: show fip-snooping statistics Display statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all interfaces, including VLANs, physical ports, and port channels.
PAGE 435
Example Field Description Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisements Number of FIP-snoop multicast discovery advertisements received on the interface. Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisements Number of FIP-snoop unicast discovery advertisements received on the interface. Number of FLOGI Accepts Number of FIP FLOGI accept frames received on the interface. Number of FLOGI Rejects Number of FIP FLOGI reject frames received on the interface.
PAGE 436
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Example (Port Channel) of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of Vlan Notifications :0 Multicast Discovery Solicits :1 Unicast Discovery Solicits :0 FLOGI :1 FDISC :16 FLOGO :0 Enode Keep Alive :4416 VN Port Keep Alive :3136 Multicast Discovery Advertisement :0 Unicast Discovery Advertisement :0 FLOGI Accepts :0 FLOGI Rejects :0 FDISC Accepts :0 FDIS
PAGE 437
FCFs Enodes Sessions : 1 : 2 : 17 show fip-snooping vlan Display information on the FCoE VLANs on which FIP snooping is enabled. Syntax Command Modes Command History Example show fip-snooping vlan • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 438
19 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) Force10 resilient ring protocol (FRRP) is supported on Dell Networking MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. FRRP is a proprietary protocol for that offers fast convergence in a Layer 2 network without having to run the spanning tree protocol (STP). The resilient ring protocol is an efficient protocol that transmits a high-speed token across a ring to verify the link status.
PAGE 439
Example Dell#clear frrp Clear frrp statistics counter on all ring [confirm] yes Dell#clear frrp 4 Clear frrp statistics counter for ring 4 [confirm] yes Dell# Related Commands show frrp — displays the resilient ring protocol configuration. debug frrp Clear the FRRP statistics counters. Syntax debug frrp {event | packet | detail} [ring-id] [count number] To disable debugging, use the no debug frrp {event | packet | detail} {ring-id} [countnumber] command.
PAGE 440
Parameters Word Enter a description of the ring. Maximum: 255 characters. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. disable Disable the resilient ring protocol. Syntax disable To enable the Resilient Ring Protocol, use the no disable command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 441
control-vlan vlan-id • Port Channel interface: enter the keyword port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface: enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information • 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface: enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information Enter the keyword control-vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Command History Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 442
Parameters master Enter the keyword master to set the Ring node to Master mode. transit Enter the keywordtransit to set the Ring node to Transit mode. Defaults Mode None Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol frrp Enter the Resilient Ring Protocol and designate a ring identification. Syntax protocol frrp {ring-id} To exit the ring protocol, use the no protocol frrp {ring-id} command.
PAGE 443
• hello Rx and Tx counters • Topology change Rx and Tx counters • The number of state change counters Example (Summary) Dell#show frrp summary Ring-ID State Mode Ctrl_Vlan Member_Vlans ---------------------------------------------2 UP Master 2 11-20, 25,27-30 31 UP Transit 31 40-41 50 Down Transit 50 32 Dell# Example (1) Dell#show frrp 1 Ring protocol 1 is in Master mode Ring Protocol Interface: Primary : GigabitEthernet 0/16 State: Forwarding Secondary: Port-channel 100 State: Blocking Control Vlan:
PAGE 444
NOTE: The configured dead interval must be at least three times the hello interval. Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information 444 • 500 ms for hello-interval milliseconds • 1500 ms for dead-intervalmilliseconds CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The hello interval command is the interval at which ring frames are generated from the primary interface of the master node.
PAGE 445
20 GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports the basic GVRP commands. The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) mechanism allows the configuration of a GARP participant to propagate through a network quickly. A GARP participant registers or de-registers its attributes with other participants by making or withdrawing declarations of attributes. At the same time, based on received declarations or withdrawals, GARP handles attributes of other participants.
PAGE 446
clear gvrp statistics Clear GVRP statistics on an interface. Syntax clear gvrp statistics interface interface Parameters interface interface Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
PAGE 447
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. disable Globally disable GVRP. Syntax disable To re-enable GVRP, use the no disable command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. gvrp enable — enables GVRP on physical interfaces and LAGs. protocol gvrp — access GVRP protocol. garp timers Set the intervals (in milliseconds) for sending GARP messages.
PAGE 448
Command Modes Command History Usage Information Related Commands CONFIGURATION-GVRP Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. • Join Timer — Join messages announce the willingness to register some attributes with other participants. For reliability, each GARP application entity sends a Join message twice and uses a join timer to set the sending interval. • Leave Timer — Leave announces the willingness to de-register with other participants.
PAGE 449
Defaults normal Command Modes CONFIGURATION-INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Fixed registration prevents an interface, configured using the command line, to belong to a VLAN (static configuration) from being unconfigured when it receives a Leave message. Therefore, Registration mode on that interface is fixed. Normal registration is the default registration. The port’s membership in the VLAN depends on GVRP.
PAGE 450
show garp timers Display the GARP timer settings for sending GARP messages. Syntax show garp timers Defaults none Command Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#show garp timers GARP Timers Value (milliseconds) ---------------------------------------Join Timer 200 Leave Timer 600 LeaveAll Timer 10000 Dell# Related Commands garp timers — sets the intervals (in milliseconds) for sending GARP messages.
PAGE 451
Example R3#show gvrp brief GVRP Feature is currently enabled. Port GVRP Status Edge-Port ---------------------------------------------Gi 3/0 Disabled No Gi 3/1 Disabled No Gi 3/2 Enabled No Gi 3/3 Disabled No Gi 3/4 Disabled No Gi 3/5 Disabled No Gi 3/6 Disabled No Gi 3/7 Disabled No Gi 3/8 Disabled No R3#show gvrp brief Related Commands show gvrp statistics — displays the GVRP statistics. clear gvrp statistics Clear GVRP statistics on an interface.
PAGE 452
Example • Join requests were received on a port that was blocked from learning dynamic VLANs (GVRP Blocking state). • An entry for a new GVRP VLAN could not be created in the GVRP database.
PAGE 453
21 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) The IGMP commands are supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). IGMP Snooping Commands The Dell Networking OS supports IGMP Snooping version 2 and 3 on all Dell Networking systems. Important Points to Remember for IGMP Snooping • The Dell Networking OS supports version 1, version 2, and version 3 hosts.
PAGE 454
To remove the feature, use the no ip igmp access-group access-list command. Parameters access-list Enter the name of the extended ACL (16 characters maximum). Defaults Not configured Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The access list accepted is an extended ACL.
PAGE 455
ip igmp query-interval Change the transmission frequency of IGMP general queries the Querier sends. Syntax ip igmp query-interval seconds To return to the default values, use the no ip igmp query-interval command. Parameters seconds Defaults 60 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the number of seconds between queries sent out. The range is from 1 to 18000. The default is 60 seconds. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 456
ip igmp snooping enable Enable IGMP snooping on all or a single VLAN. This command is the master on/off switch to enable IGMP snooping. Syntax ip igmp snooping enable To disable IGMP snooping, use the no ip igmp snooping enable command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes Command History Usage Information • CONFIGURATION • INTERFACE VLAN Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To enable IGMP snooping, enter this command.
PAGE 457
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. When you disable flooding, unregistered multicast data traffic is forwarded to only multicast router ports, both static and dynamic, in a VLAN. If there is no multicast router port in a VLAN, unregistered multicast data traffic is dropped. On the MXL switch, when you configure no ip igmp snooping flood, the system forwards the frames on mrouter ports for first 96 IGMP snooping enabled VLANs.
PAGE 458
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN — (conf-if-vl-n) Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The Dell Networking OS provides the capability of statically configuring the interface to which a multicast router is attached.
PAGE 459
Vlan 2 Gi 13/3, Po 1 Dell# Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) 459
PAGE 460
22 Interfaces The commands in this chapter are supported by Dell Networking Operating System (OS). This chapter contains the following sections: • Basic Interface Commands • Port Channel Commands Basic Interface Commands The following commands are for Physical, Loopback, and Null interfaces. clear counters Clear the counters used in the show interfaces commands for all virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) groups, virtual local area networks (VLANs), and physical interfaces, or selected ones.
PAGE 461
learning-limit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords learning-limit to clear unknown source address (SA) drop counters when MAC learning limit is configured on the interface. Defaults Without an interface specified, the command clears all interface counters. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 462
Related Commands show interfaces dampening — displays interface dampening information. dampening — configures dampening on an interface. cx4-cable-length Configure the length of the cable to be connected to the selected CX4 port.
PAGE 463
Related Commands show config – displays the configuration of the selected interface. dampening Configure dampening on an interface. Syntax dampening [[[[half-life] [reuse-threshold]] [suppress-threshold]] [maxsuppress-time]] To disable dampening, use the no dampening [[[[half-life] [reuse-threshold]] [suppress-threshold]] [max-suppress-time]] command. Parameters half-life Enter the number of seconds after which the penalty is decreased. The penalty decreases half after the half-life period expires.
PAGE 464
show interfaces dampening — displays interface dampening information. description Assign a descriptive text string to the interface. Syntax description desc_text To delete a description, use the no description command. Parameters desc_text Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Related Commands Enter a text string up to 240 characters long. To use special characters as a part of the description string, you must enclose the whole string in double quotes.
PAGE 465
Command Modes Command History Usage Information INTERFACE Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command applies to any physical interface with speed set to 1000/10000. NOTE: Starting with the Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.
PAGE 466
Usage Information The globally assigned 48-bit Multicast address 01-80-C2-00-00-01 is used to send and receive pause frames. To allow full duplex flow control, stations implementing the pause operation instruct the MAC to enable the reception of frames with a destination address equal to this multicast address. The pause: • Starts when either the packet pointer or the buffer threshold is met (whichever is met first). When the discard thresh is met, packets are dropped.
PAGE 467
on Related Commands on off off on on off on off on LocNegRx off off off off LocNegTx RemNegRx RemNegTx off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on off off off on off off off off off off on on on off off on on off off on on off on on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on show running-config — displays the flow configuration parameters (non-default values only). show interfaces — displays the negotiated flow control parameters.
PAGE 468
Usage Information You cannot delete a physical interface. By default, physical interfaces are disabled (shutdown) and are in Layer 3 mode. To place an interface in mode, ensure that the interface’s configuration does not contain an IP address and enter the Port Channel Commands command. The tunnel interface operates as an ECMP (equal cost multi path) only when the next hop to the tunnel destination is over a physical interface.
PAGE 469
interface ManagementEthernet Configure the Management port on the system. Syntax interface ManagementEthernet slot/port Parameters slot/port Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Enter the keyword ManagementEthernet, then the slot number (0 or 1) and port number zero (0). Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 470
interface loopback — configures a Loopback interface. interface port-channel — configures a port channel. interface vlan — configures a VLAN. ip unreachables — enables generation of internet control message protocol (ICMP) unreachable messages. interface range This command permits configuration of a range of interfaces to which subsequent commands are applied (bulk configuration). Using the interface range command, you can enter identical commands for a range of interface.
PAGE 471
• When the interface range prompt has multiple port ranges, the smaller port range is excluded from the prompt. • If overlapping port ranges are specified, the port range is extended to the smallest start port and the biggest end port.
PAGE 472
interface range macro (define) Defines a macro for an interface range and then saves the macro in the running configuration. Syntax define interface range macro name interface , interface , ... Parameters name Enter up to 16 characters for the macro name. interface, interface,... Enter the keywords interface range and one of the interfaces — slot/port, port-channel, or VLAN number. Select the range of interfaces for bulk configuration. You can enter up to six comma-separated ranges.
PAGE 473
interface range macro name Run the interface-range macro to automatically configure the pre-defined range of interfaces. Syntax Parameters interface range macro name name Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example (Single Range) Enter the name of an existing macro. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 474
Example Dell(conf)#int vlan 3 Dell(conf-if-vl-3)# Related Commands interface — configures a physical interface. interface port-channel — configures a port channel group. intf-type cr4 autoneg Set the interface type as CR4 with auto-negotiation enabled. Syntax intf-type cr4 autoneg If you configure intf-type cr4 autoneg, use the no intf-type cr4 autoneg command to set the interface type as cr4 with autonegotiation disabled.
PAGE 475
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. When you configure keepalive, the system sends a self-addressed packet out of the configured interface to verify that the far end of a WAN link is up.
PAGE 476
Example (Single Interface) Key Description b Change the counters displayed from Packets on the interface to Bytes. r Change the [delta] column from change in the number of packets/bytes in the last interval to rate per second. l Change the view to the next interface on the line card, or if in line card mode, the next line card in the chassis. a Change the view to the previous interface on the line card, or if in line card mode, the previous line card in the chassis.
PAGE 477
Defaults 1554 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If the packet includes a Layer 2 header, the difference between the link MTU and IP MTU (ip mtu command) must be enough bytes to include the Layer 2 header.
PAGE 478
negotiation auto Enable auto-negotiation on an interface. Syntax negotiation auto To disable auto-negotiation, use the no negotiation auto command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 479
Internet address is 1.1.1.1/24 MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 1000 Mbit, Mode full duplex, Master ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interfaces" counters 00:12:42 Queueing strategy: fifo Input Statistics: ... User Information Both sides of the link must have auto-negotiation enabled or disabled for the link to come up. The following details the possible speed and auto-negotiation combinations for a line between two 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces.
PAGE 480
Command Modes Command History Usage Information INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the interface command shown in the following example. This example sets a port as hybrid, makes the port a tagged member of VLAN 20, and an untagged member of VLAN 10, which becomes the native VLAN of the port.
PAGE 481
U T 20 10 Native VlanId: 20. Dell(conf)# Example (unconfigure the hybrid port) Dell(conf-if-vl-20)#interface vlan 10 Dell(conf-if-vl-10)#no untagged tengig 0/20 Dell(conf-if-vl-10)#interface vlan 20 Dell(conf-if-vl-20)#no tagged tengig 0/20 Dell(conf-if-vl-20)#interface tengig 0/20 Dell(conf-if-te-0/20)#no portmode hybrid Dell(conf-if-vl-20)# Related Commands show interfaces switchport — displays the configuration of switchport (Layer 2) interfaces on the switch.
PAGE 482
off Brings the interface down when an RFI error is detected. Defaults ON. Command Modes INTERFACE CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL switch. Usage Information By default, MXL module processes RFI errors transmitted by remote peers and brings down the interface when an RFI error is detected. Example Dell(conf-if-te-1/3)#remote-fault-signaling rx ? on Enable off Disable show config Display the interface configuration.
PAGE 483
interface GigabitEthernet 1/2 no ip address switchport no shutdown Dell(conf-if-range-gi-1/1-2)# show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show interfaces interface interface • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
PAGE 484
User Information The following table describes the show interfaces command shown in the 10G (TeraScale) Example below. Line Description TenGigabitEthernet 2/0... Interface type, slot/port, and administrative and line protocol status. Hardware is... Interface hardware information, assigned MAC address, and current address. Interface index... Displays the interface index number used by SNMP to identify the interface. Internet address... States whether an IP address is assigned to the interface.
PAGE 485
Line Description – discarded = number of packets discarded without any processing – collisions = number of packet collisions – wred=count both packets discarded in the MAC and in the hardware-based queues Rate information... Estimate of the input and output traffic rate over a designated interval (30 to 299 seconds). Traffic rate is displayed in bits, packets per second, and percent of line rate. Time since... Elapsed time since the last interface status change (hh:mm:ss format).
PAGE 486
94322888 packets, 6036664832 bytes 94322888 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 94322888 Broadcasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 180384 packets, 11926850 bytes, 0 underruns 172622 64-byte pkts, 7762 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 7762 Multicasts, 87726 Broadcasts, 84896 Unicasts 0 thro
PAGE 487
show interfaces configured Display any interface with a non-default configuration. Syntax Command Modes Command History show interfaces configured • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#show interfaces configured GigabitEthernet 13/18 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:05:f7:fc Current address is 00:01:e8:05:f7:fc Interface index is 474791997 Internet address is 1.1.1.
PAGE 488
• summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display the current summary of dampening data, including the number of interfaces configured and the number of interfaces suppressed, if any. detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display detailed interface dampening data. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 489
Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show interfaces description command shown in the Example below. Field Description Interface Displays the type of interface and associated slot and port number. OK? Indicates if the hardware is functioning properly.
PAGE 490
• Command History EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 491
• Defaults Command Modes Command History For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 492
Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show interfaces switchport command for the following example. Items Description Name Displays the interface’s type, slot, and port number. 802.1QTagged Displays whether if the VLAN tagged (“True”), untagged (“False”), or hybrid (“Hybrid”), which supports both untagged and tagged VLANs by port 13/0.
PAGE 493
show interfaces — displays information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface. show interfaces transceiver — displays the physical status and operational status of an installed transceiver. The output also displays the transceiver’s serial number. show interfaces transceiver Display the physical status and operational status of an installed transceiver. The output also displays the transceiver’s serial number.
PAGE 494
Interfaces Line Description TX Power Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. RX Power Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Temp High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Voltage High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Bias High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
PAGE 495
Line Description Rx LOS state This is the digital state of the Rx_LOS output pin. This is set to true if the operating status is down. Tx Fault state This is the digital state of the Tx Fault output pin. Rate Select state This is the digital state of the SFP rate_select input pin. RS state This is the reserved digital state of the pin AS(1) per SFF-8079 and RS(1) per SFF-8431. Tx Disable state If the admin status of the port is down then this flag is set to true.
PAGE 496
Example Line Description Tx Bias Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the present Tx bias current value displayed above. Tx Power Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx power value displayed above. Rx Power Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Rx power value displayed above. Dell#show interfaces gigabitethernet 1/0 transceiver SFP is present.
PAGE 497
SFP 1 Rx Power = 0.
PAGE 498
shutdown Disable an interface. Syntax shutdown To activate an interface, use the no shutdown command. Defaults The interface is disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The shutdown command marks a physical interface as unavailable for traffic. To discover if an interface is disabled, use the show ip interface brief command. Disabled interfaces are listed as down.
PAGE 499
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command is found on the 1000/10000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces. When you enable auto, the system performs an automatic discovery to determine the optics installed and configure the appropriate speed. When you configure a speed for the 1000/10000 interface, confirm the negotiation auto command setting. Both sides of the link must have auto-negotiation either enabled or disabled.
PAGE 500
The quad port must be in a default configuration before it can be split into 4x10G ports. The 40G port is lost in the config when the port is split, so be sure that the port is also removed from other L2/L3 feature configurations. The system must be reloaded after issuing the CLI for the change to take effect. Port Channel Commands A link aggregation group (LAG) is a group of links that appear to a MAC client as if they were a single link according to IEEE 802.3ad.
PAGE 501
You cannot add an interface to a Port Channel if the interface contains an IP address in its configuration. Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for Port Channels are: • All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value. • The Port Channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members.
PAGE 502
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Examle Dell(conf)#port-channel failover-group Dell(conf-po-failover-grp)#group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2 Dell(conf-po-failover-grp)# Related Commands port-channel failover-group — accesses PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP mode to configure a LAG failover group. show interfaces port-channel — displays information on configured Port Channel groups.
PAGE 503
Example Dell(conf)#int port-channel 2 Dell(conf-if-po-2)# Related Commands channel-member — adds a physical interface to the LAG. interface — configures a physical interface. interface vlan — configures a VLAN. shutdown — disables/enables the port channel. minimum-links Configure the minimum number of links in a LAG (Port Channel) that must be in “oper up” status for the LAG to be also in “oper up” status.
PAGE 504
Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This feature groups two LAGs to work in tandem as a supergroup. For example, if one LAG goes down, the other LAG is taken down automatically, providing an alternate path to reroute traffic, avoiding oversubscription on the other LAG. You can use both static and dynamic (LACP) LAGs to configure failover groups. For more information, refer to the Port Channel chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 505
Usage Information Example (EtherScale) The following describes the show interfaces port-channel command shown in the following example. Field Description Port-Channel 1... Displays the LAG’s status. In the Example, the status of the LAG’s LAG fatesharing group (“Failover-group”) is listed. Hardware is... Displays the interface’s hardware information and its assigned MAC address. Port-channel is part... Indicates whether the LAG is part of a LAG fate-sharing group (“Failover-group”).
PAGE 506
0 0 0 Output 0 0 0 0 0 User Information Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Statistics: packets, 0 bytes, 0 underruns 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions The following describes the show interfaces port-channel brief command shown in the following example.
PAGE 507
• Because TDR is an intrusive test on an interface that is not establishing a link, do not run TDR on an interface that is passing traffic. • When testing between two devices, do not run the test on both ends of the cable. tdr-cable-test Test the condition of copper cables on 100/1000 Base-T modules. Syntax Parameters tdr-cable-test interface interface Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 508
Status Definition OK Status: Terminated TDR test is complete, no fault is detected on the cable, and the test is terminated. Length: 92 (+/- 1) meters, Status: Shorted A short is detected on the cable. The location, in this Example is 92 meters. The short is accurate to plus or minus one meter. Length: 93 (+/- 1) meters, Status: Open An opening is detected on the cable. The location, in this Example is 93 meters. The open is accurate to plus or minus one meter.
PAGE 509
Example Dell#debug ip udp-helper UDP helper debugging is on 01:20:22: Pkt rcvd on Gi 5/0 with IP DA (0xffffffff) will be sent on Gi 5/1 Gi 5/2 Vlan 3 01:44:54: Pkt rcvd on Gi 7/0 is handed over for DHCP processing. Related Commands ip udp-broadcast-address — configures a UDP IP address for broadcast. ip udp-helper udp-port — enables the UDP broadcast feature on an interface. show ip udp-helper — displays the configured UDP helper(s) on all interfaces.
PAGE 510
NOTE: If you do not use this option, all UDP ports are considered by default. Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE (config-if) Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If you configure the ip helper-address command and ip udp-helper udp-port command, the behavior is that the UDP broadcast traffic with port numbers 67/68 is unicast relayed to the DHCP server per the ip helper-address configuration.
PAGE 511
Enhanced Validation of Interface Ranges This functionality is supported on the MXL platform. You can avoid specifying spaces between the range of interfaces, separated by commas, that you configure by using the interface range command. For example, if you enter a list of interface ranges, such as interface range fo 2/0-1,te 10/0,gi 3/0,fa 0/0, this configuration is considered valid. The comma-separated list is not required to be separated by spaces in between the ranges.
PAGE 512
23 IPv4 Routing The basic IPv4 commands are supported by Dell Networking Operating System (OS). arp To associate an IP address with a multicast MAC address in the switch when you configure multicast mode of the network load balancing (NLB), use the address resolution protocol (ARP). Syntax arp ip-address multicast-mac-address interface To remove an ARP address, use the no arp ip-address command. Parameters ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format.
PAGE 513
command in Global configuration mode. This setting causes the multicast MAC address to be mapped to the cluster IP address for NLB mode of operation of the switch. You cannot use Class D or Class E IP addresses or zero IP address (0.0.0.0) when creating a static ARP. Zero MAC addresses (00:00:00:00:00:00) are also invalid. Related Commands clear arp-cache — clears dynamic ARP entries from the ARP table. show arp — displays the ARP table. arp learn-enable Enable ARP learning using gratuitous ARP.
PAGE 514
Parameters minutes Defaults 240 minutes (4 hours) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the number of minutes. The range is from 0 to 35790. The default is 240 minutes. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show interfaces — displays the ARP timeout value for all available interfaces. clear arp-cache Clear the dynamic ARP entries from a specific interface or optionally delete (no-refresh) ARP entries from the content addressable memory (CAM).
PAGE 515
clear host Remove one or all dynamically learned host table entries. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History clear host name name Enter the name of the host to delete. Enter * to delete all host table entries. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip fib stack-unit Clear all forwarding information base (FIB) entries in the specified stack unit (use this command with caution, refer to Usage Information.
PAGE 516
Related Commands ip route — assigns an IP route to the switch. show ip route — views the routing table. show ip route summary — views a summary of the routing table. clear tcp statistics Clear TCP counters. Syntax clear tcp statistics Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug arp View information on ARP transactions. Syntax debug arp [interface] [count value] To stop debugging ARP transactions, use the no debug arp command.
PAGE 517
debug ip dhcp Enable debug information for dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) relay transactions and display the information on the console. Syntax debug ip dhcp To disable debug, use the no debug ip dhcp command. Defaults Debug disabled Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#debug ip dhcp 00:12:21 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REQUEST (Unicast) received at interface 113.3.3.
PAGE 518
debug ip icmp View information on the internal control message protocol (ICMP). Syntax debug ip icmp [interface] [count value] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip icmp command. Parameters interface count value Command Modes Command History Example • For the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. The slot range is from 0 to 1 and the port range is 0. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 519
Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example count value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count then the count value. The range is from 1 to 65534. The default is Infinity. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. The slot range is from 0 to 1 and the port range is 0. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 520
IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.3 (Ma 0/0), len 1500, sending fragment IP Fragment, Ident = 4741, fragment offset = 1480 IP: s=40.40.40.40 (local), d=224.0.0.5 (Gi 4/11), len 64, sending broad/ multicast proto=89 IP: s=40.40.40.40 (local), d=224.0.0.6 (Gi 4/11), len 28, sending broad/ multicast proto=2 IP: s=0.0.0.0, d=30.30.30.30, len 100, unroutable ICMP type=8, code=0 IP: s=0.0.0.0, d=30.30.30.
PAGE 521
secondary Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword secondary to designate the IP address as the secondary address. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You must be in INTERFACE mode before you add an IP address to an interface. Assign an IP address to an interface prior to entering ROUTER OSPF mode. ip directed-broadcast Enables the interface to receive directed broadcast packets.
PAGE 522
To enable dynamic resolution of hosts, use the following steps: • specify a domain name server with the ip name-server command • enable DNS with the ip domain-lookup command To view current bindings, use the show hosts command. To view a DNS-related configuration, use the show running-config resolve command. Related Commands ip domain-name — specifies a DNS server. ip domain-lookup To address resolution (that is, DNS), enable dynamic host-name.
PAGE 523
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You can only configure one domain name with the ip domain-name command. To configure more than one domain name, configure the ip domain-list command up to six times. To enable dynamic resolution of hosts, use the following steps: • specify a domain name server with the ip name-server command • enable DNS with the ip domain-lookup command To view current bindings, use the show hosts command.
PAGE 524
To re-enable the hop-count increment, use the no ip helper-address hop-count disable command. Defaults Enabled; the hops field in the DHCP message header is incremented by default. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command disables the incrementing of the hops field when boot requests are relayed to a DHCP server through the Dell Networking OS.
PAGE 525
NOTE: When you configure the capability to enable the loopback IP address to be sent for easy debugging and diagnosis (IP addresses of the devices for which the ICMP source interface is configured), the source IP address of the outgoing ICMP error message is modified, although the packets are not sent out using the configured interface.
PAGE 526
• For a Management Ethernet interface, enter the keyword managementethernet. NOTE: When you configure the capability to enable the loopback IP address to be sent for easy debugging and diagnosis (IP addresses of the devices for which the ICMP source interface is configured), the source IP address of the outgoing ICMP error message is modified, although the packets are not sent out using the configured interface.
PAGE 527
Parameters count Enter a number for the number of fragments allowed for re-assembly. The range is from 2 to 256. Defaults No limit is set on number of fragments allowed. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To avoid denial of service (DOS) attacks, keep the number of fragments allowed for re-assembly low. ip name-server Enter up to six IPv4 addresses of name servers.
PAGE 528
ip route Assign a static route to the switch. Syntax ip route {destination mask {ip-address | interface [ip-address] | [distance] | [permanent] | tag tag-value}} To delete a specific static route, use the no ip route destination mask command. To delete all routes matching a certain route, use the no ip route destination mask command. Parameters destination Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the destination device.
PAGE 529
Related Commands show ip route — views the switch routing table. ip source-route Enable the system to forward IP packets with source route information in the header. Syntax ip source-route To drop packets with source route information, use the no ip route-source command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip tcp initial-time Define the wait duration in seconds for the TCP connection to be established.
PAGE 530
EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. ip unreachables Enable the generation of internet control message protocol (ICMP) unreachable messages. Syntax ip unreachables To disable the generation of ICMP messages, use the no ip unreachables command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 531
show arp Display the ARP table. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show arp [interface interface | ip ip-address [mask] | macaddress macaddress [mac-address mask]] [static | dynamic][summary] interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For the Management interface, enter the keyword managementethernet then the slot/port information. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel then a number.
PAGE 532
Example Row Heading Description VLAN Displays the VLAN ID, if any, associated with the ARP entry. CPU Lists which CPU the entries are stored on. Dell>show arp Protocol Address Age(min) Hardware Address Interface VLAN CPU ----------------------------------------------------Internet 10.11.8.6 167 00:01:e9:45:00:03 Ma 0/0 CP Internet 10.11.68.14 124 00:01:e9:45:00:03 Ma 0/0 CP Internet 10.11.209.
PAGE 533
show arp retries Display the configured number of ARP retries. Syntax Command Modes Command History Related Commands show arp retries • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module arp retries — sets the number of ARP retries in case the system does not receive an ARP reply in response to an ARP request. show hosts View the host table and DNS configuration.
PAGE 534
Example Field Description TTL Displays the amount of time until the entry ages out of the cache. For dynamically learned entries only. Type Displays IP as the type of entry. Address Displays the IP addresses assigned to the host.
PAGE 535
• Command History Usage Information Example EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip cam command shown in the following example. Field Description Destination Displays the destination route of the index. EC Displays the number of equal cost multipaths (ECMP) available for the default route for non-Jumbo line cards. For Jumbo line cards, displays 0,1 when ECMP is more than eight. CG Displays 0.
PAGE 536
1.1.1.0 2.1.1.0 100.1.1. 100.1.1. 0.0.0.
PAGE 537
Example Dell#show ip fib stack-unit 0 Destination Gateway First-Hop Mac-Addr Port VId EC ----------------------------------------------------------------------10.10.10.10/32 Direct, Nu 0 0.0.0.0 00:00:00:00:00:00 BLK HOLE 0 0 Dell> Related Commands clear ip fib stack-unit — clear FIB entries on a specified stack-unit. show ip interface View IP-related information on all interfaces.
PAGE 538
Example Lines Description Inbound access... Displays the name of the configured incoming access list. If none is configured, the phrase “not set” is displayed. Proxy ARP... States whether proxy ARP is enabled on the interface. Split horizon... States whether split horizon for RIP is enabled on the interface. Poison Reverse... States whether poison for RIP is enabled on the interface. ICMP redirects... States if ICMP redirects are sent. ICMP unreachables...
PAGE 539
Parameters Command Modes Command History Example all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view all IP addresses assigned to all Management interfaces on the switch. connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to view only routes directly connected to the Management interface. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a table listing the number of active and non-active routes and their sources. static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to view non-active routes also.
PAGE 540
show ip route View information, including how they were learned, about the IP routes on the switch. Syntax show ip route [hostname | ip-address [mask] [longer-prefixes] | list prefix-list [process-id | all | connected | static | summary] Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information 540 IPv4 Routing ip-address (OPTIONAL) Specify a name of a device or the IP address of the device to view more detailed information about the route. mask (OPTIONAL) Specify the network mask of the route.
PAGE 541
Field Example Description • E2 = OSPF external type 2 • i = IS-IS • L1 = IS-IS level-1 • L2 = IS-IS level-2 • IA = IS-IS inter-area • * = candidate default • > = non-active route • + = summary routes Destination Identifies the route’s destination IP address Gateway Identifies whether the route is directly connected and on which interface the route is configured. Dist/Metric Identifies if the route has a specified distance or metric.
PAGE 542
show ip route list Display IP routes in an IP prefix list. Syntax show ip route list prefix-list Parameters Command Modes Command History Example prefix-list • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the name of a configured prefix list. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 543
Column Heading Description Example Route Source Identifies how the route is configured in the system. Active Routes Identifies the best route if a route is learned from two protocol sources. Non-active Routes Identifies the back-up routes when a route is learned by two different protocols. If the best route or active route goes down, the non-active route becomes the best route.
PAGE 544
Keyword Definition bad options... Unrecognized IP option on a received packet. Frags: IP fragments received. ... reassembled Number of IP fragments that were reassembled. ... timeouts Number of times a timer expired on a reassembled queue. ... too big Number of invalid IP fragments received. ... couldn’t fragment Number of packets that could not be fragmented and forwarded. ...encapsulation failed Counts packets which could not be forwarded due to ARP resolution failure.
PAGE 545
0 short packets, 0 bad length, 1883908 no port broadcasts, 0 socket full Sent: 329731 total, 1883908 forwarded broadcasts --More-- show tcp statistics View information on TCP traffic through the switch. Syntax show tcp statistics Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show tcp statistics cp command shown in the following example.
PAGE 546
Example Field Description 11603 data packets... Displays the number of data packets sent. 24 data packets retransmitted Displays the number of data packets resent. 355 ack.. Displays the number of acknowledgement packets sent and the number of packet delayed. 0 window probe... Displays the number of window probe and update packets sent. 7 Connections initiated... Displays the number of TCP connections initiated, accepted, and established. 14 Connections closed...
PAGE 547
24 Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) Internet protocol security (IPSec) is an end-to-end security scheme for securing IP communications by authenticating and encrypting all packets in a session. Use IPSec between hosts, gateways, or hosts and gateways. IPSec uses a series of protocol functions to achieve information security: • Authentication Headers (AH) — Connectionless integrity and origin authentication for IP packets.
PAGE 548
• esp-authentication esp-encryption Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Example Version 9.2(0.0) null — Causes an encryption policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the interface. Enter the keywords esp-authentication then the transform type of operation to apply to traffic. The transform type represents the encryption or authentication applied to traffic. • md5 — Use Message Digest 5 (MD5) authentication.
PAGE 549
Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command creates a crypto policy entry and enters the crypto policy configuration mode for configuring the flow parameters. Example Dell(conf)#crypto ipsec policy West 10 ipsec-manual Dell(conf-crypto-policy)# management crypto-policy Apply the crypto policy to management traffic.
PAGE 550
dest-port-num Enter the destination port number. The range is from 0 to 65535. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIG-CRYPTO-POLICY Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information UDP is not supported. Only TCP 23 telnet and 21 FTP are supported.
PAGE 551
• The key information entry is associated with the global method for enabling clear text or encrypted display in the running config. show crypto ipsec transform-set Display the transform set configuration. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Example show crypto ipsec transform-set name name Enter the name of the transform set. EXEC Version 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 552
Outound AH Key : [0]:: Outound ESP Auth Key : [0]:: Outound ESP Encry Key : [0]:: Match sequence Num Protocol type IP or IPv6 Source address Source mask Source port Destination address Destination mask Destination port source-interface name source-interface num : : : : : : : : : : : 2 tcp IP 1.1.1.1 /32 0 1.1.1.2 /32 23 Dell(conf-crypto-policy)# transform-set Specify the transform set the crypto policy uses.
PAGE 553
25 IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) IPv6 ACLs and IPv6 Route Map commands are supported on Dell Networking MXL switch. NOTE: For IPv4 ACL commands, refer to the Access Control Lists (ACL) chapter. Important Points to Remember • Certain platforms require manual CAM usage space allotment. For more information, refer to the cam-acl (Configuration) command. • Egress IPv6 ACL and IPv6 ACL on the Loopback interface is not supported. • Reference to an empty ACL permits any traffic.
PAGE 554
l2acl 1-10 ipv4acl 1-10 ipv6acl 0-10 ipv4qos 1-10 l2qos 1-10 Command Modes Command History Usage Information Allocate space to support IPv6 ACLs. Enter all of the profiles and a range. Enter the CAM profile name then the amount to be allotted. The total space allocated must equal 13. The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2. CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 555
Ranges for the CAM profiles are from 1 to 10, except for the ipv6acl profile which is from 0 to 10. The ipv6acl allocation must be a factor of 2 (2, 4, 6, 8, 10).
PAGE 556
ipv6 control-plane egress-filter Enable egress Layer 3 ACL lookup for IPv6 CPU traffic. Syntax ipv6 control-plane egress-filter Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. permit To configure a filter that matches the filter criteria, select an IPv6 protocol number, ICMP, IPv6, TCP, or UDP.
PAGE 557
monitor Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ACCESS-LIST Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Version 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 558
interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to monitor traffic on the monitoring interface specified in the flow-based monitoring session along with the filter operation. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly.
PAGE 559
Example show cam-acl (non default) Dell(conf)#cam-acl l2acl 2 ipv4acl 4 ipv6acl 4 ipv4qos 2 l2qos 1 l2pt 0 ipmacacl 0 vman-qos 0 ecfmacl 0 Dell#show cam-acl -- Chassis Cam ACL -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 4 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : F3940 -- stack-unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl
PAGE 560
Example Dell#show cam-acl-egress -- Chassis Egress Cam ACL -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 1 Ipv4Acl : 1 Ipv6Acl : 2 -- stack-unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) L2Acl : 1 Ipv4Acl : 1 Ipv6Acl : 2 Related Commands 560 cam-acl — configures CAM profiles to support IPv6 ACLs.
PAGE 561
26 IPv6 Basics This chapter describes IPv6 basic commands for the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ipv6 fib Clear (refresh) all forwarding information base (FIB) entries on a linecard or stack unit. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History clear ipv6 fib linecard slot | stack-unit unit-number slot Enter the slot number to clear the FIB for a linecard. unit-number Enter the stack member number. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 562
clear ipv6 mld_host Clear the IPv6 MLD host counters and reset the elapsed time. Syntax clear ipv6 mld_host Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 address autoconfig Configure IPv6 address auto-configuration for the management interface. Syntax ipv6 address autoconfig To disable the address autoconfig operation on the management interface, use the no ipv6 address autoconfig command.
PAGE 563
Parameters ipv6-address prefixlength Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. • If two addresses are configured, delete an existing address before configuring a new address.
PAGE 564
Usage Information This command allows you to create an EUI64 address based on the specified prefix and MAC address only. Prefixes may be configured on the interface using the ipv6 nd prefix command without creating an EUI64 address.
PAGE 565
ipv6 host Assign a name and IPv6 address the host-to-IPv6 address mapping table uses. Syntax ipv6 host name ipv6-address To remove an IP host, use the no ipv6 host name {ipv6–address}. Parameters name Enter a text string to associate with one IP address. ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) to be mapped to the name. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 566
Parameters number of attempts Enter the number of attempts to be made to detect a duplicate address. The range is from 0 to 15. Setting the value to 0 disables DAD on the interface. Default 3 attempts Command Modes INTERFACE (management interface only) Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 nd dns-server Configures Recursive DNS Server (RDNSS) addresses to be distributed via IPv6 router advertisements to an IPv6 device.
PAGE 567
ipv6 nd prefix Specify which IPv6 prefixes are included in Neighbor Advertisements. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information ipv6 nd prefix {ipv6-prefix | prefix-length | default} [no-advertise] | [no-autoconfig] [no-rtr-address] [off-link] [lifetime {valid | infinite} {preferred | infinite}] ipv6-prefix Enter an IPv6 prefix. prefix-length Enter the prefix then the prefix length. The length range is from 0 to 128.
PAGE 568
Parameters ipv6-address prefixlength Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from zero (0) to 16383. • For the null interface, enter the keyword null then zero (0).
PAGE 569
Example Dell(conf)#ipv6 route X:X:X:X::X Dell(conf)#ipv6 route /nn Dell(conf)#ipv6 route X:X:X:X::X gigabitethernet loopback null port-channel tenGigabitethernet fortyGigE tunnel vlan Dell(conf)#ipv6 route <1-255> permanent tag ? IPv6 prefix x:x::y 44::0 ? /nn Mask in slash format 44::0 /64 ? Forwarding router's address Gigabit Ethernet interface Loopback interface Null interface Port-Channel interface TenGigabit Ethernet interface FortyGigabit Ethernet interface Tunnel interface Vlan interface 44::0 /64
PAGE 570
show ipv6 cam stack-unit Displays the IPv6 CAM entries for the specified stack-unit. Syntax show ipv6 cam stack-unit unit-number port-set {0-1} [summary | index | ipv6 address] Parameters unit-number Enter the stack unit’s ID number. The range is from 0 to 11. port-set Enter the keyword Port Set. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display a table listing network prefixes and the total number prefixes which can be entered into the IPv6 CAM.
PAGE 571
show ipv6 fib stack-unit View all FIB entries. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 fib stack-unit unit-number [summary | ipv6-address] slot-number Enter the number of the stack unit. The range is from 0 to 11. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of entries in IPv6 cam. ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x/n format to display networks that have more specific prefixes. The range is from /0 to /128.
PAGE 572
Defaults • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword Loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For the Null interface, enter the keyword null then zero (0). • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For stacking, enter the keywords stack-unit then the stack-unit ID.
PAGE 573
ND reachable time is 39610 milliseconds ND base reachable time is 30000 milliseconds ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds ND router advertisements are sent every 198 to 600 seconds ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds ND advertised hop limit is 64 IPv6 hop limit for originated packets is 64 Dell# Example Dell#show ipv6 int man 0/0 (Managementethern ManagementEthernet 0/0 is up, line protocol is up IPV6 is enabled et) Link Local address:
PAGE 574
IPv6 hop limit for originated packets is 64 Dell# show ipv6 mld_host Display the IPv6 MLD host counters. Syntax show ipv6 mld_host Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ipv6 mld-host command shown in the following example. Field Description Valid MLD Packets The total number of packets received and sent from the last time the elapsed time was cleared.
PAGE 575
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information hostname (OPTIONAL) View information for this IPv6 routes with Host Name. all (OPTIONAL) View information for all IPv6 routes. bgp (OPTIONAL) View information for all IPv6 BGP routes. connected (OPTIONAL) View only the directly connected IPv6 routes. isis (OPTIONAL) View information for all IPv6 IS-IS routes. list (OPTIONAL) View the IPv6 prefix list.
PAGE 576
Field Description • Example + = summary routes Destination Identifies the route’s destination IPv6 address. Gateway Identifies whether the route is directly connected and on which interface the route is configured. Dist/Metric Identifies if the route has a specified distance or metric. Last Change Identifies when the route was last changed or configured.
PAGE 577
Usage Information When you configure trust IPv6 diffserv, matched bytes/packets counters are not incremented in the show qos statistics command. Trust diffserv (IPv4) can co-exist with trust ipv6-diffserv in an Input Policy Map.
PAGE 578
27 IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP) IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP) is supported on Dell Networking platforms. This chapter includes the following sections: • IPv6 BGP Commands • IPv6 MBGP Commands IPv6 BGP Commands BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing and the aggregation of routes and AS paths.
PAGE 579
aggregate-address Summarize a range of prefixes to minimize the number of entries in the routing table. Syntax Parameters aggregate-address ipv6-address prefix-mength [advertise-map map-name] [asset] [attribute-map map-name] [summary-only] [suppress-map map-name] ipv6-address prefixlength Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the / x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
PAGE 580
bgp always-compare-med Allows you to enable comparison of the MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attributes in the paths from different external ASs. Syntax bgp always-compare-med To disable comparison of MED, use the no bgp always-compare-med command. Defaults Disabled (that is, the software only compares MEDs from neighbors within the same AS). Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 581
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The software compares the MEDs only if the path contains no external autonomous system numbers. If you enable this command, use the capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size * command to recompute the best path. bgp bestpath med missing-as-best During path selection, indicate a preference to paths with missing MED (MULTI_EXIT_DISC) over those paths with an advertised MED attribute.
PAGE 582
bgp cluster-id Assign a cluster ID to a BGP cluster with more than one route reflector. Syntax bgp cluster-id {ip-address | number} To delete a cluster ID, use the no bgp cluster-id {ip-address | number} command. Parameters ip-address Enter an IP address as the route reflector cluster ID. number Enter a route reflector cluster ID as a number from 1 to 4294967295. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 583
Usage Information The autonomous systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors. Each autonomous system is fully meshed and contains a few connections to other autonomous systems. The next hop, MED, and local preference information is preserved throughout the confederation. The system accepts confederation EBGP peers without a LOCAL_PREF attribute. The software sends AS_CONFED_SET and accepts AS_CONFED_SET and AS_CONF_SEQ.
PAGE 584
suppress (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the suppress value, which is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is greater than the suppress value, the flapping route is no longer advertised (that is, it is suppressed). The range is from 1 to 20000. The default is 2000. max-suppress-time (OPTIONAL) Enter the maximum number of minutes a route can be suppressed. The default is four times the half-life value. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 60 minutes.
PAGE 585
Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This is enabled by default; that is, for all updates received from EBGP peers, BGP ensures that the first AS of the first AS segment is always the AS of the peer. If not, the update is dropped and a counter is incremented. To view the failed enforce-first-as check counter, use the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors command.
PAGE 586
When creating Confederations, all the routers in the Confederation must be 4- or 2-byte identified routers. You cannot mix them. Where the 2-Byte format is from 1 to 65535, the 4-Byte format is from 1 to 4294967295. Both formats are accepted, and the advertisements reflect the entered format. For more information about using the 2- or 4-Byte format, refer to the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 587
Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The bgp log-neighbor-changes command appears in the show config command output. Related Commands show config — views the current configuration. bgp non-deterministic-med Compare MEDs of paths from different autonomous systems (ASs). Syntax bgp non-deterministic-med To return to the default, use the no bgp non-deterministic-med command.
PAGE 588
Usage Information This command is a knob to disable BGP next-hop resolution using BGP learned routes. During the next-hop resolution, only the first route that the next-hop resolves through is verified for the route’s protocol source and is checked if the route is learned from BGP or not. For this command to take effect and to keep the BGP database consistent, you need the clear ip bgp command. Execute the clear ip bgp command right after executing this command.
PAGE 589
Command Modes Command History Usage Information ROUTER BGP Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Peering sessions are reset when you change the router ID of a BGP router. bgp soft-reconfig-backup Use this command only when route-refresh is not negotiated between peers to avoid having a peer re-send BGP updates. Syntax bgp soft-reconfig-backup To return to the default setting, use the no bgp soft-reconfig-backup command.
PAGE 590
Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size — enables route reflection between the route reflector and the clients. show capture bgp-pdu neighbor — configures a route reflector and clients. capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size Set the size of the BGP packet capture buffer. This buffer size pertains to both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
PAGE 591
Command Modes Command History in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to activate only inbound policies. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to activate only outbound policies. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip bgp as-number Reset BGP sessions. The soft parameter (BGP Soft Reconfiguration) clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection.
PAGE 592
clear ip bgp ipv6-address Reset BGP sessions specific to an IPv6 address. The soft parameter (BGP Soft Reconfiguration) clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection. Syntax clear ip bgp ipv6-address [flap-statistics | ipv4 {multicast {flapstatistics | soft {in | out}} | unicast {flap-statistics | soft {in | out}} | ipv6 unicast {flap-statistics | soft {in | out}| soft [in | out] Parameters ipv6-address Enter an IPv6 address to reset neighbors belonging to that IP.
PAGE 593
clear ip bgp ipv6 dampening Clear information on route dampening and return suppressed route to active state. Syntax Parameters clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening [ipv6-address] ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. Command Modes Command History Usage Information EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 594
Usage Information If you enter the clear ip bgp ipv6 flap-statistics command without parameters, all the statistics clear. Related Commands show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics — views BGP flap statistics. clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft Clear and reapply policies for IPv6 unicast routes without resetting the TCP connection; that is, perform BGP soft reconfiguration.
PAGE 595
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. Command Modes Command History Usage Information peer-group peergroup-name Enter the keywords peer-group then the name of the peer group. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only information on inbound BGP routes. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only information on outbound BGP routes. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 596
Command Modes Command History Usage Information EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Entering a no debug ip bgp command removes all configured debug commands for BGP. debug ip bgp ipv6 dampening View information on dampened (non-active) IPv6 routes. Syntax debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening command.
PAGE 597
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command turns on BGP soft-reconfiguration inbound debugging for IPv6 unicast routes. If no neighbor is specified, debug is turned on for all neighbors. Related Commands show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampened-paths — views BGP dampened routes. debug ip bgp keepalives Allows you to view information about BGP keepalive messages.
PAGE 598
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. Command Modes Command History Usage Information peer-group peergroup-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords peer-group then the name of the peer group. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view BGP notifications received from neighbors. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view BGP notifications sent to neighbors. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 599
default-metric Allows you to change the metrics of redistributed routes to locally originated routes. Use this command with the redistribute command. Syntax default-metric number To return to the default setting, use the no default-metric command. Parameters number Defaults 0 Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter a number as the metric to be assigned to routes from other protocols. The range is from 1 to 4294967295. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 600
distance bgp Configure three administrative distances for routes. Syntax distance bgp external-distance internal-distance local-distance To return to default values, use the no distance bgp command. Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History external-distance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from a neighbor external to the AS. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 20. internal-distance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from a router within the AS.
PAGE 601
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If you enable this command, use the capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size command to recompute the best path. neighbor activate This command allows the specified neighbor/peer group to be enabled for the current AFI/SAFI. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} activate To disable, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} activate command.
PAGE 602
seconds Defaults Command Modes Command History Enter a number as the time interval, in seconds, between BGP advertisements. The range is from 0 to 600 seconds. The default is 5 seconds for internal BGP peers and 30 seconds for external BGP peers. • seconds = 5 seconds (internal peers) • seconds = 30 seconds (external peers) ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor allowas-in Set the number of times an AS number can occur in the AS path.
PAGE 603
Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the default route of all routers in that peer group. route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of a configured route map. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 604
To delete a neighbor distribution list, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group. prefix-list-name Enter the name of an established prefix list. If the prefix list is not configured, the default is permit (to allow all routes).
PAGE 605
neighbor fall-over Enable or disable fast fall-over for BGP neighbors. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} fall-over To disable, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} fall-over command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the name of the peer group.
PAGE 606
neighbor maximum-prefix Control the number of network prefixes received. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum [threshold] [warning-only] To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum [threshold] [warning-only] command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
PAGE 607
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The TCP session is authentication and prevents the data from being compromised. neighbor next-hop-self Allows you to configure the router as the next hop for a BGP neighbor. (This command is used for IBGP).
PAGE 608
Command Modes Command History Usage Information ROUTER BGP Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You can assign up to 64 peers to one peer group. When you add a peer to a peer group, it inherits all the peer group’s configured parameters.
PAGE 609
neighbor remote-as — assigns a indirectly connected AS to a neighbor or peer group. neighbor shutdown — disables a peer or peer group. neighbor peer-group passive Enable passive peering on a BGP peer group; that is, the peer group does not send an OPEN message, but does respond to one. Syntax neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive To delete a passive peer-group, use the no neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive command. Parameters peer-group-name Defaults Not configured.
PAGE 610
Usage Information If the number parameter is the same as the AS number used in the router bgp command, the remote AS entry in the neighbor is considered an internal BGP peer entry. This command creates a peer and the newly created peer is disabled (shutdown). Related Commands router bgp — enters the ROUTER BGP mode and configure routes in an AS. neighbor remove-private-as Remove private AS numbers from the AS-PATH of outgoing updates.
PAGE 611
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group. map-name Enter the name of an established route map. If the Route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). in Enter the keyword in to filter inbound routes. out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound routes. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 612
When all clients of a route reflector are disabled, the neighbor is no longer a route reflector. neighbor send-community Send a COMMUNITY attribute to a BGP neighbor or peer group. A COMMUNITY attribute indicates that all routes with that attribute belong to the same community grouping. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} send-community To disable sending a COMMUNITY attribute, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peergroup-name} send-community command.
PAGE 613
The neighbor shutdown command terminates all BGP sessions on the BGP neighbor or BGP peer group. Use this command with caution as it terminates the specified BGP sessions. When a neighbor or peer group is shutdown, use the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary command to confirm its status. Related Commands show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary — displays the current BGP configuration. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors — displays IPv6 routing information exchanged by BGP neighbors.
PAGE 614
mask Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter a prefix mask in / prefix-length format (/x). Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor timers Set keepalive and hold time timers for a BGP neighbor or a peer group. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} timers keepalive holdtime To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} timers command.
PAGE 615
neighbor update-source Enable the software to use Loopback interfaces for TCP connections for BGP sessions. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} update-source loopback interface To use the closest interface, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} update-source loopback interface command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
PAGE 616
Usage Information In the system best path selection process, the path with the highest weight value is preferred. NOTE: To apply the weight to the connection and recompute the best path, reset the neighbor connection (the capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size * command). network Specify the networks for the BGP process and enter them in the BGP routing table. Syntax network ipv6-address prefix-length [route-map map-name] To remove a network, use the no network ip-address mask [route-map map-name] command.
PAGE 617
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Though the system does not generate a route due to backdoor config, there is an option for injecting/ sourcing a local route in presence of network backdoor config on a learned route. redistribute Redistribute routes into BGP.
PAGE 618
To stop redistribution of IS-IS routes, use the no redistribute isis command. Parameters level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] (OPTIONAL) Enter the type (level) of routes to redistribute. metric (OPTIONAL) Assign metric to an interface for use with IPv6 information. metric-type (OPTIONAL) The external link type associated with the default route advertised into a routing domain.
PAGE 619
Usage Information When you enter the redistribute ospf process-id command without any other parameters, the system redistributes all OSPF internal routes, external type 1 routes, and external type 2 routes. router bgp Enter ROUTER BGP mode to configure and enable BGP. Syntax router bgp as-number To disable BGP, use the no router bgp as-number command. Parameters as-number Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the AS number.
PAGE 620
Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 621
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast cluster-list View BGP neighbors in a specific cluster. Syntax Paramters Command Modes Command History show ip bgp ipv6 unicast cluster-list [cluster-id] cluster-id • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) (OPTIONAL) Enter the cluster id in dotted decimal format. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community View information on all routes with community attributes or view specific BGP community groups.
PAGE 622
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community-list View routes that are affected by a specific community list. Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community-list community-list-name [exact-match] Paramters Command Modes Command History community-listname Enter the name of a configured IP community list. exact-match (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords exact-match to display only for an exact match of the communities. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 623
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast extcommunity-list View information on all routes with Extended Community attributes. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show ip bgp ipv6 unicast extcommunity-list [list name] list name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the extended community list name you wish to view. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary command.
PAGE 624
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. filter-list as-pathname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords filter-list then the name of a configured AS-PATH ACL. regexp regularexpression Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following characters to match: • . = (period) any single character (including a white space). • * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (0 or more sequences). • + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (1 or more sequences).
PAGE 625
routes | received-routes [network [network-mask]] | denied-routes [network [network-mask]]] Parameters ipv6 unicast Enter the keywords ipv6 unicast to view information only related to IPv6 unicast routes. ipv4-neighbor-addr | ipv6-neighboraddr (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor to view only BGP route information exchanged with that neighbor. advertised-routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords advertised-routes to view only the routes the neighbor sent.
PAGE 626
Example Lines Beginning With Description Last read This line displays the following information: • last read is the time (hours:minutes:seconds) the router reads a message from its neighbor • hold time is the number of seconds configured between messages from its neighbor • keepalive interval is the number of seconds between keepalive messages to help ensure that the TCP session is still alive Received messages This line displays the number of BGP messages received, the number of notifications (e
PAGE 627
Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv6 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv6 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) For address family: IPv6 Unicast BGP table version 12, neighbor version 12 2 accepted prefixes consume 32 bytes Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), withdrawn 0 by peer Prefixes advertised 0, rejected 0, withdrawn 0 from peer Connections established 3; dropped 2 Last reset 00:00:
PAGE 628
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group Allows you to view information on the BGP peers in a peer group. Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group [peer-group-name [summary]] Parameters Command Modes Command History Example peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a peer group to view information about that peer group only. detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view peer-group-specific information for the IPv6 address family.
PAGE 629
Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell# show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 55.55.55.
PAGE 630
show ip bgp paths View all the BGP path attributes in the BGP database. Syntax show ip bgp paths [regexp regular-expression] Parameters regexp regularexpression Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following characters to match: • . = (period) any single character (including a white space). • * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (0 or more sequences). • + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (1 or more sequences).
PAGE 631
• Command History EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp paths extcommunity View all unique extended community information in the BGP database. Syntax Command Modes Command History show ip bgp paths extcommunity • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp regexp Allows you to view the subset of BGP routing table matching the regular expressions specified.
PAGE 632
timers bgp Allows you to adjust the BGP network timers for all neighbors. Syntax timers bgp keepalive holdtimer To return to the default values, use the no timers bgp command. Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Related Commands keepalive Enter the time interval (in seconds) between which the system sends keepalive messages. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 60 seconds.
PAGE 633
Usage Information After this command is executed, all subsequent commands apply to this address family. You can exit from this AFI/SAFI to the IPv6 Unicast (the default) family by entering the exit command and returning to the Router BGP context. aggregate-address Summarize a range of prefixes to minimize the number of entries in the routing table.
PAGE 634
The summary-only parameter suppresses all advertisements. If you want to suppress advertisements to only specific neighbors, use the neighbor distribute-list command. bgp dampening Enable MBGP route dampening. Syntax bgp dampening [half-life time] [route-map map-name] To disable route dampening, use the no bgp dampening [half-life time] [route-map mapname] command. Parameters half-life time (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes after which the Penalty is decreased.
PAGE 635
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening Clear information on route dampening. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History clear ip bgp dampening ipv6 unicast [network network-mask] network (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 network address in x:x:x:x::x format. network-mask If you enter the network address, next enter the network mask, from 0 to 128. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 636
debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening View information on routes being dampened. Syntax debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening command. Parameters Command Modes Command History dampening Enter the keyword dampening to clear route flap dampening information. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the S4820T. debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group updates View information about BGP peer-group updates.
PAGE 637
updates Enter the keyword updates to view BGP update information. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only BGP updates received from neighbors. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only BGP updates sent to neighbors. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. distance bgp Define an administrative distance for routes.
PAGE 638
neighbor activate Allows you to enable a specified neighbor/peer group for the current address and subsequent address family identifier (AFI/SAFI). Syntax neighbor [ipv6-address | peer-group-name] activate To disable, use the no neighbor [ipv6-address | peer-group-name] activate command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Identify a peer group by name.
PAGE 639
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor default-originate Inject the default route to a BGP peer or neighbor. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} default-originate [route-map mapname] To remove a default route, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} default-originate command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
PAGE 640
out Enter the keyword out to distribute only outbound traffic. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor filter-list — assigns a AS-PATH list to a neighbor or peer group. neighbor route-map — assigns a route map to a neighbor or peer group. neighbor filter-list Configure a BGP filter based on the AS-PATH attribute.
PAGE 641
Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group. maximum Enter a number as the maximum number of prefixes allowed for this BGP router. The range is from 1 to 4294967295. threshold (OPTIONAL) Enter a number to be used as a percentage of the maximum value. When the number of prefixes reaches this percentage of the maximum value, the software sends a message.
PAGE 642
neighbor remove-private-as Remove private AS numbers from the AS-PATH of outgoing updates. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} remove-private-as To return to the default, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} removeprivate-as command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to remove the private AS numbers.
PAGE 643
If you identify a peer group by name, the peers in that peer group inherit the characteristics in the Route map used in this command. If you identify a peer by IP address, the Route map overwrites either the inbound or outbound policies on that peer. neighbor route-reflector-client Configure a neighbor as a member of a route reflector cluster.
PAGE 644
If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The software resolves the network address configured by the network command with the routes in the main routing table to ensure that the networks are reachable using non-BGP routes and non-default routes.
PAGE 645
Paramters Command Modes Command History Usage Information network (OPTIONAL) Enter the network address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP network to view information only on that network. network-mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords network mask (in slash prefix format) of the BGP network address. longer-prefixes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords longer-prefixes to view all routes with a common prefix. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 646
Command Modes Command History Usage Information no-advertise Enter the keywords no-advertise to view all routes containing the well-known community attribute of NO_ADVERTISE. All routes with the NO_ADVERTISE (0xFFFFFF02) community attribute must not be advertised to other BGP peers. no-export Enter the keywords no-export to view all routes containing the well-known community attribute of NO_EXPORT.
PAGE 647
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast detail Display detailed BGP information. Syntax Command Modes Command History Example show ip bgp ipv6 unicast detail • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 648
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics View flap statistics on BGP routes. Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics [ipv6-address prefix-length] [filter-list as-path-name] [regexp regular-expression] Parameters ipv6-address prefixlength Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
PAGE 649
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast inconsistent-as View routes with inconsistent originating autonomous system (AS) numbers; that is, prefixes that are announced from the same neighbor AS but with a different AS-Path. Syntax Command Modes Command History show ip bgp ipv6 unicast inconsistent-as • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors Allows you to view the information exchanged by BGP neighbors.
PAGE 650
Lines Beginning With Description or internal one. If they are located in the same AS, then the link is internal; otherwise, the link is external. Example BGP version Displays the BGP version (always version 4) and the remote router ID. BGP state Displays the neighbor’s BGP state and the amount of time in hours:minutes:seconds it has been in that state.
PAGE 651
6 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Sent 48 messages, 0 in queue 3 opens, 2 notifications, 0 updates 43 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds Minimum time before advertisements start is 0 seconds Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv6 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv6 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) For address family: IPv6 Unica
PAGE 652
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group Allows you to view information on the BGP peers in a peer group. Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group [peer-group-name [summary]] Parameters Command Modes Command History Related Commands peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a peer group to view information about that peer group only. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view status information of the peers in that peer group.
PAGE 653
Field Description BGP community entries Displays the number of BGP COMMUNITY attributes processed and the amount of memory used to process them. The show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community command provides more details on the COMMUNITY attributes. Dampening enabled Displayed only when dampening is enabled. Displays the number of paths designated as history, dampened, or penalized. Neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address. AS Displays the AS number of the neighbor.
PAGE 654
28 iSCSI Optimization Internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization enables quality-of-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI storage traffic. To configure and verify the iSCSI optimization feature, use the following Dell Networking Operating System (OS) commands. advertise dcbx-app-tlv Configure DCBX to send iSCSI TLV advertisements. Syntax advertise dcbx-app-tlv iscsi To disable DCBX iSCSI TLV advertisements, use the no advertise dcbx-app-tlv iscsi command. Defaults Disabled.
PAGE 655
Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. iscsi cos Set the QoS policy that is applied to the iSCSI flows. Syntax iscsi cos {enable | disable | dot1p vlan-priority-value [remark] | dscp dscp-value [remark]} To disable the QoS policy, use the no iscsi cos dscp command.
PAGE 656
Parameters enable Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Enter the keyword enable to enable the iSCSI optimization feature. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. When you enable the iSCSI feature using the iscsi enable command, flow control settings are set to rx on tx off on all interfaces.
PAGE 657
iscsi target port Configure the iSCSI target ports and optionally, the IP addresses on which iSCSI communication is monitored. Syntax iscsi target port [tcp-port-2...tcp-port-16]ip-address [ip-address] To remove the configured iSCSI target ports or IP addresses, use the no iscsi target port command. Parameters tcpport-2...tcpport- 16 Enter the tcp-port number of the iSCSI target ports. The tcp-port-n is the TCP port number or a list of TCP port numbers on which the iSCSI target listens to requests.
PAGE 658
3260 860 Related Commands • show iscsi sessions — displays information about active iSCSI sessions on the switch. • show iscsi sessions detailed — displays detailed information about active iSCSI sessions on the switch. • show run iscsi — shows run iscsi. show iscsi session Display information about active iSCSI sessions on the switch. Syntax show iscsi session Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 659
• Command History Example Related Commands EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell# show isci session detailed Session 0 : --------------------------------------------------Target:iqn.2010-11.com.ixia:ixload:iscsi-TG1 Initiator:iqn.2010-11.com.ixia.ixload:initiator-iscsi-2c Up Time:00:00:01:28(DD:HH:MM:SS) Time for aging out:00:00:09:34(DD:HH:MM:SS) ISID:806978696102 Initiator Initiator Target Target Connection IP Address TCP Port IP Address TCPPort ID 10.
PAGE 660
29 Intermediate System to Intermediate System (ISIS) The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol for IPv4 and IPv6 is supported on the on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. IS-IS is an interior gateway protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. IS-IS facilitates the communication between open systems, supporting routers passing both IP and OSI traffic. A router is considered an intermediate system. Networks are partitioned into manageable routing domains, called areas.
PAGE 661
To return to the default, use the no advertise {level1-into-level2 | level2-intolevel1}[prefix-list-name] command. Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information level1-into-level2 Enter the keywords level1-into-level2 to advertise Level 1 routes into Level 2 LSPs. This setting is the default. level2-into-level1 Enter the keywords level2-into-level1 to advertise Level 2 inter-area routes into Level 1 LSPs. This behavior is described in RFC 2966.
PAGE 662
The configured password injects into Level 1 LSPs, CSNPs, and PSNPs. Related Commands • domain-password — allows you to set the authentication password for a routing domain. • isis password — allows you to configure an authentication password for an interface. clear config Clear IS-IS configurations that display under the router isis heading of the show running-config command output. Syntax clear config Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 663
Parameters name Enter an alphanumeric string to identify the name-to-NSAP mapping. nsap Enter a specific NSAP address that is associated with the name parameter. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To configure a shortcut name that you can use instead of entering a long string of numbers associated with an NSAP address, use this command.
PAGE 664
• Command Modes Command History For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug isis local-updates To debug IS-IS local update packets, enable debugging on a specific interface and provides diagnostic information. Syntax debug isis local-updates [interface] To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis local-updates [interface] command.
PAGE 665
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug isis spf-triggers Enable debugging on the events that triggered IS-IS shortest path first (SPF) events for debugging purposes. Syntax debug isis spf-triggers To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis spf-triggers command. Command Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 666
Parameters Defaults always (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword always to have the default route always advertised. metric metric (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number to assign to the route. The range is from 0 to 16777215. route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) A default route the routing process generates if the route map is satisfied. Not configured. Command Modes Command History Usage Information • ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) • CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Version 9.
PAGE 667
distance Define the administrative distance for learned routes. Syntax distance weight [ip-address mask [prefix-list]] To return to the default values, use the no distance weight command. Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information weight The administrative distance value indicates the reliability of a routing information source. The range is from 1 to 255. (A higher relative value indicates lower reliability. Routes with smaller values are given preference.
PAGE 668
• Command History Related Commands CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. • distribute-list out — suppresses networks from being advertised in updates. • redistribute — redistributes routes from one routing domain to another routing domain. distribute-list out Suppress network prefixes from being advertised in outbound updates.
PAGE 669
distribute-list redistributed-override Suppress flapping of routes when the same route is redistributed into IS-IS from multiple routers in the network. Syntax distribute-list redistributed-override in To return to the default, use the no distribute-list redistributed-override in command. Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information none • ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) • CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 670
graceful-restart ietf Enable graceful restart on an IS-IS router. Syntax graceful-restart ietf To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart ietf command. Parameters ietf Enter ietf to enable graceful restart on the IS-IS router. Defaults Graceful restart disabled. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Every graceful restart enabled router’s HELLO PDUs includes a restart TLV.
PAGE 671
To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart t1 command. Parameters interval Enter the keyword interval to set the wait time. The range is from 5 to 120 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. retry-times Enter the keywords retry-times to set the number of times the request interval is extended until a CSNP is received from the helping router. The range is from 1 to 10 attempts. The default is 1. Defaults Refer to Parameters. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 672
manual Defaults manual, 30 seconds Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the keyword manual to specify a time value that the restarting router uses. The range is from 50 to 120 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The running router sets the remaining time value to the current adjacency hold time. You can override this setting by implementing this command.
PAGE 673
To return to the default, use the no hello padding [multi-point | point-to-point] command. Parameters multi-point (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords multi-point to pad only LAN hello PDUs. point-to-point (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords point-to-point to pad only point-to-point PDUs. Defaults Both LAN and point-to-point hello PDUs are padded. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 674
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. IS-IS normally purges LSPs with an incorrect data link checksum causing the LSP source to regenerate the message. A cycle of purging and regenerating LSPs can occur when a network link continues to deliver accurate LSPs even though there is a link causing data corruption. This process could cause disruption to your system operation.
PAGE 675
Usage Information Configure a network entity title (the net command) to specify the area address and the router system ID. To establish adjacencies and establish dynamic routing, enable routing on one or more interfaces. You can configure only one IS-IS routing process to perform Level 2 routing. A level-1-2 designation performs Level 1 and Level 2 routing at the same time. Related Commands • net — configures an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for the routing process.
PAGE 676
To return to the default values, use the no isis csnp-interval [seconds] [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters seconds Interval of transmission time between CSNPs on multi-access networks for the designated intermediate system. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 10. level-1 (OPTIONAL) Independently configures the interval of time between transmission of CSNPs for Level 1. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Independently configures the interval of time between transmission of CSNPs for Level 2.
PAGE 677
isis hello-multiplier Specify the number of IS-IS hello packets a neighbor must miss before the router declares the adjacency down. Syntax isis hello-multiplier multiplier [level-1 | level-2] To return to the default values, use the no isis hello-multiplier [multiplier] [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters multiplier Specifies an integer that sets the multiplier for the hello holding time. Never configure a hello-multiplier lower than the default (3). The range is from 3 to 1000. The default is 3.
PAGE 678
isis ipv6 metric Assign metric to an interface for use with IPv6 information. Syntax isis ipv6 metric default-metric [level-1 | level-2] To return to the default values, use the no ipv6 isis metric [default-metric] [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters default-metric Metric assigned to the link and used to calculate the cost from each other router via the links in the network to other destinations. You can configure this metric for Level 1 or Level 2 routing. The range is from 0 to 16777215.
PAGE 679
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell Networking recommends configuring metrics on all interfaces. Without configuring this command, the IS-IS metrics are similar to hop-count metrics. isis network point-to-point Enable the software to treat a broadcast interface as a point-to-point interface. Syntax isis network point-to-point To disable the feature, use the no isis network point-to-point command. Defaults Not enabled.
PAGE 680
You can assign different passwords for different routing levels by using the keywords level-1 and level-2. The no form of this command disables the password for Level 1 or Level 2 routing, using the respective keywords level-1 or level-2. This password provides limited security as it is processed as plain text. isis priority Set the priority of the designated router you select.
PAGE 681
level-1-2 Allows a router to act as both a Level 1 and Level 2 router. This setting is the default. level-2-only Allows a router to act as a Level 2 router. Defaults level-1-2 Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The IS-IS protocol automatically determines area boundaries and are able to keep Level 1 and Level 2 routing separate.
PAGE 682
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-2 to apply the configuration to generation of Level-2 LSPs. interval seconds Enter the maximum number of seconds between LSP generations. The range is from 0 to 120 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. initial_wait_interval seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the initial wait time, in seconds, before running the first LSP generation. The range is from 0 to 120 seconds. The default is 1 second.
PAGE 683
lsp-refresh-interval Set the link state PDU (LSP) refresh interval. LSPs must be refreshed before they expire. When the LSPs are not refreshed after a refresh interval, they are kept in a database until their max-lsp-lifetime reaches zero and then LSPs is purged. Syntax lsp-refresh-interval seconds To restore the default refresh interval, use the no lsp-refresh-interval command. Parameters seconds Defaults 900 seconds Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 684
max-lsp-lifetime Set the maximum time that link-state packets (LSPs) exist without being refreshed. Syntax max-lsp-lifetime seconds To restore the default time, use the no max-lsp-lifetime command. Parameters seconds Defaults 1200 seconds Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) The maximum lifetime of LSP in seconds. This value must be greater than the lsp-refresh-interval command. The higher the value the longer the LSPs are kept.
PAGE 685
metric-style To generate and accept old-style, new-style, or both styles of type, length, and values (TLV), configure a router. Syntax metric-style {narrow [transition] | transition | wide [transition]} [level-1 | level-2] To return to the default values, use the no metric-style {narrow [transition] | transition | wide [transition]} [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters narrow Allows you to generate and accept old-style TLVs. The metric range is from 0 to 63.
PAGE 686
net To configure an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for a routing process, use this mandatory command. If you did not configure a NET, the IS-IS process does not start. Syntax net network-entity-title To remove a net, use the no net network-entity-title command. Parameters network-entity-title Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Specify the area address and system ID for an IS-IS routing process. The first 1 to 13 bytes identify the area address.
PAGE 687
redistribute Redistribute routes from one routing domain to another routing domain. Syntax redistribute {static | connected | rip} [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map mapname] To end redistribution or disable any of the specified keywords, use the no redistribute {static | connected | rip} [metric metric-value] [metric-type {external | internal}] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [route-map map-name] command.
PAGE 688
Redistributed routing information is filtered with the distribute-list out command to ensure that the routes are properly are passed to the receiving routing protocol. How a metric value assigned to a redistributed route is advertised depends on how on the configuration of the metric-style command. If the metric-style command is set for Narrow or Transition mode and the metric value in the redistribute command is set to a number higher than 63, the metric value advertised in LSPs is 63.
PAGE 689
Command Modes Command History • ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) • CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information BGP to IS-IS redistribution supports “match” options using route maps. You can set the metric value, level, and metric-type of redistributed routes by the redistribution command. You can “set” more advanced options using route maps.
PAGE 690
• route-map mapname external map-name is an identifier for a configured route map. The route map should filter imported routes from the source routing protocol to the current routing protocol. If you do not specify a map-name, all routes are redistributed. If you specify a keyword, but fail to list route map tags, no routes are imported. Defaults Refer to Parameters.
PAGE 691
• is-type — assigns a type for a given area. set-overload-bit To set the overload bit in its non-pseudonode LSPs, configure the router. This setting prevents other routers from using it as an intermediate hop in their shortest path first (SPF) calculations. Syntax set-overload-bit To return to the default values, use the no set-overload-bit command. Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information Not set.
PAGE 692
Example (AddressFamily_IPv6) The bold section identifies that Multi-Topology IS-IS is enabled in Transition mode. Dell(conf-router_isis-af_ipv6)#show conf ! address-family ipv6 unicast maximum-paths 16 multi-topology transition set-overload-bit spf-interval level-1 100 15 20 spf-interval level-2 120 20 25 exit-address-family show isis database Display the IS-IS link state database.
PAGE 693
Field Description The last octet is the LSP number. An LSP is divided into multiple LSP fragments if there is more data than cannot fit in a single LSP. Each fragment has a unique LSP number. An * after the LSPID indicates that the system originates an LSP where this command was issued. Example LSP Seq Num This value is the sequence number for the LSP that allows other systems to determine if they have received the latest information from the source.
PAGE 694
LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP Holdtime ATT/P/OL ISIS.00-00 * 0x0000002D 0xB2CD 1075 0/0/0 Area Address: 49.0000.0001 NLPID: 0xCC 0x8E IP Address: 10.1.1.1 IPv6 Address: 1011::1 Topology: IPv4 (0x00) IPv6 (0x8002) Metric: 10 IS OSPF.00 Metric: 10 IS (MT-IPv6) OSPF.00 Metric: 10 IP 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 Metric: 10 IP 15.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 Metric: 20 IP 10.3.3.0 255.255.255.
PAGE 695
show isis hostname Display IS-IS host names configured or learned on the system. Syntax Command Modes Command History Example show isis hostname • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show isis hostname System Id Dynamic Name Static Name *F100.E120.0013 Force10 ISIS Dell# show isis interface Display detailed IS-IS interface status and configuration information.
PAGE 696
LSP Interval: 33 GigabitEthernet 0/8 is up, line protocol is up MTU 1497, Encapsulation SAP Routing Protocol: IS-IS Circuit Type: Level-1-2 Interface Index 38371358, Local circuit ID 2 Level-1 Metric: 10, Priority: 64, Circuit ID: systest-3.02 Hello Interval: 10, Hello Multiplier: 3, CSNP Interval: 10 Number of active level-1 adjacencies: 1 Level-2 Metric: 10, Priority: 64, Circuit ID: systest-3.
PAGE 697
Example Field Description Uptime Displays the interfaces uptime. Circuit Id The neighbor’s interpretation of the designated router for the interface. The bold sections below identify that Multi-Topology IS-IS is enabled. Dell#show isis neighbors System Id Interface State Type Priority Uptime Circuit Id TEST Gi 7/1 Up L1L2(M) 127 09:28:01 TEST.02 ! Dell#show isis neighbors detail System Id Interface State Type Priority Uptime Circuit Id TEST Gi 7/1 Up L1L2(M) 127 09:28:04 TEST.02 Area Address(es): 49.
PAGE 698
show isis traffic This command allows you to display IS-IS traffic interface information. Syntax show isis traffic [interface] Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information 698 interface • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type slot/port as one of the following: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
PAGE 699
Example Dell#sho IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: Dell# is traffic Level-1 Hellos (sent/rcvd) : 0/721 Level-2 Hellos (sent/rcvd) : 900/943 PTP Hellos (sent/rcvd) : 0/0 Level-1 LSPs sourced (new/refresh) : 0/0 Level-2 LSPs sourced (new/refresh) : 1/3 Level-1 LSPs flooded (sent/rcvd) : 0/0 Level-2 LSPs flooded (sent/rcvd) : 5934/5217 Level-1 LSPs CSNPs (sent/rcvd) : 0/0 Level-2 LSPs CSNPs (sent/rcvd) : 472/238 Level-1 LSPs
PAGE 700
Usage Information This command spf-interval in CONFIG-ROUTER-ISIS-AF-IPV6 mode is used for IPv6 Multi-Topology route computation only. If using Single Topology mode, use the spf-interval command in CONFIGROUTER-ISIS mode for both IPv4 and IPv6 route computations. SPF throttling slows down the frequency at which route calculations are performed during network instability.
PAGE 701
30 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) This chapter contains commands for Dell Networks’s implementation of the link aggregation control protocol (LACP) for creating dynamic link aggregation groups (LAGs) — known as port-channels in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: For static LAG commands, refer to theInterfaces chapter), based on the standards specified in the IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications.
PAGE 702
• For a Ten-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Optionally, enter an in or out parameter: Defaults • Receive enter in • Transmit enter out none Command Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 703
Defaults 32768 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. lacp system-priority Configure the LACP system priority. Syntax Parameters lacp system-priority priority-value priority-value Defaults 32768 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Enter the port-priority value.
PAGE 704
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. LACP Modes Mode Function active An interface is in an active negotiating state in this mode. LACP runs on any link configured in the active state and also automatically initiates negotiation with other ports by initiating LACP packets.
PAGE 705
Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Example (PortChannel-Number) port-channelnumber Enter a port-channel number. The range is from 1 to 128. sys-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords sys-id and the value that identifies a system. counters (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword counters to display the LACP counters. Without a Port Channel specified, the command clears all Port Channel counters. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 706
31 Layer 2 This chapter describes commands to configure Layer 2 features. This chapter contains: • MAC Addressing Commands MAC Addressing Commands The following commands are related to configuring, managing, and viewing MAC addresses. clear mac-address-table Clear the MAC address table. Syntax clear mac-address-table dynamic {address mac-address | all | interface interface | vlan vlan-id} Parameters address macaddress Enter the keyword address then a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
PAGE 707
mac-address-table aging-time Specify an aging time for MAC addresses to remove from the MAC address table. Syntax mac-address-table aging-time seconds To delete the configured aging time, use the no mac-address-table aging-time seconds command. Parameters seconds Defaults 1800 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Enter either zero (0) or a number as the number of seconds before MAC addresses are relearned. To disable aging of the MAC address table, enter 0.
PAGE 708
Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp Ensure that address resolution protocol (ARP) refreshes the egress interface when a station move occurs due to a topology change. Syntax [no] mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.
PAGE 709
Usage Information This command and its options are supported on physical interfaces, static LAGs, LACP LAGs, and VLANs. If you do not specify the vlan option, the MAC address counters are not VLAN-based. That is, the sum of the addresses learned on all VLANs (not having any learning limit configuration) is counted against the MAC learning limit. MAC Learning Limit violation logs and actions are not available on a per-VLAN basis.
PAGE 710
mac learning-limit station-move-violation Specify the actions for a station move violation. Syntax mac learning-limit station-move-violation {log | shutdown-both | shutdownoffending | shutdown-original} To disable a configuration, use the no mac learning-limit station-move-violation command, then the configured keyword. Parameters log Enter the keyword log to generate a syslog message on a station move violation.
PAGE 711
Parameters stack-unit unit_number (REQUIRED) Enter the keyword linecard then a stack member number to select the linecard for which to gather information. The range is 0 to 5. port-set port-pipe (REQUIRED) Enter the keywords port-set then a Port-Pipe number to select the Port-Pipe for which to gather information. The range is 0. address mac-addr (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword address then a MAC address in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format to display information on that MAC address.
PAGE 712
Command Modes Command History Usage Information address macaddress (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword address then a MAC address in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format to display information on that MAC address. interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface then the interface type, slot and port information: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
PAGE 713
Usage Information The following describes the show mac-address-table command shown in the following example. Column Heading Description VlanId Displays the VLAN ID number. Mac Address Displays the MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. Type Lists whether the MAC address was manually configured (Static), learned (Dynamic), or associated with a specific port (Sticky). An (N) indicates that the specified MAC address has been learnt by a neighbor and is synced to the node.
PAGE 714
• Command History Example EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show mac-address-table aging-time Mac-address-table aging time : 1800 Dell# Related Commands show mac-address-table — displays the current MAC address configuration. show mac learning-limit Display MAC address learning limits set for various interfaces.
PAGE 715
Occasionally, while sending broadcast traffic over multiple Layer 3 VLANs, the VRRP state of a VLAN interface may continually switch between Master and Backup. NOTE: For more information, refer to VLAN Stacking and VLAN-related commands, such as portmode hybrid in the Interfaces chapter. description Add a description about the selected VLAN. Syntax Parameters description description description Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 716
default-vlan disable Disable the default VLAN so that all switchports are placed in the Null VLAN until they are explicitly configured as a member of another VLAN. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The no default vlan disable command is not listed in the running-configuration, but when the default VLAN is disabled, default-vlan disable is listed in the running-configuration.
PAGE 717
Example Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#show config ! interface Vlan 1 description a no ip address mtu 2500 shutdown Dell(conf-if-vl-100)# show vlan Display the current VLAN configurations on the switch.
PAGE 718
Column Heading Description Q Ports Example • Displays G for GVRP tagged • M for member of a VLAN-Stack VLAN • T for tagged interface • U for untagged interface • x (not capitalized x) for Dot1x untagged • X (capitalized X) for Dot1x tagged • o (not capitalized o) for OpenFlow untagged • O (capitalized O) for OpenFlow tagged • H for VSN tagged • i (not capitalized i) for Internal untagged • I (capitalized I) for Internal tagged • v (not capitalized v) for VLT untagged • V (capital
PAGE 719
20 1002 Dell# Example (Name) 0 0 0 0 unassigned unassigned Dellconf)#interface vlan 222 Dell(conf-if-vl-222)#name test Dell(conf-if-vl-222)#do show vlan name test Codes: Q: U x G - * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack NUM Status Description 222 Inactive Dell(conf-if-vl-222)# Related Commands Q Ports U Gi 1/22 vlan-stack compatible — enables the Stackable VLAN feature on the selected VLAN.
PAGE 720
In programmable-mux (PMUX) mode of input/output aggregator (IOA), when you use the no tagged command on an interface, the VLAN is not removed from the VLAN table, even if there are no active members for the VLAN. Related Commands interface vlan — configures a VLAN. untagged — specifies which interfaces in a VLAN are untagged. track ip Track the Layer 3 operational state of a Layer 3 VLAN, using a subset of the VLAN member interfaces.
PAGE 721
untagged Add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as an untagged interface. Syntax untagged interface To remove an untagged interface from a VLAN, use the no untagged interface command. Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 722
32 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) Link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) advertises connectivity and management from the local station to the adjacent stations on an IEEE 802 LAN. LLDP facilitates multi-vendor interoperability by using standard management tools to discover and make available a physical topology for network management. The Dell Networking operating software implementation of LLDP is based on IEEE standard 801.1ab.
PAGE 723
debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration. advertise dot3-tlv Advertise dot3 TLVs (Type, Length, Value). Syntax advertise dot3-tlv {max-frame-size} To remove advertised dot3-tlv, use the no advertise dot3-tlv {max-frame-size} command. Parameters max-frame-size Enter the keywords max-frame-size to advertise the dot3 maximum frame size.
PAGE 724
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The command options system-capabilities, system-description, and system-name can be invoked individually or together, in any sequence. clear lldp counters Clear LLDP transmitting and receiving counters for all physical interfaces or a specific physical interface.
PAGE 725
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug lldp interface To display timer events, neighbor additions or deletions, and other information about incoming and outgoing packets, enable LLDP debugging.
PAGE 726
disable Enable or disable LLDP. Syntax disable To enable LLDP, use the no disable command. Defaults Enabled, that is no disable. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol lldp (Configuration) — enables LLDP globally.
PAGE 727
To return to the default, use the no mode {tx | rx} command. Parameters tx Enter the keyword tx to set the mode to transmit. rx Enter the keyword rx to set the mode to receive. Defaults Both transmit and receive. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 728
Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol lldp (Interface) Enter the LLDP protocol in INTERFACE mode. Syntax [no] protocol lldp To return to the global LLDP configuration mode, use the no protocol lldp command from Interface mode. Defaults LLDP is not enabled on the interface. Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 729
Usage Information Omitting the keyword detail displays only the remote chassis ID, Port ID, and Dead Interval. Example R1(conf-if-gi-1/31)#do show lldp neighbors Loc PortID Rem Host Name Rem Port Id Rem Chassis Id -------------------------------------------------------------Gi 1/21 R2 GigabitEthernet 2/11 00:01:e8:06:95:3e Gi 1/31 R3 GigabitEthernet 3/11 00:01:e8:09:c2:4a show lldp statistics Display the LLDP statistical information.
PAGE 730
LLDP-MED Commands The following are the LLDP-MED (Media Endpoint Discovery) commands. The LLDP-MED commands are an extension of the set of LLDP TLV advertisement commands. As defined by ANSI/TIA-1057, LLDP-MED provides organizationally specific TLVs (Type Length Value), so that endpoint devices and network connectivity devices can advertise their characteristics and configuration information. The Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI) for the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) is 00-12-BB.
PAGE 731
show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration. advertise med guest-voice-signaling To advertise a separate limited voice service for a guest user when the guest voice control packets use a separate network policy than the voice data, configure the system.
PAGE 732
ecs-elin value Enter the keywords ecs-elin then the Emergency Call Service (ecs) Emergency Location Identification Number (elin) numeric location string. The range is from 10 to 25 characters. Defaults unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Command History Usage Information Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 733
To return to the default, use the no advertise med softphone-voice {vlan-id} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. priority-tagged number Enter the keywords priority-tagged then the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7. Defaults unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP.
PAGE 734
advertise med video-conferencing To advertise dedicated video conferencing and other similar appliances that support real-time interactive video, configure the system. Syntax advertise med video-conferencing {vlan-id} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med video-conferencing {vlan-id} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 735
show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration. advertise med voice To advertise a dedicated IP telephony handset or other appliances supporting interactive voice services, configure the system. Syntax advertise med voice {vlan-id} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med voice {vlan-id} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 736
Related Commands debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration.
PAGE 737
33 Microsoft Network Load Balancing This functionality is supported on the MXL platforms. Network Load Balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
PAGE 738
NLB Multicast Mode Scenario Consider a sample topology in which four servers, namely S1 through S4, are configured as a cluster or a farm. This set of servers is connected to a Layer 3 switch, which in turn is connected to the end-clients. They contain a single multicast MAC address (MACCluster: 03-00-5E-11-11-11). In the multicast NLB mode, a static ARP configuration command is configured to associate the cluster IP address with a multicast cluster MAC address.
PAGE 739
• When a port is added to the VLAN, the port automatically receives traffic if the feature is enabled. Old ARP entries are not deleted or updated. • When a member port is deleted, its ARP entries are also deleted from the CAM. • Port channels in the VLAN also receive traffic. • There is no impact on the configuration from saving the configuration. • The feature, if enabled, is displayed in the show running-config command output that displays the ip vlan-flooding CLI configuration.
PAGE 740
vlan vlan-id Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example (Multicast) Version 9.3(0.0) Enter the keyword vlan then a VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094. Added support for multicast MAC address on the MXL platform. mac-address-table static 01:00:5E:01:00:01 {multicast vlan 2 output—range Te 0/2,Te 0/3} ip vlan-flooding Enable unicast data traffic flooding on VLAN member ports. Syntax ip vlan-flooding To disable, use the no ip vlan-flooding command.
PAGE 741
34 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) connects multiple PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) domains together. MSDP peers connect using TCP port 639. Peers send keepalives every 60 seconds. A peer connection is reset after 75 seconds if no MSDP packets are received. MSDP connections are parallel with MBGP connections. clear ip msdp peer Reset the TCP connection to the peer and clear all the peer statistics.
PAGE 742
clear ip msdp statistic Clears the entire source-active cache, the source-active entries of a particular multicast group, rejected, or local source-active entries. Syntax clear ip msdp sa-cache [group-address | rejected-sa | local] Parameters group-address Enter the group IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.).
PAGE 743
To clear the MSDP rejected source-active entries, use the no ip msdp cache-rejected-sa {number} command then the ip msdp cache-rejected-sa {number} command. Parameters number Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the number of rejected SA entries to cache. The range is from 0 to 32766. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa — Displays the rejected SAs in the SA cache.
PAGE 744
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip msdp mesh-group To be a member of a mesh group, configure a peer. Syntax ip msdp mesh-group {name} {peer address} To remove the peer from a mesh group, use the no ip msdp mesh-group {name} {peer address} command. Parameters name Enter a string of up to 16 characters long for as the mesh group name. peer address Enter the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). Defaults Not configured.
PAGE 745
• Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip msdp peer Configure an MSDP peer. Syntax ip msdp peer peer address [connect-source] [description] [sa-limit number] To remove the MSDP peer, use the no ip msdp peer peer address [connect-source interface] [description name] [sa-limit number] command.
PAGE 746
If the total number of SA messages received from the peer is already larger than the limit when this command is applied, those SA messages continue to be accepted. To enforce the limit in such situation, use the clear ip msdp peer command to reset the peer. Related Commands ip msdp sa-limit — configures the MSDP SA Limit. clear ip msdp peer — clears the MSDP peer. show ip msdp — displays the MSDP information. ip msdp redistribute Filter local PIM SA entries in the SA cache.
PAGE 747
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip msdp sa-limit Configure the upper limit of source-active (SA) entries in SA-cache. Syntax ip msdp sa-limit number To return to the default, use the no ip msdp sa-limit number command. Parameters number Defaults 50000 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the maximum number of SA entries in SA-cache.
PAGE 748
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip multicast-msdp Enable MSDP. Syntax ip multicast-msdp To exit MSDP, use the no ip multicast-msdp command. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip msdp Display the MSDP peer status, SA cache, or peer summary.
PAGE 749
Example (Sa-cache) Dell#show ip msdp sa-cache MSDP Source-Active Cache - 1 entries GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 224.1.1.1 172.21.220.10 172.21.3.254 Dell# Example (Summary) Dell#show ip msdp summary Peer Addr Local Addr Description 5.5.5.32 6.6.6.32 Peer1 Dell# LearnedFrom Expire UpTime 172.21.3.254 102 00:02:52 State Source Established Lo 32 SA 20 Up/Down 00:07:17 show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa Display the rejected SAs in the SA cache.
PAGE 750
35 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP), as implemented by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS), conforms to IEEE 802.1s. debug spanning-tree mstp Enable debugging of the multiple spanning tree protocol and view information on the protocol. Syntax debug spanning-tree mstp [all | bpdu interface {in | out} | events] Parameters all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to debug all spanning tree operations.
PAGE 751
description Enter a description of the multiple spanning tree. Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters description Enter a description to identify the multiple spanning tree (maximum 80 characters). Defaults none Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is “config-mstp”.) Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 752
forward-delay The amount of time the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning State before transitioning to the Forwarding State. Syntax forward-delay seconds To return to the default setting, use the no forward-delay command. Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning State before transiting to the Forwarding State. The range is from 4 to 30. The default is 15 seconds.
PAGE 753
max-age To maintain configuration information before refreshing that information, set the time interval for the MSTB. Syntax max-age seconds To return to the default values, use the no max-age command. Parameters max-age Enter a number of seconds the system waits before refreshing configuration information. The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. Defaults 20 seconds Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 754
msti Configure multiple spanning tree instance, bridge priority, and one or multiple VLANs mapped to the MST instance. Syntax msti instance {vlan range | bridge-priority priority} To disable mapping or bridge priority, use the no msti instance {vlan range | bridgepriority priority} command. Parameters msti instance Enter the MSTP iInstance. The range is from zero (0) to 63. vlan range Enter the keyword vlan then the identifier range value. The range is from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 755
revision — assigns the revision number to the MST configuration. protocol spanning-tree mstp To enable and configure the multiple spanning tree group, enter MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode. Syntax protocol spanning-tree mstp To disable the multiple spanning tree group, use the no protocol spanning-tree mstp command. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 756
name — assigns the region name to the MST region. show config View the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are shown. Syntax show config Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 757
Parameters Command Modes Command History instance-number (Optional) Enter the multiple spanning tree instance number. The range is from 0 to 63. brief (Optional) Enter the keyword brief to view a synopsis of the MST instance. guard (Optional) Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard enabled on an MSTP interface and the current port state. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 758
---------------------------------------------------------Gi 0/0 128.257 128 20000 EDS 0 32768 0001.e801.6aa8 128.257 Interface Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link-type Edge Boundary ---------------------------------------------------------Gi 0/0 ErrDis 128.257 128 20000 EDS 0 P2P No No Dell#show spanning-tree msti 0 MSTI 0 VLANs mapped 1-4094 Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
PAGE 759
To disable the multiple spanning tree protocol on the interface, use the no spanning-tree command. Parameters spanning-tree Defaults Enable. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the keywords spanning-tree to enable the MSTP on the interface. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. spanning-tree msti Configure multiple spanning tree instance cost and priority for an interface.
PAGE 760
Parameters edge-port Enter the keywords edge-port to configure the interface as a multiple spanning tree edge port. bpduguard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface into forwarding mode immediately after the root fails. Enter the keyword bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU.
PAGE 761
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. By default, the sytem implements an optimized flush mechanism for MSTP. This mechanism helps in flushing the MAC addresses only when necessary (and less often) allowing for faster convergence during topology changes.
PAGE 762
36 Multicast The multicast commands are supported by Dell Networking Operating System (OS). This chapter contains the following sections: • IPv4 Multicast Commands • IPv6 Multicast Commands IPv4 Multicast Commands The following section contains the IPv4 multicast commands. clear ip mroute Clear learned multicast routes on the multicast forwarding table. To clear the protocol-independent multicast (PIM) tree information base, use the clear ip pim tib command.
PAGE 763
To delete a specific static mroute, use the ip mroute destination mask {ip-address | null 0| {{bgp| ospf} process-id | isis | rip | static} {ip-address | tag | null 0}} [distance] command. To delete all mroutes matching a certain mroute, use the no ip mroute destination mask command. Parameters destination Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the destination device. mask Enter the mask in slash prefix formation ( /x ) or in dotted decimal format.
PAGE 764
Usage Information This feature allows you to limit the number of multicast entries on the system. This number is the total of all the multicast entries on all line cards in the system. On each line card, the multicast module only installs the maximum number of entries, depending on the configured CAM profile. To store multicast routes, use the IN-L3-McastFib CAM partition. It is a separate hardware limit that exists per port-pipe. This hardware space limitation can supersede any software-configured limit.
PAGE 765
Enter a VLAN ID to limit the information displayed to the multicast routes PIM-SM snooping discovers on a specified VLAN. The VLAN ID range is from 1 to 4094. Enter a multicast group address and, optionally, a source multicast address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) to limit the information displayed to the multicast routes PIM-SM snooping discovers for a specified multicast group and source.
PAGE 766
Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 3/4 Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 3/12 GigabitEthernet 3/13 (*, 224.20.20.1), uptime 00:05:12 Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 3/12 Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 3/4 Usage Information Example The following describes the show ip mroute command shown in the following example. Field Description (S, G) Displays the forwarding entry in the multicast route table.
PAGE 767
Usage Information Network administrators use static mroutes to control the reach-ability of the multicast sources. If a PIMregistered multicast source is reachable using static mroute as well as unicast route, the distance of each route is examined and the route with shorter distance is the one the PIM selects for reach-ability. NOTE: The default distance of mroutes is zero (0) and is CLI configurable on a per route basis. Example Dell#show ip rpf RPF information for 10.10.10.
PAGE 768
ip multicast-limit To limit the number of multicast entries on the system, use this feature. Syntax ip multicast-limit limit Parameters limit Defaults 15000 routes. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the desired maximum number of multicast entries on the system. The range is from 1 to 50000. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This feature allows you to limit the number of multicast entries on the system.
PAGE 769
37 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports the network discovery protocol for IPv6. The neighbor discovery protocol for IPv6 is defined in RFC 2461 as part of the Stateless Address Autoconfiguration protocol. It replaces the Address Resolution Protocol used with IPv4.
PAGE 770
Command Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 neighbor Configure a static entry in the IPv6 neighbor discovery.
PAGE 771
show ipv6 neighbors Display IPv6 discovery information. Entering the command without options shows all IPv6 neighbor addresses stored on the control processor (CP). Syntax Parameters show ipv6 neighbors [ipv6-address] [cpu {rp1 [ipv6-address] | rp2 [ipv6-address]}] [ ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address of the neighbor in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
PAGE 772
38 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) The MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform supports open shortest path first version 2 (OSPFv2) for IPv4 and version 3 (OSPFv3) for IPv6. Up to 16 OSPF instances can be run simultaneously on the MXL Switch. OSPF is an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP), which means that it distributes routing information between routers in a single Autonomous System (AS).
PAGE 773
Command Modes Command History ROUTER OSPF Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information In the Dell Networking operating software, cost is defined as reference bandwidth. Related Commands area stub — creates a stub area. area nssa Specify an area as a not so stubby area (NSSA). Syntax area area-id nssa [default-information-originate] [no-redistribution] [nosummary] To delete an NSSA, use the no area area-id nssa command.
PAGE 774
not-advertise Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords not-advertise to set the status to DoNotAdvertise (that is, the Type 3 summary-LSA is suppressed and the component networks remain hidden from other areas.) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Only the routes within an area are summarized, and that summary is advertised to other areas by the ABR. External routes are not summarized.
PAGE 775
Parameters ref-bw (OPTIONAL) Specify a reference bandwidth in megabits per second. The range is from 1 to 4294967. The default is 100 megabits per second. Defaults 100 megabits per second. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip ospf Clear all OSPF routing tables. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History clear ip ospf process-id [process] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to clear a specific process.
PAGE 776
Command Modes Command History Related Commands EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip ospf statistics — displays the OSPF statistics. debug ip ospf Display debug information on OSPF. Entering the debug ip ospf commands enables OSPF debugging for the first OSPF process. Syntax debug ip ospf process-id [bfd |event | packet | spf | database-timer ratelimit] To cancel the debug command, use the no debug ip ospf command.
PAGE 777
Example Field Description aid: Displays the Autonomous System ID. chk: Displays the OSPF checksum. aut: States if OSPF authentication is configured. One of the following is listed: • 0 - no authentication configured • 1 - simple authentication configured using the ip ospf authenticationkey command • 2 - MD5 authentication configured using the ip ospf message-digestkey command auk: If the ip ospf authentication-key command is configured, this field displays the key used.
PAGE 778
default-information originate To generate a default external route into an OSPF routing domain, configure the system. Syntax default-information originate [always] [metric metric-value] [metric-type type-value] [route-map map-name] To return to the default values, use the no default-information originate command. Parameters always (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword always to specify that default route information must always be advertised.
PAGE 779
description Add a description about the selected OSPF configuration. Syntax description description To remove the OSPF description, use the no description command. Parameters description Defaults none Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a text string description to identify the OSPF configuration (80 characters maximum). Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip ospf asbr — displays the VLAN configuration.
PAGE 780
Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information external dist3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword external then a number to specify a distance for external type 5 and 7 routes. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 110. inter-area dist2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords inter-area then a number to specify a distance metric for routes between areas. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 110.
PAGE 781
distribute-list out To restrict certain routes destined for the local routing table after the SPF calculation, apply a filter. Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp | connected | isis | rip | static] To remove a filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp | connected | isis | rip | static] command. Parameters prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured prefix list. bgp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bgp to specify that BGP routes are distributed.
PAGE 782
NOTE: The faster the convergence, the more frequent the route calculations and updates. This behavior impacts CPU utilization and may impact adjacency stability in larger topologies. Generally, convergence level 1 meets most convergence requirements. Higher convergence levels should only be selected following consultation with Dell Networking technical support. flood-2328 Enable RFC-2328 flooding behavior. Syntax flood-2328 To disable, use the no flood-2328 command. Defaults Disabled.
PAGE 783
graceful-restart helper-reject Specify the OSPF router to not act as a helper during graceful restart. Syntax graceful-restart helper-reject ip-address To return to default value, use the no graceful-restart helper-reject command. Parameters ip-address Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the OSPF router-id, in IP address format, of the restart router that will not act as a helper during graceful restart.
PAGE 784
role restart-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords restart-only to specify the OSPF router is a restart only during graceful-restart. Defaults By default, OSPF routers are both helper and restart routers during a graceful restart. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip ospf auth-change-wait-time OSPF provides a grace period while OSPF changes its interface authentication type.
PAGE 785
ip ospf cost Change the cost associated with the OSPF traffic on an interface. Syntax ip ospf cost cost To return to default value, use the no ip ospf cost command. Parameters cost Enter a number as the cost. The range is from 1 to 65535. Defaults The default cost is based on the reference bandwidth. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 786
To return to the default value, use the no ip ospf hello-interval command. Parameters seconds Defaults 10 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the number of seconds for the interval. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 10 seconds. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The time interval between the hello packets must be the same for routers in a network.
PAGE 787
ip ospf mtu-ignore Disable OSPF MTU mismatch detection upon receipt of database description (DBD) packets. Syntax ip ospf mtu-ignore To return to the default, use the no ip ospf mtu-ignore command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip ospf network Set the network type for the interface. Syntax ip ospf network {broadcast | point-to-point} To return to the default, use the no ip ospf network command.
PAGE 788
Usage Information Setting a priority of 0 makes the router ineligible for election as a designated router or backup designated router. Use this command for interfaces connected to multi-access networks, not point-to-point networks. ip ospf retransmit-interval Set the retransmission time between lost link state advertisements (LSAs) for adjacencies belonging to the interface. Syntax ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds To return to the default values, use the no ip ospf retransmit-interval command.
PAGE 789
log-adjacency-changes To send a Syslog message about changes in the OSPF adjacency state, set the system. Syntax log-adjacency-changes To disable the Syslog messages, use the no log-adjacency-changes command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. maximum-paths Enable the software to forward packets over multiple paths.
PAGE 790
Usage Information This command is either enabled or disabled. If no OSPF process is identified as the MIB manager, the first OSPF process is used. If an OSPF process has been selected, it must be disabled prior to assigning new process ID the MIB responsibility. network area Define which interfaces run OSPF and the OSPF area for those interfaces. Syntax network ip-address mask area area-id To disable an OSPF area, use the no network ip-address mask area area-id command.
PAGE 791
Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information default Enter the keyword default to make all OSPF interfaces (current and future) passive. interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For Port Channel groups, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
PAGE 792
• May update ABR status. redistribute Redistribute information from another routing protocol throughout the OSPF process. Syntax redistribute {connected | rip | static} [metric metric-value | metric-type type-value] [route-map map-name] [tag tag-value] To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute {connected | isis | rip | static} command. Parameters connected Enter the keyword connected to specify that information from active routes on interfaces is redistributed.
PAGE 793
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute bgp as number [metric metric-value] | [metric-type type-value] [tag tag-value] command. Parameters as number Enter the autonomous system number. The range is from 1 to 65535. metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then the metric-value number. The range is from 0 to16777214.
PAGE 794
route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of the route map. tag tag-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag to set the tag for routes redistributed into OSPF. The range is from 0 to 4294967295. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. router-id To configure a fixed router ID, use this command.
PAGE 795
To clear an OSPF instance, use the no router ospf process-id command. Parameters process-id Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a number for the OSPF instance. The range is from 1 to 65535. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You must have an IP address assigned to an interface to enter ROUTER OSPF mode and configure OSPF.
PAGE 796
The following describes the show ip ospf command shown in the following example. Line Beginning with Description “Routing Process...” Displays the OSPF process ID and the IP address associated with the process ID. “Supports only...” Displays the number of Type of Service (TOS) rouse supported. “SPF schedule...” Displays the delay and hold time configured for this process ID. “Convergence Level” “Min LSA....” Displays the intervals set for LSA transmission and acceptance. “Number of...
PAGE 797
Usage Information To isolate problems with external routes, use this command. In OSPF, external routes are calculated by adding the LSA cost to the cost of reaching the ASBR router. If an external route does not have the correct cost, use this command to determine if the path to the originating router is correct. The display output is not sorted in any order. NOTE: ASBRs that are not in directly connected areas are also displayed.
PAGE 798
OSPF Router with ID (11.1.2.1) (Process ID 1) Router (Area 0.0.0.0) Link ID ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum 11.1.2.1 11.1.2.1 673 0x80000005 0x707e 13.1.1.1 13.1.1.1 676 0x80000097 0x1035 192.68.135.2 192.68.135.2 1419 0x80000294 0x9cbd Link ID 10.2.3.2 10.2.4.2 Link ID 0.0.0.0 1.1.1.1 10.1.1.0 10.1.2.0 10.2.2.0 10.2.3.0 10.2.4.0 11.1.1.0 11.1.2.0 12.1.2.0 13.1.1.0 13.1.2.0 172.16.1.0 Dell> Related Commands Link count 2 2 1 Network (Area 0.0.0.0) ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum 13.1.1.
PAGE 799
Usage Information Example The following describes the show ip ospf database asbr-summary command shown in the following example. Field Description LS Age Displays the LSA’s age. Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following options can be found in this item: • TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the router can support Type of Service.
PAGE 800
show ip ospf database external Display information on the AS external (type 5) LSAs. Syntax show ip ospf process-id database external [link-state-id] [adv-router ipaddress] Parameters process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format.
PAGE 801
Example Field Description TOS Displays the Type of Service (TOS) options. Option 0 is the only option. Metric Displays the LSA metric. Forward Address Identifies the address of the forwarding router. Data traffic is forwarded to this router. If the forwarding address is 0.0.0.0, data traffic is forwarded to the originating router. External Route Tag Displays the 32-bit field attached to each external route.
PAGE 802
link-state-id adv-router ipaddress Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format. The LSA ID value depends on the LSA type, and it can be one of the following: • the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs • the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs • the default destination (0.0.0.
PAGE 803
Length: 36 Network Mask: Attached Attached Attached /24 Router: 20.20.20.8 Router: 20.20.20.9 Router: 20.20.20.7 Network (Area 0.0.0.1) LS age: 252 Options: (TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Network Link State ID: 192.10.10.2 Advertising Router: 192.10.10.2 LS Seq Number: 0x80000007 Checksum: 0x4309 Length: 36 Network Mask: /24 Attached Router: 192.10.10.2 Attached Router: 20.20.20.1 Attached Router: 20.20.20.5 Dell# Related Commands show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information.
PAGE 804
show ip ospf database opaque-area Display the opaque-area (type 10) LSA information. Syntax show ip ospf process-id database opaque-area [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address] Parameters process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format.
PAGE 805
OSPF Router with ID (3.3.3.3) (Process ID 1) Type-10 Opaque Link Area (Area 0) LS age: 1133 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Type-10 Opaque Link Area Link State ID: 1.0.0.1 Advertising Router: 10.16.1.160 LS Seq Number: 0x80000416 Checksum: 0x376 Length: 28 Opaque Type: 1 Opaque ID: 1 Unable to display opaque data LS age: 833 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Type-10 Opaque Link Area Link State ID: 1.0.0.2 Advertising Router: 10.16.1.
PAGE 806
show ip ospf database opaque-link Display the opaque-link (type 9) LSA information. Syntax show ip ospf process-id database opaque-link [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address] Parameters process-id Enter the OSPF process ID to show a specific process. If you do not enter the process ID, the command applies only to the first OSPF process. link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format.
PAGE 807
Command History Usage Information Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip ospf process-id database router command shown in the following example. Item Description LS Age Displays the LSA age. Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following options can be found in this item: • TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the router can support Type of Service.
PAGE 808
Link connected to: a Transit Network (Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.129.1 (Link Data) Router Interface address: 192.68.129.1 Number of TOS metric: 0 TOS 0 Metric: 1 Link connected to: a Transit Network (Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.130.1 (Link Data) Router Interface address: 192.68.130.1 Number of TOS metric: 0 TOS 0 Metric: 1 Link connected to: a Transit Network (Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.142.2 (Link Data) Router Interface address: 192.68.142.
PAGE 809
• Command History Usage Information Example EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip ospf process-id database summary command shown in the following example. Item Description LS Age Displays the LSA age. Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router.
PAGE 810
Length: 28 Network Mask: /24 TOS: 0 Metric: 1 LS age: 7 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Summary Network Link State ID: 192.68.33.0 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10 LS Seq Number: 0x80000016 Checksum: 0x1241 Length: 28 Network Mask: /26 TOS: 0 Metric: 1 # Related Commands show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information. show ip ospf interface Display the OSPF interfaces configured. If OSPF is not enabled on the switch, no output is generated.
PAGE 811
Example Item Description Internet Address... This line displays the IP address, network mask and area assigned to this interface. Process ID... This line displays the OSPF Process ID, Router ID, Network type and cost metric for this interface. Transmit Delay... This line displays the interface’s settings for Transmit Delay, State, and Priority. In the State setting, BDR is Backup Designated Router. Designated Router... This line displays the ID of the Designated Router and its interface address.
PAGE 812
Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip ospf process-id neighbor command shown in the following example. Item Description Neighbor ID Displays the neighbor router ID. Pri Displays the priority assigned neighbor.
PAGE 813
This command has the following limitations: Example • The display output is sorted by prefixes; intra-area ECMP routes are not displayed together. • For Type 2 external routes, Type 1 cost is not displayed. Dell#show ip ospf 100 route Prefix Cost Nexthop 1.1.1.1 1 0.0.0.0 3.3.3.3 2 13.0.0.3 13.0.0.0 1 0.0.0.0 150.150.150.0 2 13.0.0.3 172.30.1.0 2 13.0.0.
PAGE 814
Row Heading Description Total Displays the total number of packets the OSPF process receives/transmits. Error Displays the error count while receiving and transmitting packets by the OSPF process. Hello Number of OSPF Hello packets. DDiscr Number of database description packets. LSReq Number of link state request packets. LSUpd Number of link state update packets. LSAck Number of link state acknowledgement packets. TxQ-Len The transmission queue length. RxQ-Len The reception queue length.
PAGE 815
Example Error Type Description Q-overflow Packets dropped due to queue overflow. Unknown-Pkt Received packet is not an OSPF packet.
PAGE 816
Hello 1 Wait 0 Dead 37 Transmit 0 Queue Statistics LSU-Q-Len 0 LSU-Q-Wmark LSR-Q-Len 0 LSR-Q-Wmark Dell# Related Commands Grace 0 1 1 clear ip ospf statistics — clears the packet statistics in all interfaces and neighbors. show ip ospf timers rate-limit Show the LSA currently in the queue waiting for timers to expire. Syntax show ip ospf process-id timers rate-limit Parameters Defaults process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
PAGE 817
Usage Information To isolate problems with inter-area and external routes, use this command. In OSPF inter-area and external routes are calculated by adding LSA cost to the cost of reaching the router. If an inter-area or external route is not of correct cost, the display can determine if the path to the originating router is correct or not. Example Dell#show ip ospf 1 topology Router ID 3.3.3.3 1.1.1.1 Dell# Flags Cost E/B/-/ 1 E/-/-/ 1 Nexthop 20.0.0.3 10.0.0.
PAGE 818
Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information delay Enter a number as the delay. The range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 5 seconds. holdtime Enter a number as the hold time. The range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 10 seconds. • delay = 5 seconds • holdtime = 10 seconds ROUTER OSPF Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 819
timers throttle lsa arrival Configure the LSA acceptance intervals. Syntax timers throttle lsa arrival arrival-time To return to the default, use the no timers throttle lsa command. Parameters arrival-time Defaults 1000 msec Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Set the interval between receiving the same LSA repeatedly, to allow sufficient time for the system to accept the LSA. The range is from 0 to 600,000 milliseconds. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 820
key Text string used in authentication. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted). For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 80 hex digits (encrypted). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3 Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 821
key-encryptionalgorithm (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the key is encrypted. Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). key Text string used in encryption. The required lengths of a non-encrypted or encrypted key are: 3DES - 48 or 96 hex digits; DES - 16 or 32 hex digits; AES-CBC -32 or 64 hex digits for AES-128 and 48 or 96 hex digits for AES-192. authenticationalgorithm Specifies the authentication algorithm to use for encryption. Valid values are MD5 or SHA1.
PAGE 822
clear ipv6 ospf process Reset an OSPFv3 router process without removing or re-configuring the process. Syntax clear ipv6 ospf process Command Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug ipv6 ospf bfd Display debug information and interface types for BFD on OSPF IPv6 packets. Syntax [no] debug ipv6 ospf bfd [interface] To cancel the debug command, use the no debug ipv6 ospf command.
PAGE 823
Example Dell(conf-if-te-0/2)#do debug ipv6 ospf bfd te 0/2 OSPFv3 bfd related debugging is on for TenGigabitEthernet 0/2 00:59:26 : OSPFv3INFO: Received Interface mode bfd config command on interface Te 0/2 Enable 1, interval 0, min_rx 0, Multiplier 0, role 0, Disable 0 00:59:26 : OSPFv3INFO: Enabling BFD on interface Te 0/2 Cmd Add Session 00:59:27 : OSPFv3INFO: Enabling BFD for NBRIP fe80:0000:0000:0000:0201:e8ff:fe8b:7720 00:59:27 : OSPFv3INFO: Completed Enabling BFD on interface Te 0/2 00:59:27 : OSPFv
PAGE 824
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. default-information originate Configure the system to generate a default external route into an OSPFv3 routing domain. Syntax default-information originate [always] [metric metric-value] [metric-type type-value] [route-map map-name] To return to the default values, use the no default-information originate command.
PAGE 825
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. By default, OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA. To enable OSPFv3 graceful restart, enter the ipv6 router ospf command to enter OSPFv3 configuration mode and then configure a grace period using the graceful-restart grace-period command.
PAGE 826
ipv6 ospf area Enable IPv6 OSPF on an interface. Syntax ipv6 ospf process id area area id To disable OSPFv6 routing for an interface, use the no ipv6 ospf process-id area area-id command. Parameters process-id Enter the process identification number. area area-id Specify the OSPF area. The range is from 0 to 65535. Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 ospf authentication Enable IPv6 OSPF on an interface.
PAGE 827
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Before you enable IPsec authentication on an OSPFv3 interface, first enable IPv6 unicast routing globally, configure an IPv6 address and enable OSPFv3 on the interface, and assign the interface to an area. An SPI value must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router.
PAGE 828
Usage Information This command provides the flexibility to fine-tune the timer values based on individual interface needs when you configure the ipv6 ospf bfd command in CONFIGURATION mode. Any timer values specified with this command overrides timers set using the bfd all-neighbors command. Using the no form of this command does not disable BFD if you configured BFD in CONFIGURATION mode. To disable BFD on a specific interface while BFD is configured in CONFIGURATION mode, use the keyword disable.
PAGE 829
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. By default, the dead interval is four times longer than the default ipv6 ospf hello-interval command. ipv6 ospf encryption Configure an IPsec encryption policy for OSPFv3 packets on an IPv6 interface.
PAGE 830
key Text string used in authentication. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted). For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 80 hex digits (encrypted). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 831
ipv6 ospf hello-interval Specify the time interval between the hello packets sent on the interface. Syntax Parameters ipv6 ospf hello—interval seconds seconds Defaults 10 seconds (Ethernet). Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the time interval in seconds as the time between hello packets. The range is from 1 to 65525 seconds. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 832
Parameters process-id Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the process identification number. The range is from 1 to 65535. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. maximum-paths Enable the software to forward packets over multiple paths. Syntax maximum-paths number To disable packet forwarding over multiple paths, use the no maximum-paths command. Parameters number Specify the number of paths. The range is from 1 to 64.
PAGE 833
Command Modes • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. ROUTER OSPF for OSPFv2 ROUTER OSPFv3 for OSPFv3 Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Added support for OSPFv3. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. By default, no interfaces are passive.
PAGE 834
metric-type typevalue (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords metric-type then the OSPFv3 link state type of 1 or 2 for default routes. The values are: • 1 for a type 1 external route • 2 for a type 2 external route The default is 2. route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of an established route map. If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). tag tag-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag to set the tag for routes redistributed into OSPFv3.
PAGE 835
Version 8.3.16.1 Usage Information Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You can configure an arbitrary value in the IP address for each router. However, each router ID must be unique. If this command is used on an OSPFv3 process that is already active (has neighbors), all the neighbor adjacencies are brought down immediately and new sessions are initiated with the new router ID. Example Dell(conf)#router ospf 100 Dell(conf-router_ospf)#router-id 1.1.1.
PAGE 836
Parameters interface interface Defaults none Command Modes EXEC (OPTIONAL) Displays information about the SAs used on a specified OSPFv3 interface, where interface is one of the following values: • For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter GigabitEthernet then the slot/ part number. • For a Port Channel interface, enter port-channel then the port channel number. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port number.
PAGE 837
Usage Information The show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 command output displays security associations set up for OSPFv3 links in IPsec authentication and encryption policies on the router. show ipv6 ospf interface View OSPFv3 interface information. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 ospf [interface] interface Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 838
show ipv6 ospf neighbor Display the OSPF neighbor information on a per-interface basis. Syntax show ipv6 ospf neighbor [interface] Parameters interface Defaults none Command Modes EXEC (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 839
39 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows you to apply routing policies to specific interfaces. To enable PBR, create a redirect list and apply it to the interface. After the redirect list is applied to the interface, all traffic passing through the interface is subject to the rules defined in the redirect list. PBR is supported by the Dell Networking operating software (OS) in MXL platform.
PAGE 840
Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Version 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series TeraScale. Version 7.4.2.0 Added support for LAG and VLAN interfaces. pre-Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. You can apply any number of redirect-groups to an interface. A redirect list can contain any number of configured rules.
PAGE 841
permit Configure a permit rule. A permit rule excludes the matching packets from PBR classification and routes them using conventional routing. Syntax permit {ip-protocol-number | protocol-type} {source mask | any | host ipaddress} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [bit] [operators] To remove the rule, use one of the following: Parameters • If you know the filter sequence number, use the no seq sequence-number syntax command.
PAGE 842
Command Modes Command History REDIRECT-LIST Version 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Version 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series TeraScale. Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. redirect Configure a rule for the redirect list.
PAGE 843
• source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x). any Enter the keyword any to specify that all traffic is subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. operator (OPTIONAL) For TCP and UDP parameters only.
PAGE 844
tunnel Enter the keyword tunnel to configure the tunnel setting. tunnel-id Enter the keyword tunnel-id to redirect the traffic. track Enter the keyword track to enable the tracking. track Enter the keyword track to track object-id. ip-protocol-number Enter the keyword ip-protocol-number then the number from 0 to 255 for the protocol identified in the IP protocol header.
PAGE 845
destination-portrange Defaults none Command Modes REDIRECT-LIST Command History Enter the keywords destination-port-range then the range of the start port to end port to be matched in the ACL rule in the ICAP rule. Version Description 9.7(0.0) Added support for thetrack-id on the MXL. 9.4(0.0) Added support for removing the Sonet interface on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show cam pbr Display the PBR CAM content.
PAGE 846
• show cam-usage – displays the CAM usage on ACL, router, or switch. show ip redirect-list View the redirect list configuration and the interfaces it is applied to. Syntax show ip redirect-list redirect-list-name Parameters Command Modes Command History Example 846 redirect-list-name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Enter the name of a configured Redirect list. Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for removing the Sonet interface on the MXL. Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 847
40 PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) The protocol-independent multicast (PIM) commands are supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). This chapter contains the following sections: • IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands • IPv6 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands The following describes the IPv4 PIM-sparse mode (PIM-SM) commands. clear ip pim rp-mapping The bootstrap router (BSR) feature uses this command to remove all or particular rendezvous point (RP) advertisement.
PAGE 848
VLT node to download multicast routes learned by the peer. Both local and synced routes are removed from the local VLT node multicast route table. The peer VLT node clears synced routes from the node. If you use this command on a peer VLT node, only the synced routes are deleted from the multicast route table. debug ip pim View IP PIM debugging messages.
PAGE 849
ip pim bsr-border Define the border of PIM domain by filtering inbound and outbound PIM-BSR messages per interface. Syntax ip pim bsr-border To return to the default value, use the no ip pim bsr-border command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command is applied to the subsequent PIM-BSR. Existing BSR advertisements are cleaned up by timeout.
PAGE 850
ip pim dr-priority Change the designated router (DR) priority for the interface. Syntax ip pim dr-priority priority-value To remove the DR priority value assigned, use the no ip pim dr-priority command. Parameters priority-value Defaults 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Enter a number. Preference is given to larger/higher number. The range is from 0 to 4294967294. The default is 1. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 851
ip pim ingress-interface-map When the Dell Networking system is the RP, statically map potential incoming interfaces to (*,G) entries to create a lossless multicast forwarding environment. Syntax Parameters ip pim ingress-interface-map std-access-list std-access-list Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the name of a standard access list. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 852
Defaults 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip pim register-filter To prevent a PIM source DR from sending register packets to an RP for the specified multicast source and group, use this feature. Syntax ip pim register-filter access-list To return to the default, use the no ip pim register-filter access-list command. Parameters access-list Defaults Not configured.
PAGE 853
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. First-hop routers use this address by to send register packets on behalf of source multicast hosts. The RP addresses are stored in the order in which they are entered. RP addresses learned using BSR take priority over static RP addresses. Without the override option, RPs advertised by the BSR updates take precedence over the statically configured RPs.
PAGE 854
Command Modes Command History Usage Information INTERFACE Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The interface must be enabled (the no shutdown command) and not have the switchport command configured. Multicast must also be enabled globally (using the ip multicast-lag-hashing command). PIM is supported on the port-channel interface. ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer Enable expiry timers globally for all sources, or for a specific set of (S,G) pairs an access list defines.
PAGE 855
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command is applicable to last hop routers on the shared tree towards the rendezvous point (RP). no ip pim snooping dr-flood Disable the flooding of multicast packets to the PIM designated router. Syntax no ip pim snooping dr-flood To re-enable the flooding of multicast packets to the PIM designated router, use the ip pim snooping dr-flood command. Defaults Enabled.
PAGE 856
This system is the Bootstrap Router (v2) BSR address: 7.7.7.7 (?) Uptime: 16:59:06, BSR Priority: 0, Hash mask length: 30 Next bootstrap message in 00:00:08 This system is a candidate BSR Candidate BSR address: 7.7.7.7, priority: 0, hash mask length: 30 show ip pim interface View information on the interfaces with IP PIM enabled. Syntax show ip pim interface Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example 856 • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 857
show ip pim neighbor View PIM neighbors. Syntax Command Modes Command History Usage Information show ip pim neighbor • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip pim neighbor command shown in the following example. Field Description Neighbor address Displays the IP address of the PIM neighbor.
PAGE 858
Command Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#sh ip pim rp Group RP 224.2.197.115 165.87.20.4 224.2.217.146 165.87.20.4 224.3.3.3 165.87.20.4 225.1.2.1 165.87.20.4 225.1.2.2 165.87.20.4 229.1.2.1 165.87.20.4 229.1.2.2 165.87.20.4 Dell# Example (Mapping) Dell#sh ip pim rp mapping Group(s): 224.0.0.0/4 RP: 165.87.20.4, v2 Info source: 165.87.20.
PAGE 859
Example (#2) Field Description Interface Displays the VLAN interfaces with PIM-SM snooping enabled. Ver/Mode Displays the PIM version number for each VLAN interface with PIM-SM snooping enabled: • v2 = PIM version 2 • S = PIM Sparse mode Nbr Count Displays the number of neighbors learned through PIM-SM snooping on the interface. DR Prio Displays the Designated Router priority value configured on the interface (ip pim dr-priority command).
PAGE 860
Field Description • DR prio/Mode Example v2 = PIM version 2 Displays the Designated Router priority and the mode: • 1 = default Designated Router priority (use the ip pim dr-priority command) • DR = Designated Router • S = Sparse mode Dell#show ip pim snooping neighbor Neighbor Interface Address 165.87.32.2 Vl 2 [Gi 4/13 ] 165.87.32.10 Vl 2 [Gi 4/11 ] 165.87.32.
PAGE 861
Field Example Description • S = PIM Sparse Mode • C = directly connected • L = local to the multicast group • P = route was pruned • R = the forwarding entry is pointing toward the RP • F = Dell Networking OS is registering this entry for a multicast source • T = packets were received via Shortest Tree Path • J = first packet from the last hop router is received and the entry is ready to switch to SPT • K=acknowledge pending state Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding
PAGE 862
Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 863
source-address Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) (OPTIONAL) Enter the source address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip pim tib command shown in the following example. Field Description (S, G) Displays the entry in the multicast PIM database. uptime Displays the amount of time the entry has been in the PIM route table.
PAGE 864
Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 8/0 (*, 226.1.1.2), uptime 00:18:08, expires 00:00:52, RP 10.211.2.1, flags: SCJ Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 4/23, RPF neighbor 10.211.1.2 Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 8/0 (*, 226.1.1.3), uptime 00:18:08, expires 00:00:52, RP 10.211.2.1, flags: SCJ Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 4/23, RPF neighbor 10.211.1.2 Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 8/0 (*, 226.1.1.4), uptime 00:18:08, expires 00:00:52, RP 10.211.2.
PAGE 865
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command is applied to the subsequent PIM-BSR messages. Existing BSR advertisements are cleaned up by time-out. ipv6 pim bsr-candidate Configure the router as a bootstrap (BSR) candidate. Syntax ipv6 pim bsr-candidate interface [hash-mask-length] [priority] To disable the bootstrap candidate, use the no ipv6 pim bsr-candidate command.
PAGE 866
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The router with the largest value assigned to an interface becomes the designated router. If two interfaces contain the same designated router priority value, the interface with the largest interface IP address becomes the designated router. ipv6 pim join-filter Permit or deny PIM Join/Prune messages on an interface using an access list.
PAGE 867
ipv6 pim neighbor-filter Prevent the system from forming a PIM adjacency with a neighboring system. Syntax Parameters ipv6 pim neighbor-filter {access-list} access-list Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the name of a standard access list. Maximum 16 characters. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Do not enter this command before creating the access-list.
PAGE 868
group-address group-address mask Enter the keywords group-address then the group address in the x:x:x:x::x format and then the mask in /nn format to assign that group address to the RP. override Enter the keyword override to override the BSR updates with static RP. The override takes effect immediately during enable/disable. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. NOTE: This option is applicable to multicast group range.
PAGE 869
ipv6 pim sparse-mode Enable IPv6 PIM sparse mode on the interface. Syntax ipv6 pim sparse-mode To disable IPv6 PIM sparse mode, use the no ipv6 pim sparse-mode command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Enable the interface (use the no shutdown command) and not have the switchport command configured. Also enable Multicast globally. PIM is supported on the port-channel interface.
PAGE 870
Example Dell#show ipv6 pim bsr-router PIMv2 Bootstrap information This system is the Bootstrap Router (v2) BSR address: 14::2 Uptime: 00:02:54, BSR Priority: 0, Hash mask length: 126 Next bootstrap message in 00:00:06 This system is a candidate BSR Candidate BSR address: 14::2, priority: 0, hash mask length: 126 Dell show ipv6 pim interface Display IPv6 PIM enabled interfaces. Syntax show ipv6 pim interface Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 871
Example Dell#show ipv6 pim neighbor detail Neighbor Interface Uptime/Expires Ver DR Address Prio/Mode fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:6265 Gi 10/3 00:07:39/00:01:42 v2 1 / S 165:87:50::6 Dell# show ipv6 pim rp View all multicast groups-to-RP mappings. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History show ipv6 pim rp [mapping | group-address] mapping (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword mapping to display the multicast groups-to-RP mapping and information on how RP is learnt.
PAGE 872
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. source-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the source address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 873
41 Port Monitoring The port monitoring feature allows you to monitor network traffic by forwarding a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port to another port. Important Points to Remember • Port monitoring is supported on physical ports and logical interfaces, such as Port Channels and virtual local area networks (VLANs). • The monitoring (destination, “MG”) and monitored (source, “MD”) ports must be on the same switch.
PAGE 874
flow-based enable Enable flow-based monitoring. Syntax flow-based enable To disable flow-based monitoring, use the no flow-based enable command. Defaults Disabled, that is flow-based monitoring is not applied. Command Modes MONITOR SESSION (conf-mon-sess-session-ID) Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for the RPM/ERPM. Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. Version 7.4.1.
PAGE 875
Usage Information The monitor command is saved in the running configuration at Monitor Session mode level and can be restored after a chassis reload. Example Dell(conf)# monitor session 60 Dell(conf-mon-sess-60) Related Command show monitor session — displays the monitor session. show running-config monitor session — displays the running configuration of a monitor session. show config Display the current monitor session configuration.
PAGE 876
------ ------------1 Vl 10 N/A Related Commands ----------- --- ---- --------- Te 0/8 rx Flow N/A monitor session — creates a session for monitoring. show running-config monitor session Display the running configuration of all monitor sessions or a specific session. Syntax show running-config monitor session {session-ID} To display the running configuration for all monitor sessions, use the show running-config monitor session command.
PAGE 877
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN interface enter the keyword VLAN then by a number range from 1 to 4094. • For a port channel interface, enter the keyword LAG then port channel and the port-channel id . range Enter the keyword range to specify a list of interfaces.
PAGE 878
42 Private VLAN (PVLAN) Private VLANs extend the Dell Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same private VLAN. A private VLAN partitions a traditional VLAN into subdomains identified by a primary and secondary VLAN pair. The Dell Networking OS private VLAN implementation is based on RFC 3069. For more information, refer to the following commands. The command output is augmented in the Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.
PAGE 879
– A trunk port in Tagged mode carries primary or secondary VLAN traffic. The tag on the packet helps identify the VLAN to which the packet belongs. – A trunk port can also belong to a regular VLAN (non-private VLAN). ip local-proxy-arp Enable/disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN. Syntax [no] ip local-proxy-arp To disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN, use the no ip localproxy-arp command in INTERFACE VLAN mode for the primary VLAN.
PAGE 880
Parameters vlan-list Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Usage Information Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the list of secondary VLANs to associate with the selected primary VLAN. The list can be in comma-delimited or hyphenated-range format, following the convention for the range input. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The list of secondary VLANs can be: • Specified in comma-delimited or hyphenated-range format.
PAGE 881
• mode ode to community or isolated even before associating it to a primary VLAN. This secondary VLAN continues to work normally as a normal VLAN even though it is not associated to a primary VLAN. (A syslog message indicates this.) • must not have a port in it when VLAN mode is being set. Only ports (and port channels) configured as promiscuous, host, or PVLAN trunk ports (as previously described) can be added to the PVLAN. No other regular ports can be added to the PVLAN.
PAGE 882
Example (All) Field Description Status States whether the interface is operationally up or down.
PAGE 883
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Examples of all types of command output are shown below. The first type of output is the result of not entering an optional keyword. It displays a detailed list of all PVLANs and their member VLANs and interfaces. The other types of output show details about PVLAN subsets. The following describes the show private-vlan command shown in the Examples below.
PAGE 884
Usage Information If the VLAN ID is that of a primary VLAN, the entire private VLAN output is displayed, as shown below. If the VLAN ID is a secondary VLAN, only its primary VLAN and its particular secondary VLAN properties are displayed, as shown in the second Example.
PAGE 885
show vlan private-vlan mapping — displays the primary-secondary VLAN mapping. switchport mode private-vlan — sets PVLAN mode of the selected port. switchport mode private-vlan Set PVLAN mode of the selected port. Syntax [no] switchport mode private-vlan {host | promiscuous | trunk} To remove PVLAN mode from the selected port, use the no switchport mode private-vlan command. Parameters host Enter the keyword host to configure the selected port or port channel as an isolated interface in a PVLAN.
PAGE 886
43 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) implementation of per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning tree protocol, but it creates a separate spanning tree for each VLAN configured. NOTE: For easier command line entry, the plus (+) sign is not used at the command line. description Enter a description of the PVST+. Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command.
PAGE 887
edge-port bpdufilter default Enable BPDU Filter globally to filter transmission of BPDU on port fast enabled interfaces. Syntax edge-port bpdufilter default To disable global bpdu filter default, use the no edge-port bpdufilter default command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION (The prompt is “config-pvst”.) Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 888
Te 5/50 Desg No Related Commands 128.459 128 2000 FWD 0 P2P No protocol spanning-tree pvst — enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. protocol spanning-tree pvst To enable PVST+ on a device, enter the PVST+ mode. Syntax protocol spanning-tree pvst To disable PVST+, use the disable command. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 889
guard Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel then a number: The range is 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard enabled on a PVST interface and the current port state.
PAGE 890
Example Dell#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 2 VLAN 2 Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 001e.c9f1.00f3 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 001e.c9f1.00f3 Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bpdu filter disabled globally We are the root of VLAN 2 Current root has priority 32768, Address 001e.c9f1.
PAGE 891
Example (Guard) Dell#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 guard Interface Name Instance Sts Guard type Bpdu Filter --------- -------- --------- ---------- ----------TenGig 0/1 0 INCON(Root) Rootguard No TenGig 0/2 0 FWD Loopguard No TenGig 0/3 0 EDS(Shut) Bpduguard No Related Commands spanning-tree pvst — configure PVST+ on an interface.
PAGE 892
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The BPDU guard option prevents the port from participating in an active STP topology in case a BPDU appears on a port unintentionally, or is misconfigured, or is subject to a DOS attack. This option places the port into the Error Disable state if a BPDU appears, and a message is logged so that the administrator can take corrective action.
PAGE 893
Related Commands show spanning-tree pvst — views the PVST+ configuration. tc-flush-standard Enable the MAC address flushing after receiving every topology change notification. Syntax tc-flush-standard To disable, use the no tc-flush-standard command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. By default, the system implements an optimized flush mechanism for PVST+.
PAGE 894
vlan forward-delay Set the amount of time the interface waits in the Listening state and the Learning state before transitioning to the Forwarding state. Syntax vlan vlan-id forward-delay seconds To return to the default setting, use the no vlan forward-delay command. Parameters vlan vlan-range Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN numbers. The range is from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 895
vlan max-age — changes the time interval before PVST+ refreshes. show spanning-tree pvst — displays the PVST+ configuration. vlan max-age To maintain configuration information before refreshing that information, set the time interval for the PVST+ bridge. Syntax vlan vlan-range max-age seconds To return to the default, use the no vlan max-age command. Parameters vlan vlan-range Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN numbers. The range is from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 896
44 Quality of Service (QoS) The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) commands for quality of service (QoS) include traffic conditioning and congestion control. This chapter contains the following sections: • Global Configuration Commands • Per-Port QoS Commands • Policy-Based QoS Commands Global Configuration Commands There are only two global configuration QoS commands.
PAGE 897
Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Per-Port QoS Commands Per-port QoS (port-based QoS) allows you to define the QoS configuration on a per-physical-port basis. dot1p-priority Assign a value to the IEEE 802.1p bits on the traffic this interface receives. Syntax dot1p-priority priority-value To delete the IEEE 802.1p configuration on the interface, use the no dot1p-priority command.
PAGE 898
rate police Police the incoming traffic rate on the selected interface. Syntax rate police [kbps] committed-rate [burst-KB] [peak [kbps] peak-rate [burstKB]] [vlan vlan-id] Parameters kbps Enter the keyword kbps to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). Make the following value a multiple of 64. The range is from 0 to 40000000. The default granularity is Megabits per second (Mbps). committed-rate Enter the bandwidth in Mbps. The range is from 0 to 10000.
PAGE 899
burst-KB (OPTIONAL) Enter the burst size in KB. The range is from 0 to 10000. The default is 50. Defaults Granularity for rate is Mbps unless you use the kbps option. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. rate-shape — shapes traffic output as part of the designated policy.
PAGE 900
You can apply this command on both physical interfaces and port channels. When you set the service-class dynamic for a port channel, the physical interfaces assigned to the port channel are automatically configured; you cannot assign the service-class dynamic command to individual interfaces in a port channel. • All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless you enable the service-class dynamic dot1p command on an interface or globally.
PAGE 901
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. After you configure a unicast queue as strict-priority, that particular queue, on the entire chassis, is treated as a strict-priority queue. Traffic for a strict priority is scheduled before any other queues are serviced. For example, if you send 100% line rate traffic over the SP queue, it starves all other queues on the ports on which this traffic is flowing.
PAGE 902
class-map Create/access a class map. Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality-of-service policies to each class. Syntax class-map {match-all | match-any} class-map-name [layer2] Parameters match-all Determines how packets are evaluated when multiple match criteria exist. Enter the keywords match-all to determine that the packets must meet all the match criteria in order to be a member of the class.
PAGE 903
clear qos statistics Clears matched packets. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History clear qos statistics interface-name interface-name Enter one of the following keywords: • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FortyGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
PAGE 904
ip ssh rekey Configures the time rekey-interval or volume rekey-limit threshold at which to re-generate the SSH key during an SSH session. Syntax ip ssh rekey [time rekey-interval] [volume rekey-limit] To reset to the default, use no ip ssh rekey [time rekey-interval] [volume rekeylimit] command. Parameters time minutes Enter the keywords time then the amount of time in minutes. The range is from 10 to 1440 minutes.
PAGE 905
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command. After the class map is identified, you can configure the match criteria. For class-map match-any, a maximum of five ACL match criteria are allowed. For class-map match-all, only one ACL match criteria is allowed. Related Commands class-map — identifies the class map. match ip vlan Uses a VLAN as the match criterion for an L3 class map.
PAGE 906
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.4(0.0) Usage Information Introduced on the MXL switch. To access this command, enter the class-map command. After the class map is identified, you can configure the match criteria.
PAGE 907
ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to support IPv6 traffic ip-any Enter the keyword ip-any to support IPv4 and IPv6 traffic. dscp-list Enter the IP DSCP values that is to be the match criteria. Separate values by commas — no spaces ( 1,2,3 ) or indicate a list of values separated by a hyphen (1-3). The range is from 0 to 63. set-ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords set-ip-dscp then the IP DSCP value. The matched traffic is marked with the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63.
PAGE 908
set-ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords set-ip-dscp then the IP DSCP value. The matched traffic is marked with the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. Defaults none Command Modes CLASS-MAP CONFIGURATION (config-class-map) Command History Usage Information Version 9.5(0.0) Introduced the support for ipv6 and ip-any options on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To access this command, enter the class-map command.
PAGE 909
Parameters dot1p-list Defaults none Command Modes CLASS-MAP Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a dot1p value. The range is from 0 to 7. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command. After the class map is identified, you can configure the match criteria. Related Commands class-map — identifies the class map. match mac vlan Configure a match criterion for a class map based on VLAN ID.
PAGE 910
Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If the rate shape exists in both aggregate and per-queue qos-policy, minimum of two take effect. Some of all Queue-rate will not exceed aggregate. Related Commands policy-map-output — creates an output policy map. policy-map-input Create an input policy map. Syntax policy-map-input policy-map-name [layer2] To remove an input policy map, use the no policy-map-input policy-map-name [layer2] command.
PAGE 911
Parameters policy-map-name Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Enter the name for the policy map in character format (32 characters maximum). Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To assign traffic to different flows using QoS policy, use the Output Policy map.
PAGE 912
qos-policy-output Create a QoS output policy. Syntax qos-policy-output qos-policy-name To remove an existing output QoS policy, use the no qos-policy-output qos-policy-name command. Parameters qos-policy-name Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter your output QoS policy name in character format (32 characters maximum). Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To specify the name of the output QoS policy, use this command.
PAGE 913
Version 8.3.16.1 Related Commands Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. rate police — specifies traffic policing on the selected interface. qos-policy-input — creates a QoS output policy. rate shape Shape the traffic output on the selected interface. Syntax Parameters rate shape [kbps] rate [burst-KB] kbps Enter the keyword kbps to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). Make the following value a multiple of 64. The range is from 0 to 40000000.
PAGE 914
Defaults Layer 3 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You can attach a single policy-map to one or more interfaces to specify the service-policy for those interfaces. A policy map attached to an interface can be modified. NOTE: The service-policy commands are not allowed on a port channel.
PAGE 915
To remove the queue assignment, use the no service-queue queue-id [class-map classmap-name] [qos-policy qos-policy-name] command. Parameters queue-id Enter the value used to identify a queue. The range is from 0 to 3 (four queues per interface; four queues are reserved for control traffic). class-map classmap-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword class-map then the class map name assigned to the queue in character format (32 character maximum). NOTE: This option is available under policy-map-input only.
PAGE 916
show qos class-map View the current class map information. Syntax show qos class-map [class-name] Parameters Defaults class-name (Optional) Enter the name of a configured class map. none Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show qos class-map Class-map match-any CM Match ip access-group ACL Related Commands class-map — identifies the class map.
PAGE 917
Command History Example (IPv4) Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 918
show qos policy-map-output View the output QoS policy map details. Syntax show qos policy-map-output [policy-map-name] [qos-policy-output qos-policyname] Parameters Defaults policy-map-name Enter the policy map name. qos-policy-output qos-policy-name Enter the keyword qos-policy-output then the QoS policy name. none Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 919
show qos qos-policy-output View the output QoS policy details. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Example show qos qos-policy-output [qos-policy-name] qos-policy-name Enter the QoS policy name. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 920
Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show qos statistics Interface Te 0/20 Queue# Matched Pkts 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 Dell# show qos wred-profile View the WRED profile details. Syntax show qos wred-profile wred-profile-name Parameters Defaults wred-profile-name Enter the WRED profile name to view the profile details. none Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 921
Command Modes Command History Usage Information EXEC Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This feature allows you to determine if the CAM has enough space available before applying the configuration on an interface. An input policy map with both Trust and Class-map configuration, the Class-map rules are ignored and only the Trust rule is programmed in the CAM.
PAGE 922
trust Specify dynamic classification (DSCP) or dot1p to trust. Syntax trust {diffserv [fallback]| dot1p [fallback]} Parameters diffserv Enter the keyword diffserv to specify trust of DSCP markings. dot1p Enter the keyword dot1p to specify trust dot1p configuration. fallback Enter the keyword fallback to classify packets according to their DSCP value as a secondary option in case no match occurs against the configured class maps.
PAGE 923
Parameters yellow | green Enter the keyword yellow for yellow traffic. A DSCP value of xxx110 and xxx101 maps to yellow. Enter the keyword green for green traffic. A DSCP value of xxx0xx maps to green. profile-name Enter your WRED profile name in character format (16 character maximum). Or use one of the five pre-defined WRED profile names. Pre-defined Profiles: wred_drop, wred-ge_y, wred_ge_g, wred_teng_y, wred_teng_.
PAGE 924
Usage Information Version 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. When you enable wred ecn, and the number of packets in the queue is below the minimum threshold, packets are transmitted per the usual WRED treatment.
PAGE 925
dscp Sets the number of specific DSCP values for a color map profile to yellow or red. Syntax dscp {yellow | red} [list-dscp-values] To remove a color policy map profile, use the no dscp {yellow | red} [dscp-list] command. Parameters Yellow Enter the yellow keyword. Traffic marked as yellow delivers traffic to the egress queue which either transmits the packet if it has available bandwidth or drops the packet due to no ability to send. Red Enter the red keyword. Traffic marked as red is dropped.
PAGE 926
Related Commands qos dscp-color-map — configures the DSCP color map qos dscp-color-policy— configures a DSCP color policy qos dscp-color-map Configure the DSCP color map. Syntax qos dscp-color-map map-name To remove a color map, use the no qos dscp-color-map map-name command. Parameters map-name Enter the name of the DSCP color map. The map name can have a maximum of 32 characters. Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 927
qos dscp-color-policy Associates the DSCP color map profile with an interface so that all IP packets received on it is given a color based on that color map. Syntax dscp-color-policy color-map-profile-name To remove a color policy map profile, use the no dscp-color-policy color-map-profile-name command. Parameters color-map-profilename Enter the color map profile name. The name can have a maximum of 32 characters.
PAGE 928
show qos dscp-color-policy Display DSCP color policy configuration for one or all interfaces. Syntax show qos dscp-color-policy {summary [interface] | detail {interface}} Parameters summary Enter the summary keyword to display summary information about a color policy on one or more interfaces. Detail Enter the detail keyword to display detailed information about a color policy on one or more interfaces. interface Enter the name of the interface that has color policy configured.
PAGE 929
Interface TE 1/10/1 TE 1/11/1 dscp-color-map mapONE mapTWO Display summary information about a color policy on a specific interface. Dell# show qos dscp-color-policy summary te 1/10/1 Interface dscp-color-map TE 1/10/1 mapONE Displayed detailed color policy information on an interface. Dell# show qos dscp-color-policy detail te 1/10/1 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/10/1 Dscp-color-map mapONE yellow 4,7 red 20,30 Display summary information about a color policy on one or more interfaces.
PAGE 930
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Example Version Description 9.7(0.1) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.1) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL. Display all DSCP color maps.
PAGE 931
45 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Routing information protocol (RIP) is a distance vector routing protocol. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports both RIP version 1 (RIPv1) and RIP version 2 (RIPv2). The implementation of RIP is based on IETF RFCs 2453 and RFC 1058. For more information about configuring RIP, refer to the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. auto-summary Restore the default behavior of automatic summarization of subnet routes into network routes.
PAGE 932
debug ip rip Examine RIP routing information for troubleshooting. Syntax debug ip rip [interface | database | events [interface] | packet [interface] | trigger] To turn off debugging output, use the no debug ip rip command. Parameters Command Modes Command History interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and ID as one of the following: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
PAGE 933
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The default route must be present in the switch routing table for the default-information originate command to take effect. default-metric Change the default metric for routes. To ensure that all redistributed routes use the same metric value, use this command with the redistribute command.
PAGE 934
distance Assign a weight (for prioritization) to all routes in the RIP routing table or to a specific route. Lower weights (“administrative distance”) are preferred. Syntax distance weight [ip-address mask [prefix-name]] To return to the default values, use the no distance weight [ip-address mask] command. Parameters weight Enter a number from 1 to 255 for the weight (for prioritization). The default is 120. ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.
PAGE 935
distribute-list out Configure a filter for outgoing routing updates. Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name out [interface | bgp | connected | ospf | static] To delete the filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name out command. Parameters prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured prefix list. interface (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type slot/port as one of the following: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 936
ip rip receive version To receive specific versions of RIP, set the interface. The RIP version you set on the interface overrides the version command in ROUTER RIP mode. Syntax ip rip receive version [1] [2] To return to the default, use the no ip rip receive version command. Parameters 1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 1 for RIP version 1. 2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 2 for RIP version 2. Defaults RIPv1 and RIPv2 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 937
ip split-horizon Enable split-horizon for RIP data on the interface. As described in RFC 2453, the split-horizon scheme prevents any routes learned over a specific interface to be sent back out that interface. Syntax ip split-horizon To disable split-horizon, use the no ip split-horizon command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip poison-reverse — sets the prefix for RIP routing updates.
PAGE 938
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. When a neighbor router is identified, unicast data exchanges occur. Multiple neighbor routers are possible. To ensure that only specific interfaces are receiving and sending data, use the passive-interface command with the neighbor command. Related Commands passive-interface — sets the interface to only listen to RIP broadcasts. network Enable RIP for a specified network.
PAGE 939
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Version 8.3.16.1 • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 940
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Version 8.3.16.1 • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 941
redistribute ospf Redistribute routing information from an OSPF process. Syntax redistribute ospf process-id [match external {1 | 2} | match internal | metric metric-value] [route-map map-name] To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute ospf process-id [match external {1 | 2} | match internal | metric metric-value] [route-map map-name] command. Parameters process-id Enter a number that corresponds to the OSPF process ID to redistribute. The range is from 1 to 65355.
PAGE 942
show config Display the changes you made to the RIP configuration. The default values are not shown. Syntax show config Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 172.31.0.0 passive-interface GigabitEthernet 0/1 Dell(conf-router_rip)# show ip rip database Display the routes that RIP learns. If the switch learned no RIP routes, no output is generated.
PAGE 943
210.250.40.0/24 [50/2] via [50/2] via 210.250.40.0/24 207.250.53.0/24 [50/2] via [50/2] via [50/2] via 207.250.53.0/24 208.250.42.0/24 [50/2] via [50/2] via [50/2] via 208.250.42.0/24 1.1.18.2, 00:00:14, Vlan 18 1.1.130.2, 00:00:12, Port-channel 30 auto-summary 1.1.120.2, 00:00:55, Port-channel 20 1.1.130.2, 00:00:12, Port-channel 30 1.1.10.2, 00:00:18, Vlan 10 auto-summary 1.1.120.2, 00:00:55, Port-channel 20 1.1.130.2, 00:00:12, Port-channel 30 1.1.10.
PAGE 944
Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information holddown Enter the number of seconds to specify a time interval during which the route is marked as unreachable but still sending RIP packets. The holddown value should be at least three times the update timer value. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295. The default is 180 seconds. flush Enter the number of seconds to specify the time interval during which the route is advertised as unreachable.
PAGE 945
46 Remote Monitoring (RMON) The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) remote monitoring (RMON) is based on IEEE standards, providing both 32-bit and 64bit monitoring and long-term statistics collection.
PAGE 946
delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. absolute Enter the keyword absolute to test each MIB variable directly. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. rising-threshold value event-number Enter the keywords rising-threshold then the value (32 bit) the risingthreshold alarm is either triggered or reset. Then enter the event-number to trigger when the rising threshold exceeds its limit.
PAGE 947
Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION INTERFACE (config-if) Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. rmon collection statistics Enable RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface. Syntax rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} [owner name] To remove RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface, use the no rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} command.
PAGE 948
Defaults As noted in the Parameters section. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. rmon hc-alarm Set an alarm on any MIB object. Syntax rmon hc-alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold value event-number falling-threshold value event-number [owner string] To disable the alarm, use the no rmon hc-alarm number command. Parameters number Enter the alarm integer number from 1 to 65535.
PAGE 949
show rmon Display the RMON running status including the memory usage. Syntax show rmon Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell# show rmon RMON status total memory used 218840 bytes.
PAGE 950
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Dell# 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 show rmon events Display the contents of the RMON event table.
PAGE 951
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Dell# 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 show rmon hc-alarm Display the contents of RMON High-Capacity alarm table. Syntax Parameters show rmon hc-alarm [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON High-Capacity alarm table in an easy-to-read format. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 952
show rmon history Display the contents of the RMON Ethernet history table. Syntax show rmon history [index] [brief] Parameters index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON Ethernet history table in an easy-to-read format Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 953
Usage Information The log table has a maximum of 500 entries. If the log exceeds that maximum, the oldest log entry is purged to allow room for the new entry. Example (Index) Dell#show rmon log 2 RMON log entry, alarm table index 2, log index 1 log time: 14638 (THU AUG 12 22:10:40 2004) description: 2 Dell# Example (Brief) Dell#show rmon log br eventIndex description -----------------------------2 2 4 4 Dell# show rmon statistics Display the contents of RMON Ethernet statistics table.
PAGE 954
HC bytes received: 0 HC 64bytes packets overflow: 0 HC 64bytes packets: 0 HC 65-127 bytes packets overflow: 0 HC 65-127 bytes packets: 0 HC 128-255 bytes packets overflow: 0 HC 128-255 bytes packets: 0 HC 256-511 bytes packets overflow: 0 HC 256-511 bytes packets: 0 HC 512-1023 bytes packets overflow: 0 HC 512-1023 bytes packets: 0 HC 1024-1518 bytes packets overflow: 0 HC 1024-1518 bytes packets: 0 Dell# Example (Brief) 954 Dell#show rmon statistics br index ifIndex interface ----------------------------
PAGE 955
47 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) implementation of rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning-tree protocol. The RSTP algorithm configures connectivity throughout a bridged local area network (LAN) that is comprised of LANs interconnected by bridges. bridge-priority Set the bridge priority for RSTP. Syntax bridge-priority priority-value To return to the default value, use the no bridge-priority command.
PAGE 956
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Optionally, enter an in or out parameter with the optional interface: events Command Modes Command History Example • For Receive, enter in. • For Transmit, enter out. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug RSTP events. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 957
Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol spanning-tree rstp — enters SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. forward-delay Configure the amount of time the interface waits in the Listening State and the Learning State before transitioning to the Forwarding State. Syntax forward-delay seconds To return to the default setting, use the no forward-delay command.
PAGE 958
Usage Information The hello time is encoded in BPDUs in increments of 1/256ths of a second. The standard minimum hello time in seconds is 1 second, which is encoded as 256. Millisecond hello times are encoded using values less than 256; the millisecond hello time equals (x/1000)*256. When you configure millisecond hellos, the default hello interval of 2 seconds is still used for edge ports; the millisecond hello interval is not used.
PAGE 959
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol spanning-tree rstp To configure RSTP, enter RSTP mode. Syntax protocol spanning-tree rstp To exit RSTP mode, use the exit command. Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information RSTP is not enabled when you enter RSTP mode.
PAGE 960
Parameters cost port-cost Enter the keyword cost then the port cost value. The range is from 1 to 200000.
PAGE 961
Example • If a BPDU is received from a remote device, BPDU guard places the port in an Err-Disabled Blocking state and no traffic is forwarded on the port. • If no BPDU is received from a remote device, loop guard places the port in a Loop-Inconsistent Blocking state and no traffic is forwarded on the port.
PAGE 962
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The BPDU guard option prevents the port from participating in an active STP topology in case a BPDU appears on a port unintentionally, or is misconfigured, or is subject to a DOS attack. This option places the port into an Error Disable state if a BPDU appears and a message is logged so that the administrator can take corrective action.
PAGE 963
Usage Information By default, the system implements an optimized flush mechanism for RSTP. This implementation helps in flushing MAC addresses only when necessary (and less often), allowing for faster convergence during topology changes. However, if a standards-based flush mechanism is needed, you can turn on this knob command to enable flushing MAC addresses after receiving every topology change notification.
PAGE 964
48 Security This chapter contains various types of security commands offered in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). The commands are listed in the following sections: • AAA Accounting Commands • Authorization and Privilege Commands • Authentication and Password Commands • RADIUS Commands • TACACS+ Commands • SSH Server and SCP Commands • Secure DHCP Commands For configuration details, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 965
commands {level| role role-name} Enter the keyword command then a privilege level for accounting of commands executed at that privilege level or enter the keyword role then the role name for accounting of commands executed by a user with that user role. name | default Enter one of the following: For default, the default accounting methods used.
PAGE 966
To permit accounting records to users with user name value of NULL, use the no aaa accounting suppress null-username command. Defaults Accounting records are recorded for all users. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The system issues accounting records for all users on the system, including users whose username string, due to protocol translation, is NULL.
PAGE 967
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL show accounting Display the active accounting sessions for each online user.
PAGE 968
Parameters exec Enter the keyword exec to apply an EXEC level accounting method list. commands {level | role role-name} Enter the keywords commands followed by either a privilege level for accounting of commands executed at that privilege level, or enter the keyword role then the role name for authorization of commands executed by a user with that user role. method-list Enter a method list that you defined using the aaa accounting exec or aaa accounting commands.
PAGE 969
Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. aaa authorization role-only Configure authentication to use the user’s role only when determining if access to commands is permitted. Syntax aaa authorization role-only To return to the default setting, use the no aaa authentication role-only command. Parameters name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters. It cannot be one of the system defined roles (sysadmin, secadmin, netadmin, netoperator).
PAGE 970
aaa authorization config-commands Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC level commands. Syntax aaa authorization config-commands Disable authorization checking for CONFIGURATION level commands using the no aaa authorization config-commands command. Defaults Enabled when you configure aaa authorization commands command. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 971
To delete access to a level and command, use the no privilege mode level level command command. Parameters mode level level Enter one of the following keywords as the mode for which you are controlling access: • configure for CONFIGURATION mode • exec for EXEC mode • interface for INTERFACE modes • line for LINE mode • route-map for ROUTE-MAP mode • router for ROUTER OSPF, ROUTER RIP, ROUTER ISIS and ROUTER BGP modes Enter the keyword level then a number for the access level.
PAGE 972
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Authentication and Password Commands To manage access to the system, use the following the commands. aaa authentication enable Configure AAA Authentication method lists for user access to EXEC privilege mode (the “Enable” access). Syntax aaa authentication enable {default | method-list-name} method [... method2] To return to the default setting, use the no aaa authentication enable {default | methodlist-name} method [...
PAGE 973
third method, if necessary) automatically. For example, if the TACACS+ server is reachable, but the server key is invalid, the system proceeds to the next authentication method. The TACACS+ is incorrect, but the user is still authenticated by the secondary method. Related Commands enable password — changes the password for the enable command. login authentication — enables AAA login authentication on the terminal lines. password — creates a password. radius-server host — specifies a RADIUS server host.
PAGE 974
Usage Information By default, the locally configured username password is used. If you configure aaa authentication login default, the system uses the methods this command defines for login instead. Methods configured with the aaa authentication login command are evaluated in the order they are configured. If users encounter an error with the first method listed, the Dell Networking OS applies the next method configured. If users fail the first method listed, no other methods are applied.
PAGE 975
enable password Change the password for the enable command. Syntax enable password [level level] [encryption-type] password To delete a password, use the no enable password [encryption-type] password [level level] command. Parameters level level (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level then a number as the level of access. The range is from 1 to 15. encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 7 or 0 as the encryption type. Enter a 7 then a text string as the hidden password.
PAGE 976
Parameters encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 7 as the encryption type. Enter 7 followed a text string as the hidden password. The text string must be a password that was already encrypted by a Dell Networking router. Use this parameter only with a password that you copied from the show running-config file of another Dell Networking router. password Defaults Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long, as the clear text password. Not configured.
PAGE 977
• Passwords can have a regular expression as the password. To create a password with a regular expression in it, use CNTL + v prior to entering regular expression. For example, to create the password abcd]e, you type “abcd CNTL v ]e”. When the password is created, you do not use the CNTL + v key combination and enter “abcd]e”. NOTE: The question mark (?) and the tilde (~) are not supported characters. Related Commands show running-config — views the current configuration.
PAGE 978
password • 0 is the default and means the password is not encrypted and stored as clear text. • 7 means that the password is encrypted and hidden. Enter a text string up to 32 characters long. The first character of the password must be a letter. You cannot use spaces in the password. Defaults No password is configured. Command Modes LINE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 979
characterrestriction (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords character-restriction to indicate a character restriction for the password. upper number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword upper then the upper number. The range is from 0 to 31. lower number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lower then the lower number. The range is from 0 to 31. numeric number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword numeric then the numeric number. The range is from 0 to 31.
PAGE 980
To view passwords, use the show running-config command. show privilege View your access level. Syntax show privilege Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show privilege Current privilege level is 15 Dell# Dell#show privilege Current privilege level is 14. Dell# Dell#show privilege Current privilege level is 10.
PAGE 981
Example Related Commands Field Description Location Displays the IP address of the user. Dell# show users Authorization Mode: Line Location * 0 console 0 2 vty 0 10.16.127.35 3 vty 1 10.16.127.145 4 vty 2 10.16.127.141 5 vty 3 10.16.127.145 6 vty 4 10.16.127.141 7 vty 5 10.16.127.
PAGE 982
username Establish an authentication system based on user names. Syntax username name [access-class access-list-name] [nopassword | {password | secret} [encryption-type] password] [privilege level] [role role-name] If you do not want a specific user to enter a password, use the nopassword option. To delete authentication for a user, use the no username name command. Parameters name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters.
PAGE 983
RADIUS Commands The following RADIUS commands are supported by Dell Networking operating system. debug radius View RADIUS transactions to assist with troubleshooting. Syntax debug radius To disable debugging of RADIUS, use the no debug radius command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip radius source-interface Specify an interface’s IP address as the source IP address for RADIUS connections.
PAGE 984
radius-server deadtime Configure a time interval during which non-responsive RADIUS servers to authentication requests are skipped. Syntax radius-server deadtime seconds To disable this function or return to the default value, use the no radius-server deadtime command. Parameters seconds Defaults 0 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a number of seconds during which non-responsive RADIUS servers are skipped. The range is from 0 to 2147483647 seconds.
PAGE 985
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To configure any number of RADIUS server hosts for each server host that is configured, use this command. The system searches for the RADIUS hosts in the order they are configured in the software.
PAGE 986
Related Commands radius-server host — configures a RADIUS host. radius-server retransmit Configure the number of times the switch attempts to connect with the configured RADIUS host server before declaring the RADIUS host server unreachable. Syntax radius-server retransmit retries To configure zero retransmit attempts, use the no radius-server retransmit command. To return to the default setting, use the radius-server retransmit 3 command.
PAGE 987
role Changes command permissions for roles. Syntax role mode { { { addrole | deleterole } role-name } | reset } command To delete access to a command, use the no role mode role-name Parameters mode Enter one of the following keywords as the mode for which you are controlling access: configure for CONFIGURATION mode exec for EXEC mode interface for INTERFACE modes line for LINE mode route-map for Route-map mode router for Router mode addrole Enter the keyword addrole to add permission to the command.
PAGE 988
TACACS+ Commands The Dell Networking OS supports TACACS+ as an alternate method for login authentication. debug tacacs+ To assist with troubleshooting, view TACACS+ transactions. Syntax debug tacacs+ To disable debugging of TACACS+, use the no debug tacacs+ command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 989
tacacs-server host Specify a TACACS+ host. Syntax Parameters tacacs-server host {hostname | ipv4-address} [port number] [timeout seconds] [key key] hostname Enter the name of the TACACS+ server host. ipv4-address Enter the IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) of the TACACS+ server host. port number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword port then a number as the port to be used by the TACACS+ server. The range is from zero (0) to 65535. The default is 49.
PAGE 990
• key Enter a text string, up to 42 characters long, as the clear text password. Leading spaces are ignored. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information 7 means that the key is encrypted and hidden. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The key configured with this command must match the key configured on the TACACS+ daemon. SSH Server and SCP Commands The Dell Networking OS supports secure shell (SSH) protocol versions 1.
PAGE 991
Generating 1024-bit SSHv1 RSA key. ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Dell(conf)# Related Commands ip ssh server — enables the SSH server. show crypto — displays the SSH host public keys. debug ip ssh Enables collecting SSH debug information. Syntax debug ip ssh {client | server} To disable debugging, use the no debug ip ssh {client | server} command. Parameters client Enter the keyword client to enable collecting debug information on the client.
PAGE 992
ip ssh authentication-retries Configure the maximum number of attempts that should be used to authenticate a user. Syntax ip ssh authentication-retries 1-10 Parameters 1-10 Defaults 3 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the number of maximum retries to authenticate a user. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 3. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 993
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If you enable this command, clients can log in without a password prompt. This command provides two levels of authentication: • rhost-authentication is done with the file specified in the ip ssh rhostfile command. • checking client host-keys is done with the file specified in the ip ssh pub-key-file command.
PAGE 994
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. With password authentication enabled, you can authenticate using the local, RADIUS, or TACACS+ password fallback order as configured. ip ssh pub-key-file Specify the file used for host-based authentication. Syntax ip ssh pub-key-file {WORD} Parameters WORD Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 995
To reset to the default, use no ip ssh rekey [time rekey-interval] [volume rekeylimit] command. Parameters time minutes Enter the keywords time then the amount of time in minutes. The range is from 10 to 1440 minutes. The default is 60 minutes volume rekeylimit Enter the keywords volume then the amount of volume in megabytes. The range is from 1 to 4096 to megabytes. The default is 1024 megabytes Defaults The default time is 60 minutes. The default volume is 1024 megabytes.
PAGE 996
NOTE: For rhostfile and pub-key-file, the administrator must FTP the file to the switch. ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config) Enable RSA authentication for the SSHv2 server. Syntax ip ssh rsa-authentication enable To disable RSA authentication, use the no ip ssh rsa-authentication enable command. Parameters enable Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the keyword enable to enable RSA authentication for the SSHv2 server.
PAGE 997
NOTE: The no form of this command deletes the file flash://ADMIN_DIR/ssh/ authorized-keys-username file. Related Commands show ip ssh rsa-authentication — displays the RSA authorized keys. ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config) — enables RSA authentication. ip ssh server Configure an SSH server.
PAGE 998
The following HMAC algorithms are available: • hmac-sha1 • hmac-sha1-96 • hmac-sha2-256 • hmac-sha2-256-96 When FIPS is enabled, the default HMAC algorithm is hmac-sha1-96. When FIPS is not enabled, the default HMAC algorithms are the following: kex key-exchangealgorithm • hmac-md5 • hmac-md5-96 • hmac-sha1 • hmac-sha1-96 • hmac-sha2-256 • hmac-sha2-256-96 Enter the keyword kex and then a space-delimited list of key exchange algorithms supported by the SSH server.
PAGE 999
Usage Information This command enables the SSH server and begins listening on a port. If a port is not specified, listening is on SSH default port 22. NOTE: Starting with Dell Networking OS Release 9.2(0.0), SSH server is enabled by default. Example Dell# conf Dell(conf)# ip ssh server port 45 Dell(conf)# ip ssh server enable Dell# Related Commands show ip ssh — displays the ssh information. show accounting Display the active accounting sessions for each online user.
PAGE 1000
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command is useful if the remote SSH client implements Strict Host Key Checking.
PAGE 1001
show ip ssh client-pub-keys Display the client public keys used in host-based authentication. Syntax show ip ssh client-pub-keys Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command displays the contents of the flash://ADMIN_DIRssh/knownhosts file. Example Dell# show ip ssh client-pub-keys 4.8.1.
PAGE 1002
Dell# Related Commands Xip ssh rsa-authentication (Config) — configures the RSA authorized keys. show role Display information on permissions assigned to a command, including user role and/or permission level. Syntax show role mode {mode} {command} Parameters command Enter the command’s keywords to assign the command to a certain access level. You can enter one or all of the keywords. mode mode Enter keyword then one of the following modes.
PAGE 1003
show users Allows you to view information on all users logged in to the switch. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands show users [all] all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view all terminal lines in the switch. EXEC Privilege Version 9.5(0.0) Introduced the support for roles on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1004
secadmin sysadmin netoperator testadmin Command Modes Command History Related Commands Exec Config Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC netadmin Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC EXEC Privilege Version Description 9.7(0.1) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.1) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL.
PAGE 1005
logout Dell# Secure DHCP Commands The dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) as defined by RFC 2131 provides no authentication or security mechanisms. Secure DHCP is a suite of features that protects networks that use dynamic address allocation from spoofing and attacks. clear ip dhcp snooping Clear the DHCP binding table. Syntax clear ip dhcp snooping binding Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 1006
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When enabled, no learning takes place until you enable snooping on a VLAN. After disabling DHCP Snooping, the binding table is deleted and Option 82, IP Source Guard, and Dynamic ARP Inspection are disabled. Related Commands ip dhcp snooping vlan — enables DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs. ip dhcp snooping database Delay writing the binding table for a specified time.
PAGE 1007
Defaults Command Modes none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip dhcp snooping — displays the contents of the DHCP binding table. ip dhcp snooping database renew Renew the binding table. Syntax ip dhcp snooping database renew Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1008
ip dhcp snooping vlan Enable DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping vlan name Parameters name Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the name of a VLAN on which to enable DHCP Snooping. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. When enabled, the system begins creating entries in the binding table for the specified VLANs. NOTE: Learning only happens if there is a trusted port in the VLAN.
PAGE 1009
nopassword Enter the keyword nopassword to specify that the user should not enter a password. password Enter the keyword password then the encryption-type or the password. secret Enter the keyword secret then the encryption-type or the password. encryption-type Enter an encryption type for the password that you enter. • 0 directs the system to store the password as clear text. It is the default encryption type when using the password option.
PAGE 1010
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.1) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.1) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL. Instead of using the system defined user roles, you can create a new user role that best matches your organization. When you create a new user role, you first inherit permissions from one of the system defined roles.
PAGE 1011
49 sFlow sFlow monitoring system includes an sFlow Agent and an sFlow Collector. • The sFlow Agent combines the flow samples and interface counters into sFlow datagrams and forwards them to the sFlow Collector. • The sFlow Collector analyses the sFlow Datagrams received from the different devices and produces a network-wide view of traffic flows.
PAGE 1012
Parameters sflow collector ipaddress Enter the IPv4 (A.B.C.D) of the sFlow collector device. agent-addr ipaddress Enter the IPv4 (A.B.C.D) of the sFlow agent in the router. number (OPTIONAL) Enter the user datagram protocol (UDP) port number. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 6343. max-datagram-size number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword max-datagram-size then the size number in bytes. The range is from 400 to 1500. The default is 1400. Defaults Not configured.
PAGE 1013
sflow ingress-enable Enable sFlow ingress on interfaces. Syntax sflow ingress-enable To disable sFlow, use the no sflow ingress enable command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.7(0.0) Usage Information Introduced on the MXL switch.
PAGE 1014
sflow max-header-size extended Set the maximum header size of a packet to 256 bytes. Syntax sflow max-header-size extended To reset the maximum header size of a packet, use the[no] sflow max-header-size extended command. Parameters extended Defaults 128 bytes Command Modes CONFIGURATION Enter the keyword extended to copy 256 bytes from the sample packets to sFlow datagram. INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1015
sflow polling-interval (Interface) Set the sFlow polling interval at an interface (overrides the global-level setting). Syntax sflow polling-interval interval value To return to the default, use the no sflow polling-interval interval command. Parameters interval value Enter the interval value in seconds. The range is from 15 to 86400 seconds. The default is the global counter polling interval. Defaults The same value as the current global default counter polling interval.
PAGE 1016
sflow sample-rate (Interface) Change the interface default sampling rate. Syntax sflow sample-rate value To return to the default sampling rate, use the no sflow sample-rate command. Parameters value Enter the sampling rate value. The range is from 256 to 8388608 packets. Enter values in powers of 2 only; for example, 4096, 8192, 16384, and so forth. The default is the Global default sampling. Defaults The Global default sampling. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 1017
Egress Mangement Interface sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 2048 Global default counter polling interval: 20 Global extended information enabled: none 0 collectors configured 0 UDP packets exported 0 UDP packets dropped 0 sFlow samples collected stack-unit 0 Port set 0 Te 0/0: configured rate 256, actual rate 256 Dell# Dell#show running-config sflow ! sflow enable sflow sample-rate 2048 Dell#show running-config interface tengigabitethernet 0/0 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 no i
PAGE 1018
50 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging is composed of virtual local area network (VLAN) Stacking, Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling, and Provider Backbone Bridging as described in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. This chapter includes commands for the Dell Networking operating software Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT). L2PT enables protocols to tunnel through an 802.1q tunnel. For more information, refer to VLAN Stacking, Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), and GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP).
PAGE 1019
in | out | both Enter the keyword in, out, or both to debug incoming interfaces, outgoing interfaces, or both incoming and outgoing interfaces. vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. count value Enter the keyword count then the number of debug outputs. The range is from 1 to 100. Defaults Debug disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1020
Defaults The default destination MAC is 01:01:e8:00:00:00. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you enable VLAN-Stacking, no protocol packets are tunneled. Related Command show protocol-tunnel — displays tunneling information for all VLANs. protocol-tunnel enable Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system.
PAGE 1021
show running-config — displays the current configuration. show protocol-tunnel Display protocol tunnel information for all or a specified VLAN-Stack VLAN. Syntax Parameters show protocol-tunnel [vlan vlan-id] vlan vlan-id Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 9.2(0.0) (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display information for the one VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1022
51 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and Syslog This chapter contains commands to configure and monitor the simple network management protocol (SNMP) v1/v2/v3 and Syslog. The chapter contains the following sections: • SNMP Commands • Syslog Commands SNMP Commands The following SNMP commands are available in the Dell Networking OS.
PAGE 1023
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, Z9000, and MXL.
PAGE 1024
show snmp engineID Display the identification of the local SNMP engine and all remote engines that are configured on the router. Syntax show snmp engineID Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show snmp engineID Local SNMP engineID: 0000178B02000001E80214A8 Remote Engine ID IP-addr Port 80001F88043132333435 172.31.1.3 5009 80001F88043938373635 172.31.1.
PAGE 1025
show snmp user Display the information configured on each SNMP user name. Syntax Command Modes Command History Example show snmp user • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1026
snmp-server community Configure a new community string access for SNMPv1 v2 and v3. Syntax snmp-server community community-name {ro | rw} [security-name name][accesslist-name] To remove access to a community, use the no snmp-server community community-string {ro | rw} [security-name name [access-list-name] command. Parameters community-name Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) to act as a password for SNMP. ro Enter the keyword ro to specify read-only permission.
PAGE 1027
Example Dell(conf)# ip access-list standard snmp-ro-acl Dell(config-std-nacl)#seq 5 permit host 10.10.10.224 Dell(config-std-nacl)#seq 10 deny any count ! Dell(conf)#snmp-server community guest ro snmp-ro-acl Dell(conf)# Related Commands ip access-list standard — names (or selects) a standard access list to filter based on IP address. show running-config — displays the current SNMP configuration and defaults. snmp-server contact Configure contact information for troubleshooting this SNMP node.
PAGE 1028
notification-option • snmp — Notification of RFC 1157 traps. • stp — Notification of a state change in the spanning tree protocol (RFC 1493). • vrrp — Notification of a state change in a VRRP group. • xstp — Notification of a state change in MSTP (802.1s), RSTP (802.1w), and PVST+. For the envmon notification-type, enter one of the following optional parameters: • temperature For the snmp notification-type, enter one of the following optional parameters: • Defaults Not enabled.
PAGE 1029
remote ip-address Enter the keyword remote then the IP address that identifies the copy of the SNMP on the remote device. udp-port portnumber engineID Enter the keywords udp-port then the user datagram protocol (UDP) port number on the remote device. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 162. Defaults As above. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1030
The default is 1. auth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword auth to specify authentication of a packet without encryption. noauth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword noauth to specify no authentication of a packet. priv (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword priv to specify both authentication and then scrambling of the packet. read name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword read then a name (a string of up to 20 characters long) as the read view name.
PAGE 1031
Parameters ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address of the host (configurable hosts is limited to 16). traps (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword traps to send trap notifications to the specified host. The default is traps. informs (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword informs to send inform notifications to the specified host. The default is traps.
PAGE 1032
The default is all trap types are sent to host. Defaults As above. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. In order to configure the router to send SNMP notifications, enter at least one snmp-server host command. If you enter the command with no keywords, all trap types are enabled for the host. If you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent.
PAGE 1033
To delete the SNMP location, use the no snmp-server location command. Parameters text Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter an alpha-numeric text string, up to 55 characters long. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. snmp-server packetsize Set the largest SNMP packet size permitted. Wen the SNMP server is receiving a request or generating a reply, use the snmpserver packetsize global configuration command.
PAGE 1034
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To enable this snmp-server trap-source command, configure an IP address on the interface and enable the interface configured as an SNMP trap source. Related Commands snmp-server community — sets the community string. snmp-server user Configure a new user to an SNMP group.
PAGE 1035
• md5 — Message Digest Algorithm • sha — Secure Hash Algorithm auth-password (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) password that enables the agent to receive packets from the host and to send packets to the host. Minimum: eight characters long. priv des56 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords priv des56 to initiate a privacy authentication level setting using the CBC-DES privacy authentication algorithm (des56).
PAGE 1036
Related Commands show snmp user — displays the information configured on each SNMP user name. snmp-server user (for AES128-CFB Encryption) Specify that AES128-CFB encryption algorithm needs to be used for transmission of SNMP information. The Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) Cipher Feedback (CFB) 128-bit encryption algorithm is in compliance with RFC 3826. RFCs for SNMPv3 define two authentication hash algorithms, namely, HMAC-MD5-96 and HMAC-SHA1-96.
PAGE 1037
Related Commands show snmp user — Displays the information configured on each SNMP user name. snmp-server view Configure an SNMPv3 view. Syntax snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded} To remove an SNMPv3 view, use the no snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded} command. Parameters view-name Enter the name of the view (not to exceed 20 characters). oid-tree Enter the OID sub tree for the view (not to exceed 20 characters).
PAGE 1038
Syslog Commands The following commands allow you to configure logging functions on all Dell Networking switches. clear logging Clear the messages in the logging buffer. Syntax clear logging Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show logging — displays logging settings and system messages in the internal buffer.
PAGE 1039
logging extended Logs security and audit events to a system log server. Syntax logging extended Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1040
Related Commands logging monitor — sets the logging monitor parameters. terminal monitor — sends system messages to the terminal/monitor. default logging trap Return to the default settings for logging messages to the Syslog servers. Syntax default logging trap Defaults level = 6 or informational Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1041
logging trap — enables logging to the Syslog server based on severity. logging buffered Enable logging and specify which messages are logged to an internal buffer. By default, all messages are logged to the internal buffer. Syntax logging buffered [level] [size] To return to the default values, use the default logging buffered command. To disable logging stored to an internal buffer, use the no logging buffered command.
PAGE 1042
Parameters level (OPTIONAL) Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following parameters: emergencies, alerts, critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or debugging. The default is 7 or debugging. Defaults level = 7; size = debugging Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear logging — clears the logging buffer.
PAGE 1043
• sys14 (system use) • syslog (Syslog process) • user (user process) • uucp (Unix to Unix copy process) The default is local7. Defaults local7 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. logging — enables logging to a Syslog server. logging on — enables logging. logging history Specify which messages are logged to the history table of the switch and the SNMP network management station (if configured).
PAGE 1044
Parameters size Defaults 1 message Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Indicate a value as the number of messages to be stored. The range is from 0 to 500. The default is 1 message. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When the number of messages reach the limit you set with the logging history size command, older messages are deleted as newer ones are added to the table.
PAGE 1045
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you use the no logging on command, messages are logged only to the console. Related Commands logging — enables logging to the Syslog server. logging buffered — sets the logging buffered parameters. logging console — sets the logging console parameters. logging monitor — sets the logging parameters for the terminal connections.
PAGE 1046
logging synchronous Synchronize unsolicited messages and output. Syntax logging synchronous [level level | all] [limit number-of-buffers] To disable message synchronization, use the no logging synchronous [level level | all] [limit number-of-buffers] command. Parameters all Enter the keyword all to ensure that all levels are printed asynchronously. level level Enter the keyword level then a number as the severity level. A high number indicates a low severity level and vice versa.
PAGE 1047
Command Modes Command History Related Commands CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. logging — enables the logging to another device. logging on — enables logging. logging version Displays syslog messages in a RFC 3164 or RFC 5424 format. Syntax logging version {0|1} Defaults 0 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1048
show logging Display the logging settings and system messages logged to the internal buffer of the switch. Syntax show logging [number | history [reverse][number] | reverse [number] | summary] Parameters Command Modes Command History Example (Partial) 1048 number (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of messages displayed in the output. The range is from 1 to 65535. history (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword history to view only information in the Syslog history table.
PAGE 1049
May 19 10:23:58: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SEC-5-LOGOUT: Exec --More-Example (History) Dell#show logging history Syslog History Table: 1 maximum table entries, saving level warnings or higher SNMP notifications not Enabled May 22 08:53:09: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SEC-3-AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE_SUCCESS: Enable password authentication success on vty0 ( 10.11.68.22 ) Dell# show logging driverlog stack-unit Display the driver log for the specified stack member.
PAGE 1050
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, Z9000, and MXL. Example Dell(conf)#show logging audit Related Commands clear logging auditlog — clears audit log. terminal monitor Configure the system to display messages on the monitor/terminal. Syntax terminal monitor To return to default settings, use the terminal no monitor command. defaults Disabled.
PAGE 1051
52 Stacking For more information about using the MXL 10/40GbE Switch stacking feature, refer to the Stacking MXL 10/40GbE Switches chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. redundancy disable-auto-reboot Prevent the MXL 10/40GbE switch stack management unit from rebooting if it fail. Syntax redundancy disable-auto-reboot stack-unit [0–5 | members] To return to the default, use the no redundancy disable-auto-reboot stack-unit [0–5 | members] command.
PAGE 1052
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. reset stack-unit Reset any designated stack member except the management unit (master unit). Syntax reset stack-unit 0–5 hard Parameters 0–5 Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset. hard Reset the stack unit if the unit is in a problem state. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1053
Dell#rebooting U-Boot 1.1.4 (June 6 2012 - 00:00:04) Related Commands • reload — reboots the system. • redundancy disable-auto-reboot— resets the designated stack member. show redundancy Display the current redundancy configuration (status of automatic reboot configuration on stack management unit). Syntax Command Modes Command History Example show redundancy • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1054
show system stack-ports Display information about the stacking ports on all switches in the MXL 10/40GbE stack. Syntax show system stack-ports [status | topology] Parameters Defaults status (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword status to display the command output without the Connection field. topology (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword topology to limit the table to just the Interface and Connection fields. none Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.
PAGE 1055
1/53 2/33 2/37 2/49 2/53 Example (Topology) 40 40 40 40 40 up up up up up up up up up up Dell# show system stack-ports Topology: Ring Interface Connection Trunk Group 0/33 1/37 0/37 2/33 0/41 1/49 0/45 2/53 1/33 2/37 1/37 0/33 1/49 0/41 1/53 2/49 2/33 0/37 2/37 1/33 2/49 1/53 2/53 0/45 Related Commands • redundancy disable-auto-reboot — resets the designated stack member.
PAGE 1056
Parameters Command Modes Command History Related Commands unit number <0–5> Number of the member stack unit. The valid values are from 0 to 5. group number <0– 5> Number of the stacked port on the unit. The valid values are from 0 to 5. CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. • reload — reboots the system. • show system — displays the current status of all stack members or a specific member.
PAGE 1057
Parameters Command Modes Command History Related Commands 0–5 Enter a stack member identifier, from 0 to 5, of the switch that you want to add to the stack. MXL-10/40GbE Enter the model identifier of the switch to be added as a stack member. This identifier is also referred to as the provision type. CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. • reload — reboots the system. • show system — displays the status of all stack members or a specific member.
PAGE 1058
53 Storm Control The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) storm control feature allows you to limit or suppress traffic during a traffic storm. Storm control is supported on the Dell Networking OS Z-Series S4810 S4820T platforms. Important Points to Remember • Interface commands can only be applied on physical interfaces (virtual local area networks [VLANs] and link aggregation group [LAG] interfaces are not supported). • An INTERFACE-level command only supports storm control configuration on ingress.
PAGE 1059
---------------------------------------TenGig 3/24 Ingress 1000 Dell# show storm-control multicast Display the storm control multicast configuration. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Example show storm-control multicast [interface] interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface specific storm control configuration: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1060
Defaults none Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module Dell#show storm-control unknown-unicast tengigabitethernet 3/0 Unknown-unicast storm control configuration Interface Direction Packets/Second ---------------------------------------TenGig 3/0 Ingress 1000 Dell# storm-control broadcast (Configuration) Configure the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed in the network.
PAGE 1061
Parameters packets_per_secon d Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed into the network. The range is from 0 to 33554368. Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. storm-control multicast (Configuration) Configure the packets per second (pps) of multicast traffic.
PAGE 1062
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. storm-control unknown-unicast (Configuration) Configure the percentage of unknown-unicast traffic allowed on an MXL switch (ingress rate only). Syntax storm-control unknown-unicast [packets_per_second in] To disable storm control for unknown-unicast traffic, use the no storm-control unknown-unicast [packets_per_second in] command.
PAGE 1063
54 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The commands in this chapter configure and monitor the IEEE 802.1d spanning tree protocol (STP). bridge-priority Set the bridge priority of the switch in an IEEE 802.1D spanning tree. Syntax bridge-priority {priority-value | primary | secondary} To return to the default value, use the no bridge-priority command. Parameters priority-value Enter a number as the bridge priority value. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 32768.
PAGE 1064
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you enable debug spanning-tree bpdu for multiple interfaces, the software only sends information on BPDUs for the last interface specified. Related Commands portfast bpdufilter default — enters SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. description Enter a description of the spanning tree.
PAGE 1065
To return to the default setting, use the no forward-delay command. Parameters seconds Defaults 15 seconds Command Modes SPANNING TREE Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the number of seconds that the system waits before transitioning STP to the Forwarding state. The range is from 4 to 30. The default is 15 seconds. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. max-age — changes the wait time before STP refreshes protocol configuration information.
PAGE 1066
Defaults 20 seconds Command Modes SPANNING TREE Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. forward-delay — changes the wait time before STP transitions to the Forwarding state. hello-time — changes the time interval between BPDUs. portfast bpdufilter default Enable BPDU Filter globally to filter transmission of BPDU on port fast enabled interfaces.
PAGE 1067
show config Display the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values display. Syntax show config Command Modes SPANNING TREE Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell(config-stp)#show config protocol spanning-tree 0 no disable Dell(config-stp)# show spanning-tree 0 Display the spanning tree group configuration and status of interfaces in the spanning tree group.
PAGE 1068
The following describes the show spanning-tree 0 command shown in the example. Example Field Description “Bridge Identifier...” Lists the bridge priority and the MAC address for this STP bridge. “Configured hello...” Displays the settings for hello time, max age, and forward delay. “We are...” States whether this bridge is the root bridge for the STG. “Current root...” Lists the bridge priority and MAC address for the root bridge. “Topology flag...
PAGE 1069
Designated port id is 8.27, designated path cost 0 Timers: message age 0, forward_delay 0, hold 0 Number of transitions to forwarding state 1 BPDU: sent:18, received 0 The port is not in the portfast mode Port 28 (GigabitEthernet 1/3) is Forwarding Port path cost 4, Port priority 8, Port Identifier 8.28 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e800.0a56 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e800.0a56 Designated port id is 8.
PAGE 1070
spanning-tree 0 Assigns a Layer 2 interface to STP instance 0 and configures a port cost or port priority, or enables loop guard, root guard, or the Portfast feature on the interface. Syntax spanning-tree stp-id {cost cost | {rootguard} | portfast [bpduguard [shutdown-on-violation]| bpdufilter] | priority priority} To disable Spanning Tree group on an interface, use the no spanning-tree stp-id {cost cost | {rootguard} | portfast [bpduguard [shutdown-on-violation] | bpdufilter] | priority priority} command.
PAGE 1071
Root guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel except when used as a stacking port. When enabled on a port, root guard applies to all VLANs configured on the port.
PAGE 1072
55 System Time and Date The commands in this chapter configure time values on the system, either using the Dell Networking Operating System (OS), or the hardware, or using the network time protocol (NTP). With NTP, the switch can act only as a client to an NTP clock host. For more information, refer to the “Network Time Protocol” section of the Management chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. clock set Set the software clock in the switch.
PAGE 1073
clock summer-time date Set a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight saving time on a one-time basis. Syntax clock summer-time time-zone date start-month start-day start-year starttime end-month end-day end-year end-time [offset] To delete a daylight saving time zone configuration, use the no clock summer-time command. Parameters time-zone Enter the three-letter name for the time zone. This name is displayed in the show clock output.
PAGE 1074
Parameters time-zone Enter the three-letter name for the time zone. This name is displayed in the show clock output. You can enter up to eight characters. start-week (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following as the week that daylight saving begins and then enter values for start-day through end-time: • first: Enter this keyword to start daylight saving time in the first week of the month. • last: Enter this keyword to start daylight saving time in the last week of the month.
PAGE 1075
clock timezone Configure a timezone for the switch. Syntax clock timezone timezone-name offset To delete a timezone configuration, use the no clock timezone command. Parameters timezone-name Enter the name of the timezone. You cannot use spaces. offset Enter one of the following: Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 • a number from 1 to 23 as the number of hours in addition to universal time coordinated (UTC) for the timezone.
PAGE 1076
Command Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ntp authenticate Enable authentication of NTP traffic between the switch and the NTP time serving hosts. Syntax ntp authenticate To disable NTP authentication, use the no ntp authentication command. Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1077
Usage Information After configuring the ntp authentication-key command, configure the ntp trusted-key command to complete NTP authentication. The Dell Networking OS versions 8.2.1.0 and later use an encryption algorithm to store the authentication key that is different from previous versions; beginning in version 8.2.1.0, the system uses DES encryption to store the key in the startup-config when you enter the ntp authentication-key command.
PAGE 1078
ntp multicast client To receive NTP information from the network via multicast, configure the switch. Syntax ntp multicast client [multicast-address] To disable multicast reception, use the no ntp multicast client [multicast-address] command. Parameters multicast-address Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter a multicast address. Enter either an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format.
PAGE 1079
ipv4-address | ipv6address Enter an IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of NTP server. hostname Enter the hostname of the server. key keyid (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword key and a number as the NTP peer key. The range is from 1 to 4294967295. prefer (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword prefer to indicate that this peer has priority over other servers. version number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword version and a number to correspond to the NTP version used on the server.
PAGE 1080
Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ntp trusted-key Set a key to authenticate the system to which NTP synchronizes. Syntax ntp trusted-key number To delete the key, use the no ntp trusted-key number command. Parameters number Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a number as the trusted key ID. The range is from 1 to 4294967295.
PAGE 1081
Example (Detail) Dell#show clock detail 12:30:26.892 pacific Tue May 22 2012 Time source is RTC hardware Summer time starts 00:00:00 UTC Wed Mar 14 2012 Summer time ends 00:00:00 pacific Wed Nov 7 2012 Dell# Related Commands clock summer-time recurring — displays the time and date from the switch hardware clock. show ntp associations Display the NTP master and peers. Syntax Command Modes Command History Usage Information show ntp associations • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 1082
Example Dell#show ntp associations remote ref clock st when poll reach delay offset disp ============================================================= 10.10.120.5 0.0.0.0 16 256 0 0.00 0.000 16000.0 *172.16.1.33 127.127.1.0 11 6 16 377 -0.08 -1499.9 104.16 172.31.1.33 0.0.0.0 16 256 0 0.00 0.000 16000.0 192.200.0.2 0.0.0.0 16 256 0 0.00 0.000 16000.0 * master (synced), # master (unsynced), + selected, - candidate Dell# Related Commands show ntp status — displays the current NTP status.
PAGE 1083
Field Description “clock offset is...” Displays the system offset to the synchronized peer and the time delay on the path to the NTP root clock. “root dispersion is...” Displays the root and path dispersion. “peer mode is...” State what NTP mode the switch is. This should be Client mode. Example Dell#show ntp status Clock is unsynchronized, stratum 16, no reference clock frequency is 0.000 ppm, stability is 0.000 ppm, precision is 4294967279 reference time is 00000000.00000000 (6:28:16.
PAGE 1084
56 Tunneling Tunneling is supported on the MXL platform. tunnel-mode Enable a tunnel interface. Syntax tunnel mode {ipip | ipv6 | ipv6ip}[decapsulate-any] To disable an active tunnel interface, use the no tunnel mode command. Parameters ipip Enable tunnel in RFC 2003 mode and encapsulate IPv4 and/or IPv6 datagrams inside an IPv4 tunnel. ipv6 Enable tunnel in RFC 2473 mode and encapsulate IPv4 and/or IPv6 datagrams inside an IPv6 tunnel.
PAGE 1085
tunnel source Set a source address for the tunnel. Syntax tunnel source {ip-address | ipv6–address | interface-type-number} To delete the current tunnel source address, use the no tunnel source command. Parameters ip-address Enter the source IPv4 address in A.B.C.D format. ipv6–address Enter the source IPv6 address in X:X:X:X::X format. interface-typenumber • For a 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1086
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. The range is from 3-10, Default range is 3. unlimited Enter the keyword unlimited to specify the unlimited number of keepalive probe packets. Defaults Tunnel keepalive is disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the MXL.
PAGE 1087
tunnel dscp Configure the method to set the DSCP in the outer tunnel header. Syntax tunnel dscp {mapped | } To use the default tunnel mapping behavior, use the no tunnel dscp value command. Parameters mapped Enter the keyword mapped to map the original packet DSCP (IPv4)/Traffic Class (IPv6) to the tunnel header DSCP (IPv4)/Traffic Class (IPv6) depending on the mode of tunnel. value Enter a value to set the DSCP value in the tunnel header. The range is from 0 to 63.
PAGE 1088
To establish a logical tunnel to the particular destination address, use the destination address of the outer tunnel header. If you configure a tunnel interface or source address, the tunnel destination must be compatible. tunnel flow-label Configure the method to set the IPv6 flow label value in the outer tunnel header. Syntax tunnel flow-label value To return to the default value of 0, use the no tunnel flow-label value command.
PAGE 1089
ip unnumbered Configure a tunnel interface to operate without a unique explicit IPv4 address and select the interface from which the tunnel will borrow its address. Syntax ip unnumbered {interface-type interface-number} Use the no ip unnumbered command to set the tunnel back to default logical address. If the tunnel was previously operational, this will make the tunnel interface operationally down, unless the tunnel also has an IPv6 address configured..
PAGE 1090
Usage Information The ip unnumbered command will fail in two condition: • If the logical ip address is configured. • If the tunnel mode is ipv6ip (where ip address over tunnel interface is not possible). To ping the unnumbered tunnels the logical address route information should be present in both the ends. NOTE: The ipv6 unnumbered command can specify an interface name that does not yet exist, or does not yet have a configured IPv6 address.
PAGE 1091
57 u-Boot All commands in this chapter are in u-Boot mode. These commands are supported on the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) MXL 10/40GbE Switch Module platform. To access this mode, press any key when the following line appears on the console during a system boot. Hit any key to stop autoboot: Enter u-Boot immediately, as the BOOT_USER# prompt. NOTE: This chapter describes only a few commands available in u-Boot mode. NOTE: You cannot use the Tab key to complete commands in this mode.
PAGE 1092
Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER# boot show net config retries Number of Network Boot Config Retries is : 0 BOOT_USER # boot write net config retries Set the number of retries for network boot configuration failure. Syntax boot write net config retries Command Modes uBoot Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1093
enable Change the access privilege level. Syntax enable [user | admin] Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. help Display the help menu. Syntax help Command Modes uBoot Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER # help ***** Dell Force10 Boot Interface Help Information ***** Current access level: USER LEVEL Use "syntax help" for more information on syntax.
PAGE 1094
ignore startup config Ignore the system startup configuration. Syntax ignore startup-config Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. interface management ethernet ip address Set the management port IP address and mask. Syntax interface management ethernet ip address Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. no default-gateway Clear the default gateway IP address.
PAGE 1095
reload Reload the MXL switch. Syntax reload Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show boot blc Show the boot loop counter value. Syntax show boot blc Command Modes uBoot Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER # show boot blc ? Total 1 possible command found.
PAGE 1096
show bootflash Show summary of boot flash information. Syntax show bootflash Command Modes uBoot Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER # show bootflash GENERAL BOOTFLASH INFO ====================== Bootflash Partition A: Dell Force10 Networks System Boot Official IOM_LP_IMG_BOOT_LOADER, BSP Release 4.0.1.
PAGE 1097
Management Etherenet IP address Server IP address Default Gateway IP address Management Etherenet MAC address : : : : 10.16.130.134/16 10.16.127.53 15.0.0.1 00:01:E8:43:DE:DF BOOT_USER # show default-gateway Display the default gateway IP address. Syntax show default-gateway Command Modes uBoot Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER # show default-gateway Gateway IP address: 15.0.0.
PAGE 1098
Example BOOT_USER # show interface management port config Management ethernet Port Configuration: no Auto Negotiate Management ethernet Port Configuration: 100M Management ethernet Port Configuration: full duplex BOOT_USER # syntax help Show the syntax information. Syntax help Command Modes uBoot Command History Example 1098 Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1099
58 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if you use this with network interface controller (NIC) teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link. clear ufd-disable Re-enable one or more downstream interfaces on the switch/router that are in a UFD-Disabled Error state so that an interface can send and receive traffic.
PAGE 1100
debug uplink-state-group Enable debug messages for events related to a specified uplink-state group or all groups. Syntax debug uplink-state-group [group-id] To turn off debugging event messages, enter the no debug uplink-state-group [group-id] command. Parameters group-id Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enables debugging on the specified uplink-state group. The valid group-id values are from 1 to 16.
PAGE 1101
Parameters interface Enter one of the following interface types: • 10 Gigabit Ethernet: tengigabitethernet {slot/port | slot/ port-range} • 40 Gigabit Ethernet: fortygigabitethernet {slot/port |slot/ port-range} • Port channel: port-channel {1-512 | port-channel-range} Where port-range and port-channel-range specify a range of ports separated by a dash (-) and/or individual ports/port channels in any order; for example: gigabitethernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12 port-channel 1-3,5.
PAGE 1102
• uplink-state-group — creates an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links. downstream disable links Configure the number of downstream links in the uplink-state group that are disabled if one upstream link in an uplink-state group goes down. Syntax downstream disable links {number |all} To revert to the default setting, use the no downstream disable links command. Parameters number Enter the number of downstream links to be brought down by UFD. The range is from 1 to 1024.
PAGE 1103
Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 • Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. uplink-state-group — creates an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links. show running-config uplink-state-group Display the current configuration of one or more uplink-state groups.
PAGE 1104
Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1105
To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, use the no enable command in Uplink-State-Group Configuration mode. Parameters group-id Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the ID number of an uplink-state group. The range is from 1 to 16. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module..
PAGE 1106
example: gigabitethernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12 port-channel 1-3,5. A comma is required to separate each port and port-range entry. Defaults none Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You can assign physical port or port-channel interfaces to an uplink-state group. You can assign an interface to only one uplink-state group.
PAGE 1107
59 VLAN Stacking With the virtual local area network (VLAN)-stacking feature (also called stackable VLANs and QinQ), you can “stack” VLANs into one tunnel and switch them through the network transparently. For more information about basic VLAN commands, refer to the Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands section in the Layer 2 chapter.
PAGE 1108
Parameters 0|1 Enter the bit value you want to map to a color. green | red | yellow Choose a color: • Green: High priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped. • Yellow: Lower priority packets that are treated as best-effort. • Red: Lowest priority packets that are always dropped (regardless of congestion status). Defaults Disabled; Packets with an unmapped DEI value are colored green. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 1109
Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabyte Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/ port information. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes conf-if-vl--stack Command History Version 8.3.
PAGE 1110
Parameters Command Modes Command History Example interface slot/port Enter the interface type then the line card slot and port number. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show interface dei-mark Default CFI/DEI Marking: 0 Interface Drop precedence CFI/DEI -----------------------------------------------Gi 0/1 Green 0 Gi 0/1 Yellow 1 Gi 8/9 Yellow 0 Gi 8/40 Yellow 0 Related Commands dei mark — sets the DEI value on egress.
PAGE 1111
Usage Information Prior to disabling the stackable VLAN feature, remove the members. To view the stackable VLANs, use the show vlan command in EXEC Privilege mode. Stackable VLANs contain members, designated by the M in the Q column of the command output.
PAGE 1112
You may specify both bytes of the 2-byte S-Tag TPID. The range is from 0 to FFFF. The default is 9100. Defaults 0x9100 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information For specific interoperability limitations regarding the S-Tag TPID, refer to the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. Related Commands portmode hybrid — sets a port (physical ports only) to accept both tagged and untagged frames.
PAGE 1113
Example Dell(conf-if-gi-0/42)#switchport Dell(conf-if-gi-0/42)#vlan-stack trunk Dell(conf-if-gi-0/42)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 0/42 no ip address switchport vlan-stack trunk no shutdown Dell(conf-if-gi-0/42)#interface vlan 100 Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#vlan-stack compatible Dell(conf-if-vl-100-stack)#member gigabitethernet 0/42 Dell(conf-if-vl-100-stack)#show config ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address vlan-stack compatible member GigabitEthernet 0/42 shutdown Dell(conf-if-vl-100-stack)#interface v
PAGE 1114
60 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) VLT allows physical links between two chassis to appear as a single virtual link to the network core. VLT eliminates the requirement for Spanning Tree protocols by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches, and by supporting a loop-free topology.
PAGE 1115
snooping Command Modes Command History Enter the keyword snooping to delete multicast snooping route table entries. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip pim tib Clear PIM tree information from the PIM database. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information clear ip pim tib [group] group (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 1116
multicast peer-routing timeout Configure the time for a VLT node to retain synced multicast routes or synced multicast outgoing interface (OIF) after a VLT peer node failure. Syntax multicast peer-routing timeout value To restore the default value, use the no multicast peer-routing timeout command. Parameters value Enter the timeout value in seconds. The range is from 1 to 1200. The default is 150. Default Not configured. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN (conf-vlt-domain) Command History Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 1117
peer-routing-timeout Configure the timeout for the software to wait before connecting to a VLT peer with a Down status. This command is applicable for both IPV6/ IPV4. Syntax peer-routing-timeout value To restore the default value, use the no peer-routing-timeout command. Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information value Enter the timeout value in seconds. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default value is 0 (no timeout). VLT DOMAIN (conf-vlt-domain) Version 9.4(0.
PAGE 1118
group-address [source-address] (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group-address to view only routes associated with that group. Enter the source-address to view routes with that group-address and sourceaddress. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to view the number of multicast routes and packets. snooping [vlan vlanid] [group-address [source-address]] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword snooping to display information on the multicast routes PIMSM snooping discovers.
PAGE 1119
Protocol: static, distance: 0, route-map: none, last change: 00:00:23 Example (snooping) Dell#show ip mroute snooping IPv4 Multicast Snooping Table (*, 224.0.0.0), uptime 17:46:23 Incoming vlan: Vlan 2 Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 4/13 (*, 225.1.2.1), uptime 00:04:16 Incoming vlan: Vlan 2 Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 4/11 GigabitEthernet 4/13 (165.87.1.7, 225.1.2.
PAGE 1120
Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.11.198.130 Up 1 3 34998 634 473 show vlt brief Displays summarized status information about VLT domains currently configured on the switch. Syntax show vlt brief Default Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Command History Example (Brief) Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1121
128 Dell# 128 UP UP 1000 show vlt inconsistency Display deviations in VLT multicast traffic. Syntax show vlt inconsistency ip mroute Command Modes EXEC Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show vlt inconsistency ip mroute Spanned Multicast Routing IIF Inconsistency Multicast Route --------------(22.22.22.200, 225.1.1.2) (*, 225.1.1.
PAGE 1122
Vlan-type-config ---------------Codes:: P - Primary, C - Community, I - Isolated, N - Normal vlan, M Vlan-stack Vlan-ID ------- Local ----- 100 Peer ---- N M Port-type-config ---------------Codes:: p - PVLAN Promiscuous port, h - PVLAN Host port, t - PVLAN Trunk port, mt - Vlan-stack trunk port, mu - Vlan-stack access port, n Normal port Vlt Lag ------128 Local ----mt Peer ---mu Vlan-stack protocol-type -----------------------Local ----0x4100 Peer ---0x8100 VLT-VLAN config --------------Local Lag
PAGE 1123
show vlt statistics Displays statistics on VLT operations. Syntax show vlt statistics Default Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1124
Route update pkts sent to Peer: 0 Route update pkts rcvd from Peer: 0 system-mac Reconfigure the default MAC address for the domain. Syntax system-mac mac-address Parameters mac-address Enter the system MAC address for the VLT domain. Defaults Automatically assigned based on the primary priority and MAC address of each VLT peer. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1125
vlt domain Enable VLT on a switch, configure a VLT domain, and enter VLT-domain configuration mode. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History vlt domain domain-id domain-id Enter the Domain ID number. Configure the same domain ID on the peer switch. VLT uses the domain ID to automatically create a VLT MAC address for the domain. The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1126
Primary 10 40 Dell# 1126 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Secondary 20(C) 30 (I) 50(C) 60 (I) ICL Status V (*) V V T T T
PAGE 1127
61 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) for IPv4 and IPv6. The following commands apply to both VRRP IPv4 and IPv6: • advertise-interval • description • disable • hold-time • preempt • priority • show config • track • virtual-address VRRP Ipv6 are in the VRRP for IPv6 Commands section. advertise-interval Set the time interval between VRRP advertisements.
PAGE 1128
authentication-type Enable authentication of VRRP data exchanges. Syntax authentication-type simple [encryption-type] password To delete an authentication type and password, use the no authentication-type command. Parameters simple Enter the keyword simple to specify simple authentication. encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following numbers: password Defaults Not configured. Command Modes VRRP Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 1129
Command Modes Command History Usage Information • For Port Channel interface types, enter the keywords port-channel then the number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The VLAN ID range is from 1 to 4094. vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter a number from 1 to 255 as the VRRP group ID.
PAGE 1130
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To enable VRRP traffic, assign an IP address to the VRRP group using the virtual-address command and enter no disable. Related Commands virtual-address — specifies the IP address of the virtual router. hold-time Specify a delay (in seconds) before a switch becomes the MASTER virtual router. By delaying the initialization of the VRRP MASTER, the new switch can stabilize its routing tables.
PAGE 1131
priority Specify a VRRP priority value for the VRRP group. The VRRP protocol uses this value during the MASTER election process. Syntax priority priority To return to the default value, use the no priority command. Parameters priority Defaults 100 Command Modes VRRP Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a number as the priority. Enter 255 only if the router’s virtual address is the same as the interface’s primary IP address (that is, the router is the OWNER).
PAGE 1132
show vrrp View the VRRP groups that are active. If no VRRP groups are active, the system returns No Active VRRP group. Syntax show vrrp [vrrp-id] [interface] [brief] Parameters vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the Virtual Router Identifier for the VRRP group to view only that group. The range is from 1 to 255. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: brief Command Modes Command History Usage Information • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 1133
TenGig10/37 2 100 Y Master 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.202 200.200.200.203 Description TenGig10/37 3 100 Y Master 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.2 TenGig10/37 4 100 Y Master 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.206 200.200.200.207 ... short desc Dell> Usage Information The following describes the show vrrp command shown in the following example. Item Description GigabitEthernet 12/3... Displays the Interface, the VRRP group ID, and the network address. If the interface is not sending VRRP packets, 0.0.0.
PAGE 1134
00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.252 Authentication: (none) Tracking states for 1 interfaces: Up GigabitEthernet 12/17 priority-cost 10 -----------------GigabitEthernet 12/4, VRID: 2, Net: 10.1.2.253 State: Master, Priority: 110, Master: 10.1.2.253 (local) Hold Down: 10 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 1862, Gratuitous ARP sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:02 Virtual IP address: 10.1.2.
PAGE 1135
virtual-address Configure up to 12 IP addresses of virtual routers in the VRRP group. To start sending VRRP packets, set at least one virtual address for the VRRP group. Syntax virtual-address ip-address1 [... ip-address12] To delete one or more virtual IP addresses, use the no virtual-address ip-address1 [... ipaddress12] command. Parameters ip-address1 Enter an IP address of the virtual router in dotted decimal format. The IP address must be on the same subnet as the interface’s primary IP address. .
PAGE 1136
Related Command • When the system reloads, VRRP waits 600 seconds (10 minutes) to bring up VRRP on all interfaces that are up and configured for VRRP. • When an interface comes up, whether as part of a system reload or an interface reload, the system waits 300 seconds (5 minutes) to bring up VRRP on that interface. vrrp delay reload — sets the delay time for VRRP initialization after a system reboot. vrrp delay reload Set the delay time for VRRP initialization after a system reboot.
PAGE 1137
Usage Information The VRRP group only becomes active and sends VRRP packets when a virtual IP address is configured. When you delete the virtual address, the VRRP group stops sending VRRP packets. Related Command virtual-address — assigns up to 12 virtual IP addresses per VRRP group. VRRP for IPv6 Commands The following commands apply to IPv6. clear counters vrrp ipv6 Clear the counters recorded for IPv6 VRRP groups.
PAGE 1138
timer Command Modes Command History Usage Information Enter the keyword timer to enable debugging of the VRRP timer. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If no options are specified, debug is active on all interfaces and all VRRP groups. show vrrp ipv6 View the IPv6 VRRP groups that are active. If no VRRP groups are active, the system returns No Active VRRP group.
PAGE 1139
Line Beginning with Description • backup (BACKUP virtual router). the interface’s priority and the IP address of the MASTER. Hold Down:... Adv rcvd:... Example This line displays additional VRRP configuration information: • Hold Down displays the hold down timer interval in seconds. • Preempt displays TRUE if preempt is configured and FALSE if preempt is not configured. • AdvInt displays the Advertise Interval in seconds.
PAGE 1140
Parameters vrid Enter the virtual-router ID number of the VRRP group. The VRID range is from 1 to 255. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The VRRP group only becomes active and sends VRRP packets when a link-local virtual IP address is configured. When you delete the virtual address, the VRRP group stops sending VRRP packets.
PAGE 1141
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL. You can use the version both command to migrate from VRRPv2 to VRRPv3. When you set the VRRP protocol version to both, the switch sends only VRRPv3 advertisements but can receive either VRRPv2 or VRRPv3 packets. To migrate an IPv4 VRRP group from VRRPv2 to VRRPv3: 1.
PAGE 1142
62 ICMP Message Types This chapter lists and describes the possible ICMP message type resulting from a ping. The first three columns list the possible symbol or type/code. For example, you would receive a ! or 03 as an echo reply from your ping. Table 1. ICMP Messages and Their Definitions Symbol Type Code . 0 U 3 4 3 Error ICMP Message Types echo reply . destination unreachable: 0 network unreachable . 1 host unreachable . 2 protocol unreachable . 3 port unreachable .
PAGE 1143
Symbol & Type Code Description Query 8 0 echo request . 9 0 router advertisement . 10 0 router solicitation . 11 Error time exceeded: 0 time-to-live equals 0 during transit . 1 time-to-live equals 0 during reassembly . 12 parameter problem: 1 IP header bad (catchall error) . 2 required option missing . 13 0 timestamp request . 14 0 timestamp reply . 15 0 information request (obsolete) . 16 0 information reply (obsolete) . 17 0 address mask request .
PAGE 1144
63 SNMP Traps This chapter lists the traps sent by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). Each trap is listed by the fields Message ID, Trap Type, and Trap Option. Table 2.
PAGE 1145
Message ID Trap Type Trap Option RMON_HC_FALLING_THRESHOLD SNMP NONE NONE NONE ENVMON TEMP ENVMON TEMP ENVMON TEMP ENVMON TEMP ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE PROTO NONE %RPM0-P:CP %SNMP-4-RMON_HC_FALLING_THRESHOLD: RMON highcapacity falling threshold alarm from SNMP OID RESV N/A CHM_MIN_ALRM_TEMP %CHMGR-2-MINOR_TEMP: Minor alarm: chassis temperature CHM_MIN_ALRM_TEMP_CLR %CHMRG-5-MINOR_TEMP_CLR: Minor alarm cleared: c
PAGE 1146
Message ID Trap Type Trap Option PROTO NONE PROTO NONE PROTO NONE PROTO NONE ETS NONE ETS NONE ETS NONE ETS NONE PFC NONE PFC NONE %RPM1-P:RP2 %VRRP-3-VRRP_BAD_AUTH: vrid-1 on Gi 11/12 rcvd pkt with authentication failure VRRP_GO_MASTER %VRRP-6-VRRP_MASTER: vrid-%d on %s entering MASTER VRRP_PROTOCOL_ERROR VRRP_PROTOERR: VRRP protocol error on %S BGP4_ESTABLISHED %TRAP-5-PEER_ESTABLISHED: Neighbor %a, state %s BGP4_BACKW_XSITION %TRAP-5-BACKWARD_STATE_TRANS: Neighbor %a, state %s ETS_
PAGE 1147
Message ID Trap Type Trap Option PFC NONE PFC NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE ENTITY NONE %DIFFSERV-5-PFC_TRAP_TYPE_ADMIN_MODE_CHANGE : PFC Admin mode changed to on for port %s %DIFFSERV-5-PFC_TRAP_TYPE_ADMIN_MODE_CHANGE : PFC Admin mode changed to off for port %s PFC_TRAP_TYPE_OPER_STATE_CHANGE %DIFFSERV-5-PFC_TRAP_TYPE_OPER_STATE_CHANGE: PFC Oper state changed to init for port %s %DIFFSERV-5-PFC_TRAP_TYPE_OPER_STATE_CHANGE: PFC Oper state c
PAGE 1148
64 FC Flex IO Modules This part provides a generic, broad-level description of the operations, capabilities, and configuration commands of the Fiber Channel (FC) Flex IO module. FC Flex IO Modules This part provides a generic, broad-level description of the operations, capabilities, and configuration commands of the Fiber Channel (FC) Flex IO module.
PAGE 1149
%Error: Deprecated command is not supported on interfaces with dcb-buffer-threshold configured You must not modify the service-class dot1p mappings when any buffer-threshold-policy is configured on the system. S4810-1(conf)#service-class dot1p-mapping dot1p0 3 % Error: PFC buffer-threshold policies conflict with dot1p mappings. Please remove all dcbbuffer-threshold policies to change mappings.
PAGE 1150
description (for FCoE maps) In an FCoE map, add a text description of the FCoE and FC parameters used to transmit storage traffic over an M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway in a converged fabric. M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Syntax description text Parameters text Defaults None Command Modes FCOE MAP Command History Version 9.3(0.0) Enter a maximum of 32 characters.
PAGE 1151
After you apply an FCoE map on an FC interface, when the port is enabled (no shutdown), the NPIV proxy gateway starts sending FIP multicast advertisements on behalf of the FC port to downstream servers in order to advertise the availability of a new FCF port on the FCoE VLAN. To remove an FCoE map from an FC interface, enter the no fabric map-name command in Interface configuration mode.
PAGE 1152
fcf-priority In an FCoE map, configure the priority used by a server CNA to select an upstream FCoE forwarder (FCF). M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Syntax fcf—priority priority Parameters priority Defaults 128 Command Modes FCOE MAP Command History Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Enter the priority assigned to the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway, which appears to a downstream server CNA as an FCF.
PAGE 1153
The FC-MAP value is used to generate the fabric-provided MAC address (FP-MAC). The FPMA is used by servers to transmit FCoE traffic to the fabric. An FC-MAP can be associated with only one FCoE VLAN and vice versa. In an FCoE map, the FC-MAP value, fabric ID, and FCoE VLAN parameters must be unique. To remove a configured FC-MAP value from an FCoE map, enter the no fc-map command.
PAGE 1154
On an M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway, you cannot apply an FCoE map is applied on fabric-facing FC ports and server-facing 10–Gigabit Ethernet ports. An FCoE map consists of the following parameters: the dedicated FCoE VLAN used for storage traffic, the destination SAN fabric (FC-MAP value), FCF priority used by a server, and the FIP keepalive (FKA) advertisement timeout.
PAGE 1155
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION Version 9.3.0.0 Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module configured as an NPIV proxy gateway. FCoE storage traffic received from servers on an M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway is de-capsulated into Fibre Channel packets and forwarded over FC links to SAN switches in a specified fabric.
PAGE 1156
show fcoe-map Display the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps. M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Syntax show fcoe-map [brief | map-name] Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information brief Displays an overview of currently configured FCoE maps. map-name Displays the FC and FCoE configuration parameters in a specified FCoE map.
PAGE 1157
Field Description Oper-State Operational status of link to the fabric: Up (link is up and transmitting FC traffic), Down (link is down and not transmitting FC traffic), Link-wait (link is up and waiting for FLOGI to complete on peer FC port), or Removed (port has been shut down). The following table describes the show fcoe-map map-name output shown in the example below. Example Field Description Fabric-Name Name of a SAN fabric.
PAGE 1158
Related Commands fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric. show npiv devices Display the FCoE and FC devices currently logged in to an M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway.
PAGE 1159
Te 0/12 LOGGED_IN Te 0/13 LOGGED_IN Usage Information Example 20:01:00:10:18:f1:94:20 1003 Fc 0/5 fid_1003 FLOGI 10:00:00:00:c9:d9:9c:cb 1003 Fc 0/0 fid_1003 FDISC The following table describes the show npiv devices output shown in the example below. Field Description ENode [number] A server CNA that has successfully logged in to a fabric over an M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40 Switch with the FC Flex IO module Ethernet port in ENode mode. Enode MAC MAC address of a server CNA port.
PAGE 1160
ENode WWPN ENode WWNN FCoE MAC FC-ID LoginMethod Secs Status Related Commands 1160 : : : : : : : 10:00:00:00:c9:d9:9c:cb 10:00:00:00:c9:d9:9c:cd 0e:fc:03:01:02:02 01:02:01 FDISC 5593 LOGGED_IN fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SA FC Flex IO Modules
PAGE 1161
65 PMUX Mode of the MXL 10/40GbE Switch I/O Module This chapter describes the various CLI commands applicable in PMUX mode. Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of IEEE Ethernet enhancements that provide data centers with a single, robust, converged network to support multiple traffic types, including local area network (LAN), server, and storage traffic. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) commands for data center bridging features include 802.
PAGE 1162
Parameters {ets-conf | ets-reco | pfc} Enter the PFC and ETS TLVs advertised, where: • ets-conf: enables the advertisement of ETS configuration TLVs. • ets-reco: enables the advertisement of ETS recommend TLVs. • pfc: enables the advertisement of PFC TLVs. Defaults All PFC and ETS TLVs are advertised. Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 1163
the priority group. The sum of the allocated bandwidth to all queues in a priority group must be 100% of the bandwidth on the link. ETS-assigned bandwidth allocation applies only to data queues, not to control queues. The configuration of bandwidth allocation and strict-queue scheduling is not supported at the same time for a priority group. If you configure both, the configured bandwidth allocation is ignored for priority-group traffic when you apply the output policy on an interface.
PAGE 1164
Version 8.3.16.1 Usage Information Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. As soon as you apply a DCB policy with PFC enabled on an interface, DCBx starts exchanging information with PFC-enabled peers. The IEEE802.1Qbb, CEE, and CIN versions of PFC TLV are supported. DCBx also validates PFC configurations received in TLVs from peer devices. By applying a DCB input policy with PFC enabled, you enable PFC operation on ingress port traffic.
PAGE 1165
To delete the input policy, use the no dcb-policy input command. Parameters policy-name Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Enter the input policy name with the PFC configuration to an ingress interface. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1166
dcb-input-policyname Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Enter the policy name for the DCB input policy. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The dcb-policy input stack-unit all command overwrites any previous dcb-policy input stack-unit stack-unit-id configurations.
PAGE 1167
dcb-policy output stack-unit stack-ports all Apply the specified DCB output policy on all ports of the switch stack or a single stacked switch. Syntax dcb-policy output stack-unit {all | stack-unit-id} stack-ports all dcboutput-policy-name To remove all DCB output policies applied to the stacked ports, use the no dcb-policy output stack-unit all command. To remove only the DCB output policies applied to the specified switch, use the no dcb-policy output stack-unit command.
PAGE 1168
Defaults The PFC buffer is enabled on all ports on the stack unit. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If you configure PFC on a 40GbE port, count the 40GbE port as four PFC-enabled ports in the pfc-port number you enter in the command syntax.
PAGE 1169
To achieve lossless PFC operation, the PFC port count and queue number used for the reserved buffer size that is created must be greater than or equal to the buffer size required for PFC-enabled ports and lossless queues on the switch. You must reload the stack or a specified stack unit (use the reload command in EXEC Privilege mode) for the PFC buffer configuration to take effect. Related Commands dcb stack-unit pfc-buffering pfc-port pfc-queues — configures the PFC buffer for all switches in the stack.
PAGE 1170
Parameters auto | cee | cin | ieee-v2.5 Enter the DCBX version type used on the interface, where: • auto: configures the port to operate using the DCBX version received from a peer. • cee: configures the port to use CDD (Intel 1.01). • cin: configures the port to use Cisco-Intel-Nuova (DCBX 1.0). • ieee-v2: configures the port to use IEEE 802.1az (Draft 2.5). Defaults Auto Command Modes INTERFACE PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 1171
description Enter a text description of the DCB policy (PFC input or ETS output). Syntax description text To remove the text description, use the no description command. Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Related Commands text Enter the description of the output policy. The maximum is 32 characters. none • DCB INPUT POLICY • DCB OUTPUT POLICY Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 1172
Related Commands • dcb-output — creates a DCB output policy. • dcb-policy output — applies the output policy. fcoe priority-bits Configure the FCoE priority advertised for the FCoE protocol in application priority TLVs. Syntax fcoe priority-bits priority-bitmap To remove the configured FCoE priority, use the no fcoe priority-bits command. Parameters priority-bitmap Defaults 0x8 Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Usage Information Enter the priority-bitmap range.
PAGE 1173
Parameters value Defaults 45556 quantum Command Modes DCB INPUT POLICY Command History The range is (in quanta) from 712 to 65535. One quantum is equal to a 512-bit transmission. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1174
Parameters queue-range Enter the queue range. Separate the queue values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example, pfc no-drop queues 1,3 or pfc no-drop queues 2-3. The range is from 0 to 3. Defaults No lossless queues are configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1175
Usage Information You can enable any number of 802.1p priorities for PFC. Queues to which PFC priority traffic is mapped are lossless by default. Traffic may be interrupted due to an interface flap (going down and coming up) when you reconfigure the lossless queues for no-drop priorities in a PFC input policy and reapply the policy to an interface. The maximum number of lossless queues supported on the I/O Aggregator switch is four.
PAGE 1176
priority-group qos-policy Associate the 802.1p priority traffic in a priority group with the ETS configuration in a QoS output policy. Syntax priority-group group-name qos-policy ets-policy-name To remove the 802.1p priority group, use the no priority-group qos-policy command. Parameters group-name Enter the group name of the 802.1p priority group. The maximum is 32 characters. ets-policy-name Enter the ETS policy name.
PAGE 1177
Version 8.3.16.1 Usage Information Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. By default: • All 802.1p priorities are grouped in priority group 0. • 100% of the port bandwidth is assigned to priority group 0. The complete bandwidth is equally assigned to each priority class so that each class has 12 to 13%. NOTE: Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9.4(0.0) release.
PAGE 1178
• strict: strict-priority traffic is serviced before any other queued traffic. • werr: weighted elastic round robin (werr) provides low-latency scheduling for priority traffic on port queues. Defaults Weighted elastic round robin (WERR) scheduling is used to queue priority traffic. Command Modes POLICY-MAP-OUT-ETS Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.
PAGE 1179
show dcb Displays the data center bridging status, the number of PFC-enabled ports, and the number of PFC-enabled queues. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show dcb [stack-unit unit-number] unit number Enter the DCB unit number. The range is from 0 to 5. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1180
Field Description DCBX Operational Status Operational status (enabled or disabled) used to elect a configuration source and internally propagate a DCB configuration. The DCBX operational status is the combination of PFC and ETS operational status. Configuration Source Specifies whether the port serves as the DCBX configuration source on the switch: true (yes) or false (no). Local DCBX Compatibility mode DCBX version accepted in a DCB configuration as compatible.
PAGE 1181
Example Field Description PFC TLV Statistics: PFC Pause Tx pkts Number of PFC pause frames transmitted. PFC TLV Statistics: PFC Pause Rx pkts Number of PFC pause frames received. PFC TLV Statistics: Input PG TLV Pkts Number of PG TLVs received. PFC TLV Statistics: Output PG TLV Pkts Number of PG TLVs transmitted. PFC TLV Statistics: Error PG TLV Pkts Number of PG error packets received. Application Priority TLV Statistics: Input Appln Priority TLV pkts Number of Application TLVs received.
PAGE 1182
Is Configuration Source? TRUE Local DCBX Compatibility mode is CEE Local DCBX Configured mode is CEE Peer Operating version is CEE Local DCBX TLVs Transmitted: ErPfi Local DCBX Status ----------------DCBX Operational Version is 0 DCBX Max Version Supported is 0 Sequence Number: 2 Acknowledgment Number: 2 Protocol State: In-Sync Peer DCBX Status: ---------------DCBX Operational Version is 0 DCBX Max Version Supported is 255 Sequence Number: 2 Acknowledgment Number: 2 Total DCBX Frames transmitted 27 Total DC
PAGE 1183
Field Description Admin mode ETS mode: on or off. When on, the scheduling and bandwidth allocation configured in an ETS output policy or received in a DCBX TLV from a peer can take effect on an interface. Admin Parameters ETS configuration on local port, including priority groups, assigned dot1p priorities, and bandwidth allocation.
PAGE 1184
1 13% ETS 2 13% ETS 3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Remote Parameters: ------------------Remote is disabled Local Parameters: -----------------Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 0% ETS 2 0% ETS 3 0% ETS 4 0% ETS 5 0% ETS 6 0% ETS 7 0% ETS Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 13% ETS 1 13% ETS 2 13% ETS 3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled Example (Detail)
PAGE 1185
Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Bandwidth 100% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% TSA ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 13% ETS 1 13% ETS 2 13% ETS 3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Output Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts 0 Input Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Output Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Error Traffic Class TLV Pkts show inter
PAGE 1186
Field Description from peers; received PFC configuration take effect. The admin operational status for a DCBX exchange of PFC configuration is enabled or disabled. 1186 Remote is enabled, Priority list Remote Willing Status is enabled Operational status (enabled or disabled) of peer device for DCBX exchange of PFC configuration with a list of the configured PFC priorities. Willing status of peer device for DCBX exchange (Willing bit received in PFC TLV): enabled or disable.
PAGE 1187
Field Description PFC TLV Statistics: Error pkts Number of PFC error packets received. PFC TLV Statistics: Pause Tx pkts Number of PFC pause frames transmitted. PFC TLV Statistics: Pause Rx pkts Number of PFC pause frames received.
PAGE 1188
slot/port Command Modes Command History Enter the slot/port number. INTERFACE Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1189
Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example [ets-profile] Enter the ETS profile. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. NOTE: Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9.4(0.0) release.
PAGE 1190
Command Modes Command History Example CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1191
Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1192
clear fip-snooping statistics Clears the statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all VLANs, a specified VLAN, or a specified port interface. Syntax clear fip-snooping statistics [interface vlan vlan-id | interface port-type port/slot | interface port-channel port-channel-number] Parameters Command Modes Command History vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID of the FIP packet statistics to be cleared. port-type port/slot Enter the port-type and slot number of the FIP packet statistics to be cleared.
PAGE 1193
Version 8.3.16.1 Usage Information Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The maximum number of FCFs supported per FIP snooping-enabled VLAN is four. The maximum number of FIP snooping sessions supported per ENode server is 16. fip-snooping fc-map Configure the FC-MAP value FIP snooping uses on all VLANs. Syntax fip-snooping fc-map fc-map-value To return the configured FM-MAP value to the default value, use the no fip-snooping fc-map command.
PAGE 1194
advertise dcbx-app-tlv Configure DCBX to send iSCSI TLV advertisements. Syntax advertise dcbx-app-tlv iscsi To disable DCBX iSCSI TLV advertisements, use the no advertise dcbx-app-tlv iscsi command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1195
dot1p vlan-priorityvalue Enter the dot1p value of the VLAN priority tag assigned to the incoming packets in an iSCSI session. The range is from 0 to 7. The default is the dot1p value in ingress iSCSI frames is not changed and is the same priority is used in iSCSI TLV advertisements if you did not enter the iscsi priority-bits command. dscp dscp-value Enter the DSCP value assigned to the incoming packets in an iSCSI session. The valid range is from 0 to 63.
PAGE 1196
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. iscsi profile-compellant Configure the auto-detection of Dell Compellent arrays on a port. Syntax iscsi profile-compellent Defaults Dell Compellent disk arrays are not detected. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
PAGE 1197
Interfaces The commands in this chapter are supported by Dell Networking Operating System (OS). This chapter contains the following sections: • Basic Interface Commands • Port Channel Commands Basic Interface Commands The following commands are for Physical interfaces. clear counters Clear the counters used in the show interfaces commands for all virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) groups, virtual local area networks (VLANs), and physical interfaces, or selected ones.
PAGE 1198
Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Important Points to Remember: • Spaces between characters are not preserved after entering this command unless you enclose the entire description in quotation marks (“desc_text”).
PAGE 1199
Usage Information The globally assigned 48-bit Multicast address 01-80-C2-00-00-01 is used to send and receive pause frames. To allow full duplex flow control, stations implementing the pause operation instruct the MAC to enable the reception of frames with a destination address equal to this multicast address. The pause: • Starts when either the packet pointer or the buffer threshold is met (whichever is met first). When the discard thresh is met, packets are dropped.
PAGE 1200
on Related Commands on off off on on off on off on LocNegRx off off off off LocNegTx RemNegRx RemNegTx off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on off off off on off off off off off off on on on off off on on off off on on off on on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on show running-config — displays the flow configuration parameters (non-default values only). show interfaces — displays the negotiated flow control parameters.
PAGE 1201
By default, physical interfaces are disabled (shutdown) and are in Layer 3 mode. To place an interface in mode, ensure that the interface’s configuration does not contain an IP address and enter the Port Channel Commands command. The tunnel interface operates as an ECMP (equal cost multi path) only when the next hop to the tunnel destination is over a physical interface. If you select any other interface as the next hop to the tunnel destination, the tunnel interface does not operate as an ECMP.
PAGE 1202
configuration. You can enter up to six comma-separated ranges. Spaces are not required between the commas. Comma-separated ranges can include VLANs, portchannels, and physical interfaces. Slot/Port information must contain a space before and after the dash. For example, interface range gigabitethernet 0/1 - 5 is valid; interface range gigabitethernet 0/1-5 is NOT valid.
PAGE 1203
Use the show running-config command to display the VLAN and port-channel interfaces. VLAN or port-channel interfaces that are not displayed in the show running-config command cannot be used with the bulk configuration feature of the interface range command. You cannot create virtual interfaces (VLAN, Port-channel) using the interface range command. NOTE: If a range has VLAN, physical, port-channel, and SONET interfaces, only commands related to physical interfaces can be bulk configured.
PAGE 1204
Version 8.3.16.1 Usage Information Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. For more information about VLANs and the commands to configure them, refer to the Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands. FTP, TFTP, and SNMP operations are not supported on a VLAN. MAC/IP ACLs are not supported. Example Dell(conf)#int vlan 3 Dell(conf-if-vl-3)# Related Commands interface — configures a physical interface. interface port-channel — configures a port channel group.
PAGE 1205
Command Modes Command History Usage Information INTERFACE Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. When you configure keepalive, the system sends a self-addressed packet out of the configured interface to verify that the far end of a WAN link is up.
PAGE 1206
1522 and IP MTU of 1500 and untagged members with Link MTU of 1518 and IP MTU of 1500. The VLAN’s Link MTU cannot be higher than 1518 bytes and its IP MTU cannot be higher than 1500 bytes. The following shows the difference between Link MTU and IP MTU. Layer 2 Overhead Link MTU and IP MTU Delta Ethernet (untagged) 18 bytes VLAN Tag 22 bytes Untagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 22 bytes Tagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 26 bytes negotiation auto Enable auto-negotiation on an interface.
PAGE 1207
CAUTION: Ensure that one end of your node is configured as forced-master and one is configured as forced-slave. If both are configured the same (that is, forced-master or forced-slave), the show interfaces command flaps between an auto-neg-error and forced-master/slave states. You can display master/slave settings with the show interfaces command.
PAGE 1208
• Up at 100 Mb/s • Up at 100 Mb/s • Down • Down * You cannot disable auto-negotiation when the speed is set to 1000 or auto. Related Commands speed (for 1000/10000 interfaces) — sets the link speed to 1000, 10000, or auto-negotiate the speed. portmode hybrid To accept both tagged and untagged frames, set a physical port or port-channel. A port configured this way is identified as a hybrid port in report displays.
PAGE 1209
Dell(conf-if-vl-20)#untag tengig 0/20 Dell(conf-if-vl-20)# Example (tagged hybrid) Dell(conf)#interface tengig 0/20 Dell(conf-if-te-0/20)#no shut Dell(conf-if-te-0/20)#portmode hybrid Dell(conf-if-te-0/20#sw Dell(conf-if-te-0/20)#int vlan 10 Dell(conf-if-vl-10)#int tengig 0/20 Dell(conf-if-vl-20)# untag tengig 0/20 Dell (conf-if-vl-20)# Dell(conf)#do show interfaces switchport tengigabitethernet 3/20 Codes: U x G i V - Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged GVRP tagged, M - Trunk, H - VSN
PAGE 1210
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Splitting a 40G port into 4x10G port is supported on standalone and stacked units. • You cannot use split ports as stack-link to stack an MXL Switch. • The split ports MXL switch unit cannot be a part of any stacked system.
PAGE 1211
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE PORTCHANNEL Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Use the interface port-channel command to access this command. You cannot add an interface to a Port Channel if the interface contains an IP address in its configuration.
PAGE 1212
Parameters channel-number Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1213
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If you use this command to configure the minimum number of links in a LAG that must be in “oper up” status, the LAG must have at least that number of “oper up” links before it can be declared as up.
PAGE 1214
Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ip igmp querier-timeout Change the interval that must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another multicast router that should be the querier.
PAGE 1215
Version Description E-Series legacy command. ip igmp query-interval Change the transmission frequency of IGMP general queries the Querier sends. Syntax ip igmp query-interval seconds To return to the default values, use the no ip igmp query-interval command. Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds between queries sent out. The range is from 1 to 18000. The default is 60 seconds. Defaults 60 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1216
Defaults 10 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T.
PAGE 1217
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. IGMP Snooping Commands Dell Networking OS supports IGMP Snooping version 2 and 3 on all Dell Networking systems. Important Points to Remember for IGMP Snooping • Dell Networking OS supports version 1, version 2, and version 3 hosts.
PAGE 1218
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To enable IGMP snooping, enter this command. When you enable this command from CONFIGURATION mode, IGMP snooping enables on all VLAN interfaces (except the default VLAN). NOTE: Execute the no shutdown command on the VLAN interface for IGMP Snooping to function. ip igmp snooping fast-leave Enable IGMP snooping fast-leave for this VLAN.
PAGE 1219
enable IGMP fast leave processing, the switch removes an interface from the multicast group as soon as it detects an IGMP version 2 leave message on the interface. ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval The last member query interval is the maximum response time inserted into Group-Specific queries sent in response to Group-Leave messages.
PAGE 1220
ip igmp snooping mrouter Statically configure a VLAN member port as a multicast router interface. Z9000 S4810S4820TS6000S5000Z9500 Syntax ip igmp snooping mrouter interface interface To delete a specific multicast router interface, use the no igmp snooping mrouter interface interface command. Parameters interface interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port[/subport] or number information: • For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1221
mrouter interface command in the VLAN context. The interface to the router must be a part of the VLAN where you are entering the command. ip igmp snooping querier Enable IGMP querier processing for the VLAN interface. Z9500S5000S4810S4820TS6000 Syntax ip igmp snooping querier To disable IGMP querier processing for the VLAN interface, use the no ip igmp snooping querier command. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN — (conf-if-vl-n) Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1222
• MAC Addressing Commands MAC Addressing Commands The following commands are related to configuring, managing, and viewing MAC addresses. mac-address-table aging-time Specify an aging time for MAC addresses to remove from the MAC address table. Syntax mac-address-table aging-time seconds To delete the configured aging time, use the no mac-address-table aging-time seconds command.
PAGE 1223
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp Ensure that address resolution protocol (ARP) refreshes the egress interface when a station move occurs due to a topology change.
PAGE 1224
lacp port-priority To influence which ports will be put in Standby mode when there is a hardware limitation that prevents all compatible ports from aggregating, configure the port priority. Syntax lacp port-priority priority-value To return to the default setting, use the no lacp port-priority priority-value command. Parameters priority-value Defaults 32768 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Enter the port-priority value. The higher the value number, the lower the priority.
PAGE 1225
Mode Function active An interface is in an active negotiating state in this mode. LACP runs on any link configured in the active state and also automatically initiates negotiation with other ports by initiating LACP packets. passive An interface is not in an active negotiating state in this mode. LACP runs on any link configured in the passive state. Ports in a passive state respond to negotiation requests from other ports that are in active states.
PAGE 1226
For details about implementing LLDP/LLDP-MED, refer to the Link Layer Discovery Protocol chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. advertise dot3-tlv Advertise dot3 TLVs (Type, Length, Value). Syntax advertise dot3-tlv {max-frame-size} To remove advertised dot3-tlv, use the no advertise dot3-tlv {max-frame-size} command. Parameters max-frame-size Enter the keywords max-frame-size to advertise the dot3 maximum frame size.
PAGE 1227
clear lldp counters Clear LLDP transmitting and receiving counters for all physical interfaces or a specific physical interface. Syntax Parameters clear lldp counters interface interface Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1228
To disable debugging, use the no debug lldp interface {interface | all}{events} {packet {brief | detail} {tx | rx | both}} command. Parameters interface • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to display information on all interfaces.
PAGE 1229
debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. hello Configure the rate at which the LLDP control packets are sent to its peer. Syntax hello seconds To revert to the default, use the no hello seconds command. Parameters seconds Enter the rate, in seconds, at which the control packets are sent to its peer. The rate is from 5 to 180 seconds. The default is 30 seconds.
PAGE 1230
Quality of Service (QoS) The Dell Networking operating software commands for quality of service (QoS) include traffic conditioning and congestion control. QoS commands are not universally supported on all Dell Networking Products. Per-Port QoS Commands Per-port QoS (port-based QoS) allows you to define the QoS configuration on a per-physical-port basis. dot1p-priority Assign a value to the IEEE 802.1p bits on the traffic this interface receives.
PAGE 1231
service-class dynamic dot1p Honor all 802.1p markings on incoming switched traffic on an interface (from INTERFACE mode) or on all interfaces (from CONFIGURATION mode). A CONFIGURATION mode entry supersedes an INTERFACE mode entry. Syntax service-class dynamic dot1p To return to the default setting, use the no service-class dynamic dot1p command. Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless you enable the service-class dynamic dot1p command.
PAGE 1232
Parameters Defaults value Enter a dot1p list number and value. The list number range is from 0 to 7. The range is from 0 to 3. For each dot1p Priority, the default CoS queue value is: • dot1p CoS Queue 0 0-7 1 0-7 2 0-7 3 0-7 4 0-7 5 0-7 6 0-7 7 0-7 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1233
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Guarantee a minimum bandwidth to different queues globally using the service-class bandwidthpercentage command from CONFIGURATION mode. The command is applied in the same way as the bandwidth-percentage command in an output QoS policy.
PAGE 1234
Parameters description Enter a description to identify the policies (80 characters maximum). Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (policy-map-input and policy-map-output; conf-qos-policy-in and conf-qos-policy-out; wred) Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. policy-map-output — creates an output policy map.
PAGE 1235
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To assign traffic to different flows using QoS policy, use the Output Policy map. This command enables Policy-Map-Output Configuration mode (conf-policy-map-out).
PAGE 1236
Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information A single policy-map can be attached to one or more interfaces to specify the service-policy for those interfaces. A policy map attached to an interface can be modified. Related Commands policy-map-output — creates an output policy map.
PAGE 1237
show qos qos-policy-output View the output QoS policy details. Syntax show qos qos-policy-output [qos-policy-name] Parameters Defaults Enter the QoS policy name. none Command Modes Command History Example qos-policy-name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 1238
back-up destination Configure the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the management interface on the remote VLT peer to be used as the endpoint of the VLT backup link for sending out-of-band hello messages. Syntax back-up destination {[ipv4–address] | [ipv6 ipv6–address] [interval seconds]} Parameters ipv4–address Enter the IPv4 address of the backup destination. ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 then an IPv6 address in the X:X:X:X::X format.
PAGE 1239
The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.2(0.2) Added multicast and ndp parameters. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Version 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 1240
On the S4810, during boot-up in a stacking configuration, the system must be able to reach the DHCP server with the boot image and configuration image. During boot-up, only untagged DHCP requests are sent to the DHCP server to receive an offer on static LAGs between switches. The DHCP server must be configured to start in BMP mode.
PAGE 1241
show vlt mismatch Display mismatches in VLT parameters. Syntax show vlt mismatch Command Modes EXEC Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.2(0.
PAGE 1242
Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. When you create a VLT domain on a switch, Dell Networking OS automatically creates a VLT-system MAC address used for internal system operations.
PAGE 1243
vlt domain Enable VLT on a switch, configure a VLT domain, and enter VLT-domain configuration mode. Syntax Parameters vlt domain domain-id domain-id Enter the Domain ID number. Configure the same domain ID on the peer switch. The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1244
Version 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. reload-type Configure a switch to reload as a DHCP client in BMP mode with all ports configured for Layer 3 traffic or in Normal mode. Syntax reload-type [bmp | normal—reload {[auto—save {enable | disable}] | [configscr-download {enable | disable}] | [dhcp-timeout minutes]| retry-count number | vendor-class-identifier description] Use the disable bmp command to stop the BMP process. Parameters bmp (Default) Enable the BMP reload type.
PAGE 1245
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced support for vendor-class-identifier that replaces deprecated parameter user-defined-string Also added support for retry-count. Version 9.1(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000. Updated the command mode from EXEC Privilege to GLOBAL CONFIGURATION. Updated the parameter from jumpstart to bmp.
PAGE 1246
Parameters interface interface Specify one or more downstream interfaces.
PAGE 1247
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. Version 8.4.2.
PAGE 1248
• Fast Ethernet: fastethernet {slot/port | slot/port-range} • 1 Gigabit Ethernet: gigabitethernet {slot/port | slot/portrange} • 10 Gigabit Ethernet: tengigabitethernet {slot/port |slot/portrange} • Port channel: port-channel {1-512 | port-channel-range} Where port-range and port-channel-range specify a range of ports separated by a dash (-) and/or individual ports/port channels in any order; for example: gigabitethernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12 port-channel 1-3,5.
PAGE 1249
Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. Version 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50. • downstream— assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface. • uplink-state-group — creates an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links.
PAGE 1250
enable Enable uplink state group tracking for a specific UFD group. Syntax enable To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, use the no enable command. Defaults Upstream-link tracking is automatically enabled in an uplink-state group. Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1251
Example Related Commands Dell#show running-config uplink-state-group ! no enable uplink state track 1 downstream GigabitEthernet 0/2,4,6,11-19 upstream TengigabitEthernet 0/48, 52 upstream PortChannel 1 ! uplink state track 2 downstream GigabitEthernet 0/1,3,5,7-10 upstream TengigabitEthernet 0/56,60 • show uplink-state-group — displays the status information on a specified uplink-state group or all groups. • uplink-state-group — creates an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links.
PAGE 1252
Downstream Interfaces : Uplink State Group : 3 Status: Enabled, Up Upstream Interfaces : Gi 0/46(Up) Gi 0/47(Up) Downstream Interfaces : Te 13/0(Up) Te 13/1(Up) Te 13/3(Up) Te 13/5(Up) Te 13/6(Up) Uplink State Group : 5 Status: Enabled, Down Upstream Interfaces : Gi 0/0(Dwn) Gi 0/3(Dwn) Gi 0/5(Dwn) Downstream Interfaces : Te 13/2(Dis) Te 13/4(Dis) Te 13/11(Dis) Te 13/12(Dis) Te 13/13(Dis) Te 13/14(Dis) Te 13/15(Dis) Uplink State Group : 6 Status: Enabled, Up Upstream Interfaces : Downstream Interfaces : Upl
PAGE 1253
An uplink-state group is considered to be operationally down if no upstream interfaces in the group are in the Link-Up state. No uplink-state tracking is performed when a group is disabled or in an operationally down state. To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, use the no enable command in uplink-state-group configuration mode.
PAGE 1254
Usage Information You can assign physical port or port-channel interfaces to an uplink-state group. You can assign an interface to only one uplink-state group. Configure each interface assigned to an uplinkstate group as either an upstream or downstream interface, but not both. You can assign individual member ports of a port channel to the group. An uplink-state group can contain either the member ports of a port channel or the port channel itself, but not both.
PAGE 1255
To disable traps, use the no snmp-server enable traps [notification-type] [notification-option] command. Parameters notification-type notification-option Enter the type of notification from the following list: • snmp — Notification of RFC 1157 traps. • stack — Notification of stacking traps.
PAGE 1256
Parameters ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address of the host (configurable hosts is limited to 16). ipv6-address Enter the keyword host then the IPv6 address of the host in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. traps (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword traps to send trap notifications to the specified host. The default is traps. informs (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword informs to send inform notifications to the specified host.
PAGE 1257
Usage Information In order to configure the router to send SNMP notifications, enter at least one snmp-server host command. If you enter the command with no keywords, all trap types are enabled for the host. If you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent. In order to enable multiple hosts, issue a separate snmp-server host command for each host. You can specify multiple notification types in the command for each host.
PAGE 1258
Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands show logging — displays logging settings and system messages in the internal buffer. logging Configure an IP address or host name of a Syslog server where logging messages are sent.
PAGE 1259
logging buffered Enable logging and specify which messages are logged to an internal buffer. By default, all messages are logged to the internal buffer. Syntax logging buffered [level] [size] To return to the default values, use the default logging buffered command. To disable logging stored to an internal buffer, use the no logging buffered command.
PAGE 1260
To disable logging to the console, use the no logging console command. Parameters level (OPTIONAL) Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following parameters: emergencies, alerts, critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or debugging. The default is 7 or debugging. Defaults level = 7; size = debugging Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1261
Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 1262
Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Version 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on ExaScale. Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Syslog messages contain the IP address of the interface used to egress the router. By configuring the logging source-interface command, the Syslog packets contain the IP address of the interface configured.
PAGE 1263
E-Series legacy command Example (Partial) Dell#show logging Syslog logging: enabled Console logging: level debugging Monitor logging: level debugging Buffer logging: level debugging, 5604 Messages Logged, Size (524288 bytes) Trap logging: level informational Oct 8 09:25:37: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Connection with neighbor 223.80.255.254 closed. Hold time expired Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.200.13.2 Up Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.1.1.
PAGE 1264
The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.